Modified Curriculum for B.Tech Degree Semesters I and II

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

Modified Curriculum for B.Tech Degree

Semesters I and II

2016

APJ Abdul Kalam Technological University CET Campus, Thiruvananthapuram Kerala -695016 India

Phone +91 471 2598122, 2598422 Fax +91 471 2598522 Web: ktu.edu.in Email: [email protected]

SEMESTER I

Slot Course No. Subject L-T-P Hours Credits

A MA101 Calculus 3-1-0 4 4

PH100 Engineering Physics 3-1-0 4 4

(1/2) CY100 Engineering Chemistry 3-1-0 4 4

BE100 Engineering Mechanics 3-1-0 4 4 C

(1/2) BE110 Engineering Graphics 1-1-3 5 3

D BE101-04 Introduction to Electronics Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

E BE103 Introduction to Sustainable Engineering 2-0-1 3 3

CE100 Basics of Civil Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

ME100 Basics of Mechanical Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

EE100 Basics of Electrical Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

(1/4)

EC100 Basics of Electronics Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

PH110 Engineering Physics Lab 0-0-2 2 1 S

(1/2) CY110 Engineering Chemistry Lab 0-0-2 2 1

CE110/ME110/ 0-0-2 2 1 Basic Engineering Workshops

EE110/EC110/ +

(CS110 for CS and related branches and (2/4)

CH110 for CH and related branches only) CS110/CH110 0-0-2 2 1

U100 Language lab/CAD Practice/Bridge courses/Micro Projects etc

U 0-0-(2/3) (2/3)

30 24/23

V100 Entrepreneurship/TBI/NCC/NSS/ Activity

V 0-0-2 2

points Physical Edn. etc

Notes:

1. Basic Engineering course of the parent branch included as Introduction to

______Engineering. (3 credits)

List of Courses offered under BE 101-0X and Branches associated with each course

1. BE101-01 Introduction to Civil Engineering

Civil Engineering

2. BE101-02 Introduction to Mechanical Engineering Sciences

Aeronautical Engineering, Automobile Engineering, Food Technology,

Industrial Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Mechanical Engineering (Automobile), Mechanical Engineering (Production), Mechatronics, Metallurgy, Naval Architecture & Ship Building , Production Engineering.

3. BE101-03 Introduction to Electrical Engineering

Electrical & Electronics Engineering.

4. BE101-04 Introduction to Electronics Engineering

Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering, Biomedical Engineering, Electronics & Biomedical Engineering, Electronics & Communication Engineering, Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering, Instrumentation & Control Engineering.

5. BE101-05 Introduction to Computing and Problem Solving

Computer Science & Engineering, Information Technology.

6. BE101-06 Introduction to Chemical Engineering

Biotechnology/ Biotechnology & Biochemical Engineering, Chemical Engineering,

2. Institutions can recommend one of four other Basic Engineering courses offered during this semester for every branch. However, the basic course selected should exclude the one corresponding to their branch of specialization. eg. Student who took Introduction to Civil Engineering should not take Basics of Civil Engineering; student who took Introduction to Electrical Engineering should not take Basics of Electrical Engineering

3. The six basic engineering workshops will be connected with the Introductory or Basics of Engineering courses offered. The students should attend two workshops in Semester 1 and two in Semester 2.

For example, students opting Introduction to Civil Engineering or Basics of Civil Engineering should attend the Civil Engineering Workshop, students opting Introduction to Mechanical Engineering or Basics of Mechanical Engineering should attend the Mechanical Engineering Workshop, students opting Introduction to Chemical Engineering should attend the Chemical Engineering Workshop and students opting Introduction to Computing and Problem Solving should attend the Computer Science Workshop etc. In addition, the students should attend one more workshop course in Semester 1, corresponding to the other Basic Engineering course they had been assigned by the institution. The workshop courses corresponding to both introductory and basic courses are same. However, the institutions may allot exercises or experiments listed in the syllabus based on the contents of corresponding theory course.

4. Engineering Physics and Engineering Chemistry shall be offered in both semesters. Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in the institution to opt for Engineering Physics in S1 and Engineering Chemistry in S2 and vice versa. Students opting for Engineering Physics in S1 should attend Engineering Physics Lab in S1 and students opting for Engineering Chemistry in S1 should opt for Engineering Chemistry Lab in S1.

5. Engineering Mechanics and Engineering Graphics shall be offered in both semesters. Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of number of branches in the institution to opt for Engineering Mechanics in Semester 1 and Engineering Graphics in Semester 2 and vice versa.

6. It may be noted that for items 4 and 5 above, all students belonging to a particular branch of study must be assigned the same course during one semester. For example, all students belonging to Electrical and Electronics Engineering in an institution may be assigned Engineering Physics and Engineering Physics lab, while all students in Electronics and Communication Engineering branch may be assigned Engineering Chemistry and Chemistry lab. Likewise, all students in Civil Engineering branch may be assigned Engineering Graphics, while all students in Mechanical Engineering branch may be allotted the Engineering Mechanics in Semester 1 and vice versa in Semester 2.

7. For Course U, the Institutions should conduct diagnostic tests to identify the training requirements of each student and advise them to attend the suitable programme. The students who excel in all diagnostic tests can be assigned Micro projects under the guidance of faculty members. The classes for which BE110 Engineering Graphics is offered under slot C may be divided into two batches and these batches shall attend CAD Practice lab & Language Lab in alternate weeks.

8. Course V is for earning activity points outside academic hours, the details are covered in rules and regulations of KTU.

SEMESTER II

Slot Course No. Subject L-T-P Hours Credits

A MA102 Differential Equations 3-1-0 4 4

PH100 Engineering Physics 3-1-0 4 4

(1/2) CY100 Engineering Chemistry 3-1-0 4 4

BE100 Engineering Mechanics 3-1-0 4 4 C

(1/2) BE110 Engineering Graphics 1-1-3 5 3

D BE102 Design & Engineering 2-0-2 4 3

CE 100 Basics of Civil Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

ME 100 Basics of Mechanical Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

EE 100 Basics of Electrical Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

E, F (2/4) EC 100 Basics of Electronics Engineering 2-1-0 3 3

Computer Programming CS 100 (Only for CSE & IT branches) 2-1-0 3 3

PH110 Engineering Physics Lab 0-0-2 2 1 S

(1/2) CY110 Engineering Chemistry Lab 0-0-2 2 1

CE110/ME110/ 0-0-2 2 1

T EE110/EC110 Basic Engineering Workshops

CS 120 Computer Programming Lab ( only for CSE & IT Branches) (2/4)

0-0-2 2 1

U100 Language lab / CAD Practice/ Bridge courses/ Micro Projects etc

U 0-0-(1/2) (1/2)

30 24/23

V100 Entrepreneurship /TBI/NCC/NSS/ Activity

V 0-0-2 2

points Physical Edn. etc

Note 1: Institutions can assign two of four of Basics of Engineering courses not already taken by the student in the previous semester and the corresponding Workshop courses in Semester 2. CS 100 Basics of Computer Programming & CS120 Computer Programming Lab are mandatory for Computer Science & Engineering and Information Technology branches. Other branches are not allowed to opt these courses. Note 2: For Course U, the classes for which BE110 Engineering Graphics is offered under slot C may be divided into two batches and these batches shall attend CAD Practice lab & Language Lab in alternate weeks.

Note: The Curriculum for Semesters I and II 2015 is slightly modified. The modifications are highlighted in red colour. The modified curriculum will not affect failed students of 2015 batch

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

Curriculum for B.Tech Degree Semesters III to VIII 2016 Electronics and Communication Engineering

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

CET CAMPUS, THIRUVANANTHAPURAM – 695016

KERALA, INDIA

Phone +91 471 2598122, 2598422 Fax +91 471 2598522 Web: ktu.edu.in Email: [email protected]

BRANCH:Electronics & Communication Engineering

SEMESTER - 3

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Exam Code Slot

Linear Algebra & Complex MA201 3-1-0 4 A Analysis EC201 Network Theory 3-1-0 4 B EC203 Solid State Devices 3-1-0 4 C EC205 Electronic Circuits 3-1-0 4 D EC207 Logic Circuit Design 3-0-0 3 E HS200/ 3-0-0/ Business Economics/Life Skills 3 F HS210 2-0-2 EC231 Electronic Devices & Circuits Lab 0-0-3 1 S Electronic Design Automation EC233 0-0-3 1 T Lab Total Credits = 24 Hours: 28/29 Cumulative Credits= 71

SEMESTER - 4

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Exam Slot Code Probability, Random Processes MA204 3-1-0 4 A and Numerical Methods EC202 Signals & Systems 3-1-0 4 B

EC204 Analog Integrated Circuits 4-0-0 4 C

EC206 Computer Organization 3-0-0 3 D Analog Communication EC208 3-0-0 3 E Engineering HS210/ 2-0-2/ Life Skills/Business Economics 3 HS200 3-0-0 F EC232 Analog Integrated Circuits Lab 0-0-3 1 S EC230 Logic Circuit Design Lab 0-0-3 1 T Total Credits = 23 Hours= 27/28Cumulative Credits= 94

BRANCH:Electronics & Communication Engineering

SEMESTER - 5

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Exam Code Slot

EC301 Digital Signal Processing 3-1-0 4 A

EC303 Applied Electromagnetic Theory 3-0-0 3 B

Microprocessors & EC305 3-0-0 3 C Microcontrollers Power Electronics & EC307 3-0-0 3 D Instrumentation

HS300 Principles of Management 3-0-0 3 E

Elective 1 3-0-0 3 F

EC341 Design Project 0-1-2 2 S

EC333 Digital Signal Processing Lab 0-0-3 1 T

Power Electronics & EC335 0-0-3 1 U Instrumentation Lab Total Credits = 23 Hours: 28 Cumulative Credits= 117

Elective 1:- 1. EC361 Digital System Design

2. EC363 Optimization Techniques

3. EC365 Biomedical Engineering

4. EC360 Soft Computing

BRANCH:Electronics & Communication Engineering

SEMESTER - 6

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Exam Slot Code

EC302 Digital Communication 4-0-0 4 A

EC304 VLSI 3-0-0 3 B

EC306 Antenna & Wave Propagation 3-0-0 3 C

EC308 Embedded System 3-0-0 3 D

EC312 Object Oriented Programming 3-0-0 3 E

Elective 2 3-0-0 3 F

Communication Engg Lab EC332 0-0-3 1 (Analog& Digital) S EC334 Microcontroller Lab 0-0-3 1 T

EC352 Comprehensive Exam 0-1-1 2 U Total Credits = 23 Hours: 27 Cumulative Credits= 140

Elective 2:-

1. EC362 Modelling & Simulation of Communication Systems

2. EC366 Real Time Operating Systems

3. EC368 Robotics

4. EC370 Digital Image Processing

BRANCH:Electronics & Communication Engineering

SEMESTER - 7

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Exam Slot Code

EC401 Information Theory & Coding 4-0-0 4 A

EC403 Microwave & Radar Engg 3-0-0 3 B

EC405 Optical Communication 3-0-0 3 C

EC407 Computer Communication 3-0-0 3 D

EC409 Control Systems 3-0-0 3 E

Elective 3 3-0-0 3 F

EC451 Seminar & Project Preliminary 0-1-4 2 S

Communication Systems Lab EC431 0-0-3 1 T (Optical & Microwave) Total Credits = 22 Hours: 27 Cumulative Credits= 162

Elective 3:-

1. EC461 Microwave Devices and Circuits

2. EC463 Speech and Audio Signal Processing

3. EC465 MEMS

4. EC467 Pattern Recognition

5. EC469 Opto Electronic Devices

BRANCH:Electronics & Communication Engineering

SEMESTER - 8

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Exam Slot Code EC402 Nano electronics 3-0-0 3 A Advanced Communication EC404 3-0-0 3 B Systems

Elective 4 3-0-0 3 C

Elective 5 (Non Departmental) 3-0-0 3 D

EC492 Project 6 S Total Credits = 18 Hours: 29 Cumulative Credits= 180

Elective 4:-

1. EC462 Mixed Signal Circuit Design

2. EC464 Low Power VLSI Design

3. EC466 Cyber Security

4. EC468 Secure Communication

5. EC472 Integrated Optics & Photonic Systems

6.EC474 Computer Vision

ELECTIVE 5 (NON DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVE COURSES)

(Note:- If the student has studied or is studying the elective course given in the bracket then the corresponding ND elective cannot be chosen)

1. AO482 FLIGHT AGAIST GRAVITY

2. AE482 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION

3. AE484 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM DESIGN

4. AU486 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS

5. BM482 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

6. BM484 MEDICAL IMAGING & IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES

7. BT461 DESIGN OF BIOLOGICAL WASTEWATER SYSTEMS

8. BT362 SUSTAINABLE ENERGY PROCESSES

9. CH482 PROCESS UTILITIES AND PIPE LINE DESIGN

10. CH484 FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY

11. CE482 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

12.CE484 APPLIED EARTH SYSTEMS

13.CE486 GEO INFORMATICS FOR INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

14.CE488 DISASTER MANAGEMENT

15. CE494 ENVIRONMENT HEALTH AND SAFETY

16.CS482 DATA STRUCTURES

17.CS484 COMPUTER GRAPHICS

18.CS488 C # AND .NET PROGRAMMING

19.EE482 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING

20.EE486 SOFT COMPUTING (EC 360 SOFT COMPUTING)

21. EE488 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

22. EE494 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS

23. FT482 FOOD PROCESS ENGINEERING 7

24. FT484 FOOD STORAGE ENGINEERING

25. FT486 FOOD ADDITIVES AND FLAVOURING

26.IE482 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

27. IE484 INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ANALYTICS

28.IE486 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTS

29. IE488 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

30.IC482 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

31. IT482 INFORMATION STORAGE MANAGEMENT

32. MA482 APPLIED LINEAR ALGEBRA

33. MA484 OPERATIONS RESEARCH (EC 363 OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES)

34. MA486 ADVANCED NUMERICAL COMPUTATIONS

35. MA488 CRYPTOGRAPHY

36.ME484 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

37.ME482 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT

38.ME471 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (EC 363 OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES)

39.MP482 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND DESIGN

40. MP469 INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY & ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

41. MP484 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

42. MT482 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY

43. MR482 MECHATRONICS

44. FS482 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEERING

45. SB482 DREDGERS AND HARBOUR CRAFTS

46. HS482 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

B. Tech. Syllabus

Table of Contents

Code Subject Page

MA 101 Calculus 04

PH 100 Engineering Physics 08

CY 100 Engineering Chemistry 11

BE 100 Engineering Mechanics 13

BE 110 Engineering Graphics 15 BE 101-01 Introduction to Civil Engineering 19

BE 101-02 Introduction to Mechanical Engineering Sciences 21

BE 101-03 Introduction to Electrical Engineering 24

BE 101-04 Introduction to Electronics Engineering 27

BE 101-05 Introduction to Computing and Problem Solving 29

BE 101-06 Introduction to Chemical Engineering 33

BE 103 Introduction to Sustainable Engineering 35

CE 100 Basics of Civil Engineering 38

ME 100 Basics of Mechanical Engineering 41

EE 100 Basics of Electrical Engineering 43

EC 100 Basics of Electronics Engineering 46

MA102 Differential Equations 49

BE 102 Design and Engineering 52

PH 110 Engineering Physics Lab 56

CY 110 Engineering Chemistry Lab 58

CE 110 Civil Engineering Workshop 59 ME 110 Mechanical Engineering Workshop 61

EE 110 Electrical Engineering Workshop 62

EC 110 Electronics Engineering Workshop 63

CS 110 Computer Science Workshop 65

CH 110 Chemical Engineering Workshop 67 CS 100 Computer Programming 68 CS 120 Computer Programming Lab 70

COURSE NO. COURSE NAME CREDITS YEAR OF INTRODUCTION

MA 101 CALCULUS 4 2016

Course Objectives

In this course the students are introduced to some basic tools in Mathematics which are useful in modelling and analysing physical phenomena involving continuous changes of variables or parameters. The differential and integral calculus of functions of one or more variables and of vector functions taught in this course have applications across all branches of engineering. This course will also provide basic training in plotting and visualising graphs of functions and intuitively understanding their properties using appropriate software packages.

Syllabus

Single Variable Calculus and Infinite series, Functions of more than one variable, Partial derivatives and its applications, Calculus of vector valued functions, Multiple Integrals.

Expected outcome

At the end of the course the student will be able to (i) check convergence of infinite series (ii) find maxima and minima of functions two variables (iii) find area and volume using multiple integrals (iv) apply calculus of vector valued functions in physical applications and (v) visualize graphs and surfaces using software or otherwise.

Text Books

(1)Anton, Bivens, Davis: Calculus, John Wiley and Sons, 10thed

(2)Thomas Jr., G. B., Weir, M. D. and Hass, J. R., Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson

References:

1. Sengar and Singh, Advanced Calculus, Cengage Learning, Ist Edition

2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley India edition, 10thed.

3. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.

4. N. P. Bali, Manish Goyal, Engineering Mathematics, Lakshmy Publications

5. D. W. Jordan, P Smith. Mathematical Techniques, Oxford University Press, 4th

Edition.

6. A C Srivastava, P K Srivasthava, Engineering Mathematics Vol 1. PHI Learning

Private Limited, New Delhi.

COURSE NO: MA101 L-T-P:3-1-0

COURSE NAME: CALCULUS CREDITS:4

MODULE CONTENT HRS END SEM. MARK %

Single Variable Calculus and Infinite series

(Book I –sec 9.3,9.5,9.6,9.8)

Basic ideas of infinite series and convergence - .Geometric series- Harmonic series-Convergence tests-comparison, ratio, root tests (without proof). Alternating series- Leibnitz Test- Absolute convergence, Maclaurins series-Taylor I series - radius of convergence. 9 15%

(For practice and submission as assignment only:

Sketching, plotting and interpretation of hyperbolic functions using suitable software. Demonstration of convergence of series bysoftware packages)

Partial derivatives and its applications(Book I –sec. 13.3 to 13.5 and 13.8)

Partial derivatives–Partial derivatives of functions of more than two variables - higher 5 order partial derivatives - differentiability, differentials and local linearity - II 15% The chain rule – Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables - extreme value 4 theorem (without proof)-relative extrema .

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Calculus of vector valued functions(Book I- 12.1,12.2,12.4&12.6,13.6 &13.7)

Introduction to vector valued functions- parametric curves in 3-space

Limits and continuity – derivatives - tangent lines – derivative of dot and cross product- 3 definite integrals of vector valued functions-

unit tangent-normal- velocity-acceleration and III speed–Normal and tangential components of 3 acceleration. 15% Directional derivatives and gradients-tangent 3 planes and normal vectors

(For practice and submission as assignment only: Graphing parametric curves and surfaces using software packages )

Multiple integrals

(Book I-sec. 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 14.5)

Double integrals- Evaluation of double integrals 4 – Double integrals in non-rectangular coordinates- reversing the order of integration-

IV Area calculated as a double integral- 2 15%

Triple integrals(Cartesian co ordinates only)- 2

volume calculated as a triple integral- 2

(applications of results only)

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

Topics in vector calculus

(Book I-15.1, 15.2, 15.3)

Vector and scalar fields- Gradient fields – 2

conservative fields and potential functions – 2

divergence and curl - the  operator - the 2 20% 2 V Laplacian  ,

Line integrals - work as a line integral- 2

independence of path-conservative vector field – 2

(For practice and submission as assignment only: graphical representation of vector fields using software packages)

Topics in vector calculus (continued)

(Book I sec., 15.4, 15.5, 15.7, 15.8)

Green’s Theorem (without proof- only for 2 simply connected region in plane),

surface integrals – 2 Divergence Theorem (without proof for VI evaluating surface integrals) , 3 20%

Stokes’ Theorem (without proof for evaluating 3 line integrals)

(All the above theorems are to be taught in regions in the rectangular co ordinate system only)

END SEMESTER EXAM

Open source software packages such as gnuplot, maxima, scilab ,geogebra or R may be used as appropriate for practice and assignment problems.

TUTORIALS: Tutorials can be ideally conducted by dividing each class in to three groups. Prepare necessary materials from each module that are to be taught using computer. Use it uniformly to every class.

electrode

Electrochemical series and its applications.(Numericals) 1

Nernst equation - Derivation, application & numericals 2

Potentiometric titration - Acid-base and redox titration 2

Lithium ion cell and Fuel cell. 1

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

III Instrumental Methods: Thermal analysis - Principle, instrumentation and 3

applications of TGA and DTA.

Chromatographic methods - Basic principles, column, TLC. Instrumentation 15%

and principles of GC and HPLC.

Conductivity - Measurement of conductivity 1

IV Chemistry of Engineering Materials: Copolymers - BS, ABS - Structure and

Properties.

Conducting Polymers - Polyaniline, Polypyrrole - Preparation, Structure and

Properties.

OLED – An introduction 1

15% Advanced Polymers – Kevlar, Polybutadiene rubber and silicone rubber:

Preparation, Structure and Properties.

Nanomaterials – Definition, Classification, chemical methods of preparation

- hydrolysis and reduction

Properties and Applications – Carbon Nano Tubes and fullerenes. 1

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

V Fuels and Lubricants: Fuels - Calorific Value, HCV and LCV -

Determination of calorific value of a solid and liquid fuel by Bomb 3 calorimeter - Dulongs formula and Numericals.

Liquid fuel - Petrol and Diesel - Octane number & Cetane number 1

20% Biodiesel - Natural gas. 2

Lubricant - Introduction, solid, semisolid and liquid lubricants. 1

Properties of lubricants - Viscosity Index, Flash point, Fire point, Cloud 2

point, Pour point and Aniline point.

VI Water Technology: Types of hardness, Units of hardness, Estimation of 3

Hardness – EDTA method. Numericals based on the above

Water softening methods - Ion exchange process - Principle. Polymer ion 2

exchange.

20% Reverse Osmosis - Disinfection method by chlorination and UV 1

2 Dissolved oxygen, BOD and COD.

1 Sewage water Treatment - Trickling Filter and UASB process.

END SEMESTER EXAM

Course No: Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of Introduction

BE110 *ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 1-1-3-3 2016

∗As this course is practical oriented, the evaluation is different from other lecture based courses.

Points to note:

(1) End semester examination will be for 50 marks and of 3 hour duration. (2) End semester exam will include all modules except Module IV.

(3) 100 marks are allotted for internal evaluation: first internal exam 40 marks, second internal exam 40 marks(CAD Lab Practice) and class exercises 20 marks.

(4) The first internal exam will be based on modules I and II and the second internal exam will be a practical exam in CAD based on Module IV alone. Second internal exam may be conducted at the end of the semester.

Course Objectives

To enable the student to effectively communicate basic designs through graphical representations as per standards.

Syllabus

Introduction to Engineering Graphics; Orthographic projections of lines and solids, Isometric projection, Freehand sketching, Introduction to CAD, Sections of solids, Development of surfaces, Perspective projection.

Expected outcome

Upon successful completion of this course, the student would have accomplished the following abilities and skills:

1. Fundamental Engineering Drawing Standards.

2. Dimensioning and preparation of neat drawings and drawing sheets.

3. Interpretation of engineering drawings 4. The features of CAD software

References Books:

  Agrawal, B. and Agrawal, C. M., Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers 

  Anilkumar, K. N., Engineering Graphics, Adhyuth Narayan Publishers 

  Benjamin, J., Engineering Graphics, Pentex Publishers   Bhatt, N., D., Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House Pvt Ltd.  

  Duff, J. M. and Ross, W. A., Engineering Design and Visualization, Cengage Learning, 2009   John, K. C., Engineering Graphics, Prentice Hall India Publishers   Kirstie Plantenberg, Engineering Graphics Essentials with AutoCAD 2016 Instruction, 4th Ed., SDC Publications   Kulkarni, D. M., Rastogi, A. P. and Sarkar, A. K., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD, PHI  2009 

  Luzadder, W. J. and Duff, J. M., Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, PHI 1993   Parthasarathy, N. S., and Murali, V., Engineering Drawing, Oxford University Press    Varghese, P. I., Engineering Graphics, V I P Publishers   Venugopal, K., Engineering Drawing & Graphics, New Age International Publishers  Course Plan

Module Contents Hours Sem. Exam Marks

6 exercises

Introduction to Engineering Graphics: Need for engineering drawing. I 14 20% Drawing instruments; BIS code of practice for general

engineering drawing.

Orthographic projections of points and lines:-Projections of points in different quadrants; Projections of straight lines inclined to one of the reference planes, straight lines inclined to both the planes; True length and inclination of lines with reference planes; Traces of lines.

12 exercises

Orthographic projections of solids:-Projections of simple solids* in simple positions, projections of solids with axis II 11 20% inclined to one of the reference planes and axis inclined to both the reference planes.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

12 exercises

Isometric Projections:-Isometric projections and views of plane figures simple* and truncated simple* solids in simple

position including sphere and hemisphere and their III combinations. 09 20% Freehand sketching: Freehand sketching of real objects, conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views and vice versa.

6 exercises

Introduction to Computer Aided Drafting - familiarizing various coordinate systems and commands used in any 15 standard drafting software - drawing of lines, circle, polygon, arc, ellipse, etc. Creating 2D drawings. (Additional Transformations: move, copy, rotate, scale, mirror, offset hours are IV and array, trim, extend, fillet, chamfer. Dimensioning and allotted in Internal text editing. Exercises on basic drafting principles, to create U slot for technical drawings. Creation of orthographic views of CAD simple solids from pictorial views. Creation of isometric practice) views of simple solids from orthographic views. Solid modelling and sectioning of solids, extraction of 2D drawings from solid models. (For internal examination only, not for University Examination).

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM (to be conducted only after finishing CAD Practice.)

9 exercises

Sections and developments of solids: - Sections of simple* solids in simple vertical positions with section plane V 12 20% inclined to one of the reference planes - True shapes of sections. Developments of surfaces of these solids.

6 exercises

VI Intersection of surfaces: - Intersection of prism in prism and cylinder in cylinder - axis bisecting at right angles only. 09 20% Perspective projections: - perspective projections of simple* solids.

*Triangular, square, pentagonal and hexagonal prisms, pyramids, cones and cylinders.

END SEMESTER EXAM

Note: 1. First angle projection is to be followed. 2. CAD Practice is mandatory and shall be conducted in the time slot allotted for U slot in addition to 15 hours allotted for Module IV

Question Paper Pattern: Question Paper shall contain eight questions of 10 marks each out of which five questions are to be answered as explained below. The duration of examination is 3 hours.

Part A: Three questions from Modules I & II out of which two are to be answered.

Part B: Five questions from Modules III, V & VI out of which three are to be answered.

The questions are to be answered in A4 size booklet containing grid/plain sheets supplied by the university. Drawing sheets are not needed.

The evaluation of answers shall be based on the correctness of solution, judging the knowledge of student in concepts and principles of Engineering Graphics. Accuracy and neatness shall not be criteria for evaluation.

Course No: Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of Introduction

BE101-02 INTRODUCTION TO MECHANICAL 2-1-0-3 2016 ENGINEERING SCIENCES

Course Objectives 1. To introduce different disciplines of Mechanical Engineering 2. To kindle interest in Mechanical Engineering 3. To impart basic mechanical engineering principles Syllabus

Thermodynamics & Power sources, Thermal Engineering, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Automobile & Aeronautical Engineering, Engineering Materials and manufacturing.

Expected Outcome

At the end of the course, the students will have exposed to the different areas of Mechanical Engineering; gained idea about nature, scope and applications of Mechanical Engineering principles.

References Books:   Dossat, R. J., Principles of Refrigeration, PHI    Heywood, J., Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals, McGraw Hill Publishers    Holman, J. P., Thermodynamics, McGraw Hill Co.   Jain, K. K. and Asthana, R. B., Automobile Engineering, TTTI Bhopal  Jonathan Wickert, Introduction to Mechanical Engineering, Cengage Learning   Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, S. R., Manufacturing Processes for Engineering  Materials, Pearson education    Maines, R., Landmarks in Mechanical Engineering, ASME    Peng, W. W., Principles of Turbomachinery, John Wiley & Sons   Pita, E. G., Air Conditioning Principles & Systems, PHI.    Spalding, D. B. and Cole, E. H., Engineering Thermodynamics, ELBS & Edward  Arnold (Pub) Ltd.    Stone, R. and Ball, T. K., Automotive Engineering Fundamentals, SAE International   Sutton, G. P. and Ross, D. M., Rocket Propulsion Elements, John Wiley & Sons    Von Karman, T., Aerodynamics: Selected Topics in the Light of Their  Historical Development, Courier Corporation   Online course on Refrigeration & Air conditioning, IIT Kharagpur www.nptel.ac.in 

Course No. Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of Introduction

BE101-03 INTRODUCTION TO 2-1-0-3 2016 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Course Objective The objective of this course is to set a firm and solid foundation in Electrical Engineering with strong analytical skills and conceptual understanding of basic laws and analysis methods in electrical and magnetic circuits.

Syllabus

Fundamental Concepts of Circuit Elements and Circuit variables, Real and Ideal independent voltage and current sources, V-I relations; Basic Circuit Laws, Analysis of resistive circuits, Magnetic Circuits, Electromagnetic Induction; Alternating current fundamentals, Phasor Concepts, Complex representation, Phasor analysis of RL, RC, RLC circuit, admittances; Complex Power, Resonance in series and parallel circuits; Three-phase systems, analysis of balanced and unbalanced star and delta connected loads.

Expected outcome

The course will enable students to learn advanced topics in Electrical Engineering

References Books:

  Bhattacharya, S. K., Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Pearson 

  Bird, J., Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology, Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group   Edminister, J., Electric Circuits, Schaum's Outline Series, Tata McGraw Hill    Hayt, W. H., Kemmerly, J. E., and Durbin, S. M., Engineering Circuit Analysis,  Tata McGraw Hill 

  Hughes, Electrical and Electronic Technology, Pearson Education   Parker and Smith, Problems in Electrical Engineering, CBS Publishers and Distributors    Sudhakar and Syam Mohan, Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis, Tata  McGraw Hill   Suresh Kumar, K. S, Electric Circuits and Networks, Pearson Education 

Course Plan

Module Contents Hours Sem. Exam. Marks

Fundamental Concepts of Circuit Elements and Circuit variables: Electromotive force, potential and voltage. Resistors, Capacitors 1

Inductors- terminal V-I relations

Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday’s laws, I Lenz’s law, statically and dynamically induced 15% 2 EMF, self and mutual inductance, coupling coefficient-energy stored in inductance

Real and Ideal independent voltage and current 1 sources, V-I relations. Passive sign convention

Numerical Problems (Module I) 2

Basic Circuit Laws: Kirchhoff's current and voltage laws, analysis of resistive circuits-mesh 2 analysis –super mesh analysis II 15% Node analysis-super node analysis, star delta 2 transformation

Numerical problems (Module II) 2

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Magnetic Circuits: Magneto motive force, flux, reluctance, permeability -comparison of electric 2 and magnetic circuits, analysis of series magnetic circuits III 15% Parallel magnetic circuits, magnetic circuits 2 with air-gaps.

Numerical problems (Module III) 2

Alternating current fundamentals:-Generation of Alternating voltages-waveforms, Frequency, IV Period, RMS and average values, peak factor 3 and form factor of periodic waveforms (pure 15% sinusoidal) and composite waveforms

Phasor Concepts, Complex representation (exponential, polar and rectangular forms) of sinusoidal voltages and currents phasor 2 diagrams

Complex impedance - series and parallel impedances and admittances, Phasor analysis 2 of RL, RC, RLC circuits

Numerical problems. (Module IV) 2

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Complex Power : Concept of Power factor: 1 active , reactive and apparent power

Resonance in series and parallel circuits 2

V Energy, bandwidth and quality factor, variation 20% of impedance and admittance in series and 2 parallel resonant circuits

Numerical problems (Module V) 2

Three phase systems: Star and delta connections, three-phase three wire and three- 2 phase four-wire systems

Analysis of balanced and unbalanced star and 2 VI delta connected loads 20% Power in three-phase circuits. Active and Reactive power measurement by one, two, and 2 three wattmeter methods

Numerical problems (Module VI) 2

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

Electro mechanical components: relays and contactors. 1

II Diodes: Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, PN junction diode, barrier

potential, V-I characteristics, Effect of temperature. Equivalent circuit of a 3

diode. Piece wise linear model.

15%

Specification parameters of diodes and numbering. 1

Zener diode, Varactor diodes, characteristics, working principle of LED,

photo diode, solar cell.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Bipolar Junction Transistors: Structure, typical doping, Principle of III operation, concept of different configurations. Detailed study of input and

output characteristics of common base and common emitter configuration,

current gain, comparison of three configurations.

15%

Concept of load line and operating point. Need for biasing and

stabilization, voltage divider biasing, Transistor as amplifier, switch, RC 3

coupled amplifier and frequency response

Specification parameters of transistors and type numbering 1

IV Junction Field Effect Transistors: Structure, principle of operation,

characteristics, comparison with BJT.

MOSFET: Structure, principle of operation of Enhancement type 15% 2

MOSFET, Current voltage characteristics, Depletion-type MOSFET.

Principle of operation of Photo transistor, UJT, SCR. 3

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

V Diode circuits and power supplies: Series and parallel diode circuits,

Clippers, Clampers, Voltage multipliers

Derivation of V , Half-wave and full wave (including bridge) rectifiers, rms V , ripple factor, dc peak inverse voltage, rectification efficiency in each 20%

case, capacitor filter, working and design of a simple zener voltage 4 regulator.

Block diagram description of a DC Power supply, Principle of SMPS

VI Electronic Measurements and measuring Instruments. 2

Generalized performance parameters of instruments: error, accuracy,

sensitivity, precision and resolution.

Principle and block diagram of analog and digital multimeter, Block 4 20% diagram of CRO, Measurements using CRO, Lissajous patterns, Principle

and block diagram of DSO, function generator.

Testing of Electronic components. 1 END SEMESTER EXAM

adsorption, extraction, crystallization, drying, leaching, size separation and

size reduction. Overview of unit processes like saponification,

polymerization, biodiesel formation and hydrogenation.

IV Modes of heat transfer-principles of conduction, convection and radiation,

heat exchangers. Fluid flow- laminar and turbulent flow. Introduction to

transportation of fluids.

8 15%

Classification of chemical reactions, order of reaction, rate equation,

Arrhenius equation, conversion and yield, batch reactor, mixed reactor and

plug flow reactor.

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

V Block diagram, process flow diagram for DCDA process for Sulphuric

acid manufacture, basic concepts of P&I diagram. Introduction to process

instrumentation and control: common methodologies of measurements,

7 20%

measuring instruments: thermocouple, venturimeter, U-tube manometer,

elements of feedback control loop, introduction to control of a distillation

column.

VI Introduction to safety in chemical process industries – basic concepts, Case

study: Bhopal gas tragedy. Introduction to Environmental Engineering -

basic concepts, Typical wastewater, air and solid waste management

system.Case study: Effect of Aerial Spraying of Endosulfan on Residents 6 20%

of Kasargod, Kerala. Challenges of Chemical Engineer –need for

sustainable alternatives for processes; products with environment friendly

life-cycle. Introduction to novel materials and their development.

END SEMESTER EXAM

Cement – OPC, properties, grades; other types of cement and its uses (in

brief).

Cement mortar – constituents, preparation. 1

Concrete – PCC and RCC – grades. 1

Steel - Use of steel in building construction, types and market forms. 1

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

V Building construction – Foundations; Bearing capacity of soil (definition

only); Functions of foundations, Types - shallow and deep (sketches only).

Brick masonry – header and stretcher bond, English bonds – Elevation and

plan (one brick thick walls only).

Roofs – functions, types, roofing materials (brief discussion only). 1 20%

Floors – functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only). 1

Decorative finishes – Plastering – Purpose, procedure. 1

Paints and Painting – Purpose, types, preparation of surfaces for painting

(brief discussion only).

VI Basic infrastructure and services - Elevators, escalators, ramps, air

conditioning, sound proofing (Civil engineering aspects only)

20%

Towers, Chimneys, Water tanks (brief discussion only). 1

Concept of intelligent buildings. 2

END SEMESTER EXAM

Course L-T-P Year of Introduction Course Name No. Credits BASICS OF ELECTRICAL EE100 2-1-0-3 2016 ENGINEERING Course Objectives

To impart a basic knowledge in Electrical Engineering with an understanding of fundamental concepts. Syllabus

Elementary concepts of electric circuits, Kirchhoff's laws, constant voltage and current sources, Matrix representation; Magnetic circuits, energy stored in magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic induction, Alternating current fundamentals; AC circuits, phasor representation of alternating quantities- rectangular, polar; Three phase systems, star and delta connection; Generation of power, power transmission and distribution; Transformers, Electric Machines-DC Machines, AC Motors. Expected outcome The course will enable the students to gain preliminary knowledge in basic concepts of Electrical Engineering. References Books:   Bhattacharya, S. K., Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Pearson    Bird, J., Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology, Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group   Del Toro,V.,Electrical Engineering Fundamentals, Prentice Hall of India.    Hayt, W. H., Kemmerly, J. E., and Durbin, S. M., Engineering Circuit Analysis,  Tata McGraw Hill    Hughes, Electrical and Electronic Technology, Pearson Education   Mehta, V.K. and Mehta,R., Basic Electrical Engineering, S. Chand Publishing  Parker and Smith, Problems in Electrical Engineering, CBS Publishers and Distributors   Sudhakar and Syam Mohan, Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis, Tata  McGraw Hill   Suresh Kumar, K. S, Electric Circuits and Networks, Pearson Education 

Course Plan

Sem. Exam. Module Contents Hours Marks Elementary concepts of electric circuits: Kirchhoff's laws, constant voltage and current sources-Problems 2

Formation of network equations by mesh current and node 15% I voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network 3 equations by matrix methods-problems star-delta conversion(resistive networks only-derivation is not needed)-problems 1

Magnetic Circuits: MMF, field strength, flux density,

reluctance(definition only)-comparison between electric and 2 magnetic circuits Energy stored in magnetic circuits, magnetic circuits with air gap-Numerical problems on series magnetic circuits 2 II 15% Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, lenz's laws- statically induced and dynamically induced emfs-self inductance and 2 mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling (derivation not needed) FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages-waveforms, frequency, period, average , RMS values and form factor of periodic waveform(pure sinusoidal)- 2 Numerical Problems

AC Circuits: Phasor representation of alternating quantities- 15% rectangular and polar representation 1

Analysis of simple AC circuits: concept of impedance, power and power factor in ac circuits-active, reactive and apparent 2 III power

solution of RL,RC and RLC series circuits-Numerical problems 2 Three phase systems: Generation of three phase voltages- advantages of three phase systems, star and delta connection (balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line 3 and phase currents

three phase power measurement by two wattmeter method (derivation is not required) - Numerical problems 1

Generation of power: Block schematic representation of generating stations- hydroelectric power plants 1

Block schematic representation of Thermal and nuclear power plants 1

Renewable energy sources: solar, wind, tidal and geothermal

IV (Block diagram and working only- No Problems) 1 15% Power transmission: Typical electrical power transmission scheme-need for high voltage transmission-(Derivation is not 1 needed, No Problems)

Power Distribution: substation equipments, primary and 1 secondary transmission and distribution systems- feeder, service

mains

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Electric Machines: DC Generator and Motor-Construction- working principle- Back EMF 2 Types of motor-shunt, series, compound (short and long)- principle of operation of dc motor, applications-numerical 3 problems ( voltage -current relations only) V 20% Transformer: Construction of single phase and three phase Transformers (core type only)-EMF equation and related 2 numerical problems

Losses and efficiency of transformer for full load –numerical problems (no equivalent circuit) 2

AC Motors: Three phase induction motor-squirrel cage and slip ring induction motor 1

Working principle-synchronous speed, slip and related numerical problems. (no equivalent circuit) 1 VI 20% AC Motors: Construction, principles of operation of single phase induction motor (no equivalent circuit) 1

Starting methods in single phase induction motors -split phase and capacitor start 2

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

Course Course Name L-T-P Year of Introduction No: Credits

EC100 BASICS OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING 2-1-0-3 2016 Course Objectives 1) To get basic idea about types, specification and common values of passive and active components.

2) To familiarize the working of diodes, transistors, MOSFETS and integrated circuits. 3) To understand the working of rectifiers, amplifiers and oscillators. 4) To get a basic idea about measuring instruments 5) To get a fundamental idea of basic communication systems and entertainment electronics Syllabus

Evolution and Impact of Electronics in industries and in society, Familiarization of Resistors, Capacitors, Inductors, Transformers and Electro mechanical components, PN Junction diode: Structure, Principle of operation, Zener diode, Photo diode, LED, Solar cell, Bipolar Junction Transistors: Structure, Principle of operation, characteristics, Rectifiers and power supplies: Half wave and full wave rectifier, capacitor filter, zener voltage regulator, Amplifiers and Oscillators: common emitter amplifier, feedback, oscillators, RC phase shift oscillator, Analogue Integrated circuits: operational amplifier, inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Electronic Instrumentation: digital multimeter, digital storage oscilloscope, function generator, Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, Super heterodyne receiver, Satellite communication: geo-stationary satellite system, Mobile communication: cellular communications, Optical communication: system, principle of light transmission through fiber, Entertainment Electronics: Cable TV, CCTV system.

Expected Outcome

Student can identify the active and passive electronic components. Student can setup simple circuits using diodes and transistors. Student will get fundamental idea about basic communication systems and entertainment electronics.

Text Books:

 Bell, D. A., Electronic Devices and Circuits, Oxford University Press  Tomasy, W., Advanced Electronic Communication system, PHI Publishers  References Books:

 Boylested, R. L. and Nashelsky, L., Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, Pearson Education  Frenzel, L. E., Principles of Electronic Communication Systems, Mc Graw Hill  Kennedy, G. and Davis, B., Electronic Communication Systems, Mc Graw Hill 46

 Rajendra Prasad, Fundamentals of Electronic Engineering, Cengage Learning Course Plan

Module Contents Hours Sem. Marks Evolution of Electronics, Impact of Electronics in 1 industry and in society.

Resistors, Capacitors: types, specifications. 3 Standard values, marking, colour coding. I 10% Inductors and Transformers: types, specifications, 2 Principle of working.

Electro mechanical components: relays and 1 contactors. PN Junction diode: Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, Principle of operation, V-I 4 characteristics, principle of working of Zener diode, Photo diode, LED and Solar cell. II 20% Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN structures, Principle of operation, input and output 3 characteristics of common emitter configuration (npn only).

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram description of a dc power supply ,Half wave and 4 full wave (including bridge) rectifier, capacitor filter, working of simple zener voltage regulator. 15% III Amplifiers and Oscillators: Circuit diagram and working of common emitter amplifier, Block diagram of Public Address system, concepts of 4 feedback, working principles of oscillators, circuit diagram & working of RC phase shift oscillator. Analogue Integrated circuits: Functional block diagram of operational amplifier, ideal 3 operational amplifier, inverting and non-inverting IV Amplifier. 15%

Digital ICs: Logic Gates. 1

Electronic Instrumentation: Principle and block 2 diagram of digital multimeter, digital storage

oscilloscope, and function generator.

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for various communication 3 systems, block diagram of super heterodyne V receiver. 20%

Satellite communication: concept of geo- 2 stationary Satellite system.

Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, concepts of cells, 2 frequency reuse.

Optical communication: block diagram of the optical communication system, principle of light VI 2 20% transmission through fiber, advantages of optical communication systems.

Entertainment Electronics Technology: Basic principles and block diagram of cable TV, CCTV, 2 DTH system.

END SEMESTER EXAM

Note: Analysis is not required in this course.

Course No. Course Name L-T-P- Year of Credits Introduction MA102 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 3-1-0-4 2016 Course Objectives

This course introduces basic ideas of differential equations, both ordinary and partial, which are widely used in the modelling and analysis of a wide range of physical phenomena and has got applications across all branches of engineering. The course also introduces Fourier series which is used by engineers to represent and analyse periodic functions in terms of their frequency components. Syllabus

Homogeneous linear ordinary differential equation, non-homogeneous linear ordinary differential equations, Fourier series, partial differential equation, one dimensional wave equation, one dimensional heat equation. Expected Outcome

At the end of the course students will have acquired basic knowledge of differential equations and methods of solving them and their use in analysing typical mechanical or electrical systems. The included set of assignments will familiarise the students with the use of software packages for analysing systems modelled by differential equations. TEXT BOOKS

 Erwin Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th ed. Wiley  A C Srivastava, P K Srivasthava, Engineering Mathematics Vol 2. PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:

 Simmons: Differential Equation with Applications and its historical Notes,2e McGrawHill Education India 2002  Datta, Mathematical Methods for Science and Engineering. CengageLearing,1st. ed  B. S. Grewal. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.  N. P. Bali, Manish Goyal. Engineering Mathematics, Lakshmy Publications  D. W. Jordan, P Smith. Mathematical Techniques, Oxford University Press, 4th Edition.  C. Henry Edwards, David. E. Penney. Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems. Computing and Modelling, 3rd ed. Pearson

COURSE PLAN COURSE NO: MA102 L-T-P:3-1-0 COURSE NAME: CREDITS:4 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS MODULE CONTENT HRS END SEM. EXAM MARKS (OUT OF 100)

HOMOGENEOUS DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

(Text Book 1 : Sections 1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 2.6, 3.2) Existence and uniqueness of solutions for initial

value problems, Homogenous linear ODEs of second 3

order. Homogenous linear ODEs with constant coefficients, Existence and Uniqueness of solutions I Wronskian, 4 17 Homogenous linear ODEs with constant Coefficients (Higher Order) (For practice and submission as assignment only: Modelling of free oscillations of a mass – spring system) NON-HOMOGENEOUS LINEAR ORDINARY

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS ( Text Book 2: Sections 1.2.7 to 1.2.14)

The particular Integral (P.I.), Working rule for P.I. m ax when g(x) is X , To find P.I. when g(x) = e .V1(x),

Working rule for P.I. when g(x) = x.V(x), 17 II Homogeneous Linear Equations, PI of Homogenous 7 equations Legendƌe’s Lineaƌ eƋuations 2 Method of variation of parameters for finding PIs 3 (For practice and submission as assignments only: Modelling forced oscillations, resonance, electric circuits ) FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

FOURIER SERIES (Text Book 2 - Sections 4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4) Periodic functions ,Orthogonally of Sine and Cosine 3 functions (Statement only), Fourier series and Euler’s formulas 17 III Fourier cosine series and Fourier sine series 3 (Fourier series of even and Odd functions ) Half range expansions (All results without proof) 3

(For practice and submission as assignment only: Plots of partial sums of Fourier series and demonstrations of convergence using plotting software) PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS ( Text Book 2 : Sections : 5.1, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.5,

5.2.6- 5.2.10)

Introduction to partial differential equations , 3

formation of PDE, Solutions of first order PDE(Linear only)

IV 3 Lagrange’s Method 17

Linear PDE with constant coefficients , Solutions of

Linear Homogenous PDE with constant coefficients ,

Shorter method for finding PI when g(x,y)=f(ax+by), Method of finding PI when g(x,y) = xmyn, method of 6 find PI when g(x,y)= e ax+by V(x,y) SECOND INTERNAL EXAM ONE DIMENSIONAL WAVE EQUATION ( Text Book 2: Sections :6.1-- 6.4)

Method of separation of variables 2

The wave Equation 1 16 Vibrations of a stretched string V 1 Solutions of one dimensional wave equation using 4 method of separation of variables and problems

ONE DIMENSIONAL HEAT EQUATION ( Text Book 2: sections 6.7, 6.8 ,6.9, 6.9.1 ,6.9.2)

The equation of Heat conduction 1

VI One dimensional Heat transfer equation. 1 Solutions of One Dimensional Heat transfer equation, 16 A long insulated rod with ends at zero temperatures, A 6 long insulated rod with ends at non zero temperatures

END SEMESTER EXAM TUTORIALS: Tutorials can be ideally conducted by dividing each class into three groups. Prepare necessary materials from each module that can be practiced using computer software. Use them uniformly in every class.

Assignment/projects – 50 marks (iv) End semester exam – open book exam – 50 marks (2 hours duration – conducted by the University)

First Test: Marks: 25 Closed Book;

Questions may cover:-

Topics covered in the lectures.

How to arrive at the design details for a specific need gap given.

Sketching the design of a product that is to meet the given user requirements.

Second Test: Marks: 25 Open Book:

Students are permitted to bring in class notes, own notes, text books and other books (Maximum 3/4 books) for the test. Access to internet and mobile phones is NOT permitted.

Assignments: Marks: 20 Two assignments are to be given (10 marks each). These assignments are to cover specific design/s, sketching of the design, and a short but well written write-up on the design.

Projects: Marks: 30 Two mini projects are to be assigned. One is to be a group project and the other an individual one. A group of 3 or 4 students can take up the group project. Each project is to be evaluated for 15 marks.

The Group Project is to be done in the practical hours given for the course. Projects including the group projects are to be evaluated based on individual presentations and answers to the questions raised. These presentations could be done during the practical hours. Question Paper Pattern for End Semester Examination (Open Book)

Part A – Eight questions of each 5 marks, out of which six questions are to be answered.

Part B – Three questions of each 10 marks, out of which two questions are to be answered.

Course No: Course Name Year of L-T-P- Credits Introduction

CH110 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

WORKSHOP 0-0-2-1 2016

Course Objectives

To impart in students the basic knowledge in chemical engineering through simple experiments and demonstrations.

List of Exercises / Experiments (Minimum of 8 mandatory)

1. Preparation of soap

2. Determination of flash and fire point

3. Preparation of Biodiesel

4. Specific gravity measurement

5. Fabrication of FRP laminates/ Study of filtration equipments

6. Study of distillation column

7. Study of absorption column

8. Study of heat exchanger

9. Study of size reduction equipment

10. Preparation of Pigment Expected outcome

Students will have a thorough understanding of the basic concepts that they learn in the theory paper “Introduction to Chemical Engineering”.

Course No. Course Name L-T-P- Year of Introduction Credits Computer Programming CS100 2-1-0 2016

Course Objectives

To understand the fundamental concept of C programming and use it in problem solving.

SyllabusTo introduce basic data structures and their applications. Introduction to C language; Operators and expressions; Sorting and searching; Pointers; Memory allocation; Stacks and Queues.

Course Outcomes 1. Identify appropriate C language constructs to solve problems. 2. Analyze problems, identify subtasks and implement them as functions/procedures. 3. Implement algorithms using efficient C-programming techniques. 4. Explain the concept of file system for handling data storage and apply it for solving problems 5. Apply sorting & searching techniques to solve application programs.

References

1. Rajaraman V., Computer Basics and Programming in C, PHI. 2. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, Computer fundamentals and Programming in C., Pearson. 3. Gottfried B.S., Programming with C, Schaum Series, Tata McGraw Hill. 4. Horowitz and Sahni, Fundamentals of data structures - Computer Science Press. 5. Gary J. Bronson, ANSI C Programming, CENGAGE Learning India. 6. Stewart Venit and Elizabeth Drake, Prelude to Programming – Concepts & Design, Pearson. 7. Dromy R.G., How to Solve it by Computer, Pearson. 8. Kernighan and Ritche D.M., The C. Programming Language, PHI. .

COURSE PLAN

Contact Sem.ExamM Module Contents Hours arks;%

Introduction to C Language: Preprocessor directives, header files, data types and qualifiers. Operators and expressions. Data input and output, control statements. I 7 15%

Arrays and strings- example programs. Two dimensional II arrays - matrix operations. 8 Structure, union and enumerated data type. 15%

Pointers: Array of pointers, structures and pointers. III Example programs using pointers and structures.

7 15% FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Functions – function definition and function prototype. Function call by value and call by reference. Pointer to a IV function –. Recursive functions. 7 15%

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

Sorting and Searching : Bubble sort, Selection sort, Linear Search and Binary search. Scope rules Storage classes. Bit-wise operations. V 6 20%

Data files – formatted, unformatted and text files. VI Command line arguments – examples. 7 20%

END SEMESTER EXAM

Course Course Name L-T-P- Year of No. Credits Introduction

110 Computer Programming Lab 2016 Course Objective:  To implement algorithms studied in the course ComputerProgramming  To learn the implementation of control structures, Iterations and recursive functions. To implement operations on different types of files. List of Exercises / Experiments (For Computer Science and Engineering Branch) The exercises may include the Programs using the following concepts. 1.Decision making, branching and looping - if, if else statements - switch, goto statements - while, do, for statements 2.Arrays and strings - one-dimensional, two-dimensional, multidimensional arrays - reading/writing strings - operations on strings - string handling 3.Functions - user defined functions - function calls, arguments & return values - nesting of functions - recursive functions - passing arrays and strings to functions 4. Structures and unions - copying and comparing structure variables - arrays of structures - arrays within structures - structures with in structures - structures and functions - unions 5. Pointers - pointers and arrays - pointers and character strings - array of pointers - pointers and functions - pointers and structures 6.Files, memory allocation, bit-level programming -files -defining, opening/closing, input -output operations -command line arguments -memory allocation functions Course Outcome Students will be able to analyse a problem, find appropriate programming language construct should be used and implement C program for the problem. 70

COURSE CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR OF INTRODUCTION EC201 NETWORK THEORY 3-1-0-4 2016

Prerequisite: Nil Course objectives:  To make the students capable of analyzing any linear time invariant electrical network.  To study time domain, phasor and Laplace transform methods of linear circuit analysis.  To study the transient response of networks subject to test signals.  To develop understanding of the concept of resonance, coupled circuits and two port networks. Syllabus: Circuit variables and Circuit elements, Kirchhoff’s laws, Network topology, Mesh and node analysis of network, Laplace transform, Inverse Laplace transform, Solution of differential equations by using Laplace transforms, Transient analysis of RL, RC, and RLC networks, Network functions for the single port and two ports, Parameters of two-port network, Resonance, Coupled circuits Expected outcome: At the end of the course students will be able to analyze the linear time invariant electrical circuits. Text Books 1. Ravish R., Network Analysis and Synthesis, 2/e, McGraw-Hill, 2015. 2. Valkenburg V., Network Analysis, 3/e, PHI, 2011. References: 1. Sudhakar A,S. P. Shyammohan, Circuits and Networks- Analysis and Synthesis, 5/e, McGraw- Hill, 2015. 2. Choudhary R., Networks and Systems, 2/e, New Age International, 2013. 3. Franklin F. Kuo, Network Analysis and Synthesis, 2/e, Wiley India, 2012. 4. Pandey S. K., Fundamentals of Network Analysis and Synthesis, 1/e, S. Chand, 2012. 5. Edminister, Electric Circuits – Schaum’s Outline Series, McGraw-Hill,2009. Course Plan Module Course content (48 hrs) Hours Sem. Exam Marks Introduction to circuit variables and circuit elements, Review of 3 I Kirchhoff’s Laws, Independent and dependent Sources, Source 15 transformations Network topology, Network graphs, Trees, Incidence matrix, 2 Tie-set matrix and Cut-set matrix Solution methods applied to dc and phasor circuits: Mesh and node 3 analysis of network containing independent and dependent sources II Network theorems applied to dc and phasor circuits: Thevenin’s 6 15 theorem, Norton’s theorem, Superposition theorem, Reciprocity theorem, Millman’s theorem, Maximum power transfer theorem

Laplace transform, properties 4 Laplace Transforms and inverse Laplace transform of common functions, Important theorems: Time shifting theorem, Frequency shifting theorem, Time differentiation theorem, Time integration theorem, s domain differentiation theorem, s domain integration theorem, Initial value theorem, Final value theorem FIRST INTERNAL EXAM III Partial Fraction expansions for inverse Laplace transforms, 3 Solution of differential equations using Laplace transforms 15 Transformation of basic signals and circuits into s-domain 2 Transient analysis of RL, RC, and RLC networks with impulse, step, 3 pulse, exponential and sinusoidal inputs Analysis of networks with transformed impedance and dependent 3 sources. IV Network functions for the single port and two ports, properties of 3 15 driving point and transfer functions, Poles and Zeros of network functions, Significance of Poles and Zeros Time domain response from pole zero plot, Impulse Response 1 Network functions in the sinusoidal steady state, Magnitude and 3 Phase response SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Parameters of two port network: impedance, admittance, 5 20 transmission and hybrid parameters, Interrelationship among parameter sets Series and parallel connections of two port networks 2 Reciprocal and Symmetrical two port network 2 Characteristic impedance, Image impedance and propagation 2 constant (derivation not required) VI Resonance: Series resonance, bandwidth, Q factor and Selectivity, 3 20 Parallel resonance Coupled circuits: single tuned and double tuned circuits, dot 4 convention, coefficient of coupling, Analysis of coupled circuits END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper consists of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions. Each question can have a maximum of four subparts. Among the three questions one will be a compulsory question covering both the modules and the remaining two questions will be as one question from each module, of which one is to be answered. Mark pattern is according to the syllabus with maximum 30% for theory and 70% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR OF CODE INTRODUCTION EC203 SOLID STATE DEVICES 3-1-0-4 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course objectives:  To provide an insight into the basic semiconductor concepts  To provide a sound understanding of current semiconductor devices and technology to appreciate its applications to electronics circuits and systems Syllabus: Elemental and compound semiconductors, Fermi-Dirac distribution, Equilibrium and steady state conditions: Equilibrium concentration of electrons and holes, Temperature dependence of carrier concentration, Carrier transport in semiconductors, High field effects, Hall effect, Excess carriers in semiconductors , PN junctions ,contact potential, electrical field, potential and charge density at the junction, energy band diagram, minority carrier distribution, ideal diode equation, electron and hole component of current in forward biased pn junction, piecewise linear model of a diode , effect of temperature on VI characteristics, Diode capacitances, electrical breakdown in pn junctions, Tunnel Diode, Metal semiconductor contacts, bipolar junction transistor, metal insulator semiconductor devices, MOSFET, FinFET Expected outcome: The students should have a good knowledge in semiconductor theory and electronic devices. Text Books: 1. Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Kumar Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, Pearson, 6/e, 2010 2. Achuthan, K N Bhat, Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices, 1e, McGraw Hill,2015 References: 1. Tyagi M.S., Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and Devices, Wiley India, 5/e, 2008 2. Sze S.M., Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley, 3/e, 2005 3. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, McGraw Hill, 4/e, 2012 4. Pierret, Semiconductor Devices Fundamentals, Pearson, 2006 5. Rita John, Solid State Devices, McGraw-Hill, 2014 6. Bhattacharya .Sharma, Solid State Electronic Devices, Oxford University Press, 2012 7. Dasgupta and Dasgupta , Semiconductor Devices : Modelling and Technology (PHI) Course Plan Module Course content (48hrs) Hours Sem. Exam Marks I Elemental and compound semiconductors, Fermi-Dirac 4 15 distribution, Equilibrium and steady state conditions, Equilibrium concentration of electrons and holes, Temperature dependence of carrier concentration Carrier transport in semiconductors, drift, conductivity and 5 mobility, variation of mobility with temperature and doping, High Field Effects, Hall effect II Excess carriers in semiconductors: Generation and recombination 9 15 mechanisms of excess carriers, quasi Fermi levels, diffusion, Einstein relations, Continuity equations, Diffusion length, Gradient of quasi Fermi level FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

III PN junctions : Contact potential, Electrical Field, Potential and 9 15 Charge density at the junction, Energy band diagram, Minority carrier distribution, Ideal diode equation, Electron and hole component of current in forward biased p-n junction, piecewise linear model of a diode effect of temperature on V-I characteristics IV Diode capacitances, switching transients, Electrical Breakdown in 9 15 PN junctions, Zener and avalanche break down (abrupt PN junctions only), Tunnel Diode basics only, Metal Semiconductor contacts, Ohmic and Rectifying Contacts, current voltage characteristics SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Bipolar junction transistor , current components, Minority carrier 9 20 distributions, basic parameters, Evaluation of terminal currents (based on physical dimensions),Transistor action, Base width modulation VI Metal Insulator semiconductor devices: The ideal MOS capacitor, 9 20 band diagrams at equilibrium, accumulation, depletion and inversion, surface potential, CV characteristics, effects of real surfaces, work function difference, interface charge, threshold voltage MOSFET: Output characteristics, transfer characteristics, sub threshold characteristics, MOSFET scaling (basic concepts) FinFET-structure and operation 1 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper consists of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions. Each question can have a maximum of four subparts. Among the three questions one will be a compulsory question covering both the modules and the remaining two questions will be as one question from each module, of which one is to be answered. Mark pattern is according to the syllabus with maximum 70 % for theory, derivation, proof and 30% for logical/numerical problems.

COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P- YEAR OF CODE C INTRODUCTION EC205 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS 3-1-0-4 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course objectives:  To develop the skill of analysis and design of various analog circuits using discrete electronic devices as per the specifications. Syllabus: High pass and low pass RC circuits, Differentiator, Integrator, Analysis of BJT biasing circuits, small signal analysis of transistor configurations using small signal hybrid π model, low frequency and high frequency analysis of BJT amplifiers, Cascade amplifiers, Wide band amplifiers, Feedback amplifiers, Oscillators, Tuned amplifiers, Power amplifiers, Sweep circuits and multivibrators, transistor voltage regulator, DC analysis of MOSFET circuits, small signal equivalent circuit, Small signal analysis of MOSFET amplifier circuits, Analysis of multistage MOSFET amplifiers Expected outcome:  At the end of the course, students will be able to analyse and design the different electronic circuits using discrete electronic components. Text Books:  Sedra A. S. and K. C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, 6/e, Oxford University Press, 2013  Millman J. and C. Halkias, Integrated Electronics, 2/e, McGraw-Hill, 2010 References: 1. Neamen D., Electronic Circuits - Analysis and Design, 3/e, TMH, 2007 2. Rashid M. H., Microelectronic Circuits - Analysis and Design, Cengage Learning, 2/e, 2011 3. Spencer R. R. and M. S. Ghausi, Introduction to Electronic Circuit Design, Pearson, 2003 4. Razavi B., Fundamentals of Microelectronics, Wiley, 2015 Course Plan Module Course content (48 hrs) Hours Sem. Exam Marks RC Circuits: Response of high pass and low pass RC circuits to 5 I sine, step, pulse and square wave inputs, Differentiator, Integrator 15 BJT biasing circuits: Types, Q point, Bias stability, Stability 5 factors, RC coupled amplifier and effect of various components, Concept of DC and AC load lines, Fixing of operating point, Classification of amplifiers II Small signal analysis of CE, CB and CC configurations using small 7 15 signal hybrid π model (gain, input and output impedance). Small signal analysis of BJT amplifier circuits, Cascade amplifier FIRST INTERNAL EXAM III High frequency equivalent circuits of BJT, Short circuit current 4 gain, cutoff frequency, Miller effect, Analysis of high frequency 15 response of CE, CB and CC amplifiers Wide band amplifier: Broad banding techniques, low frequency 4 and high frequency compensation, Cascode amplifier. IV Feedback amplifiers: Effect of positive and negative feedback on 3 15 gain, frequency response and distortion, Feedback topologies and

its effect on input and output impedance, Feedback amplifier circuits in each feedback topologies (no analysis required) Oscillators & Tuned Amplifiers: Classification of oscillators, 6 Barkhausen criterion, Analysis of RC phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators, Working of Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal oscillators; Tuned amplifiers, synchronous and stagger tuning SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Power amplifiers: Classification, Transformer coupled class A 6 20 power amplifier, push pull class B and class AB power amplifiers, efficiency and distortion, Transformer-less class B and Class AB power amplifiers, Class C power amplifier (no analysis required) Switching Circuits: Simple sweep circuit, Bootstrap sweep circuit, 5 Astable, Bistable, and Monostable multivibrators, Schmitt Trigger VI Transistor based voltage regulator: Design and analysis of shunt and 4 20 series voltage regulator, load and line regulation, Short circuit protection MOSFET amplifiers: Biasing of MOSFET amplifier, DC analysis of 5 single stage MOSFET amplifier, small signal equivalent circuit. Small signal voltage and current gain, input and output impedances of CS configuration, MOSFETCascade amplifier END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper consists of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions. Each question can have a maximum of four subparts. Among the three questions one will be a compulsory question covering both the modules and the remaining two questions will be as one question from each module, of which one is to be answered. Mark pattern is according to the syllabus with maximum 60 % for theory, derivation, proof and 40% for logical/numerical problems.

COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR OF CODE INTRODUCTION EC207 LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite:Nil Course objectives:  To work with a positional number systems and numeric representations  To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and show the correlation between Boolean expression  To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits  To study the fundamentals of HDL  To design and implement combinational circuits using basic programmable blocks  To design and implement synchronous sequential circuits Syllabus: Positional Number Systems, Boolean algebra, Combinational Logic, HDL concepts ,Digital ICs, Programmable Logic Devices, Sequential Logic, Sequential Circuits Expected outcome: The student should able to: 1. Compare various positional number systems and binary codes 2. Apply Boolean algebra in logic circuit design 3. Design combinational and sequential circuits 4. Design and implement digital systems using basic programmable blocks 5. Formulate various digital systems using HDL Text Books: 1. Donald D Givone, Digital Principles and Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003 2. John F Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2007 References: 1.Ronald J Tocci, Digital Systems, Pearson Education, 11th edition,2010 2.Thomas L Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education, 8th edition 2009 3.Moris Mano, Digital Design, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd edition, 2002 4.John M Yarbrough, Digital Logic Applications and Design, Cenage learning, 2009 5.David Money Harris, Sarah L Harris, Digital Design and Computer Architecture, Morgan Kaufmann – Elsevier, 2009 Course Plan Modul Course content (42 hrs) Hours Sem. e Exam Marks I Number systems- decimal, binary, octal, hexa decimal, base conversion 2 15 1’s and 2’s complement, signed number representation 2 Binary arithmetic, binary subtraction using 2’s complement Binary codes (grey, BCD and Excess-3), Error detection and correcting 2 codes : Parity(odd, even), Hamming code (7,4), Alphanumeric codes : ASCII II Logic expressions, Boolean laws, Duality, De Morgan's law, Logic 2 15 functions and gates Canonical forms: SOP, POS, Realisation of logic expressions using K- 2

map (2,3,4 variables) Design of combinational circuits – adder, subtractor, 4 bit 4 adder/subtractor, BCD adder, MUX, DEMUX, Decoder,BCD to 7 segment decoder, Encoder, Priority encoder, Comparator (2/3 bits) FIRST INTERNAL EXAM III Introduction to HDL : Logic descriptions using HDL, basics of 2 0 modeling (only for assignments) Logic families and its characteristics: Logic levels, propagation delay, 1 15 fan in, fan out, noise immunity , power dissipation, TTL subfamilies NAND in TTL (totem pole, open collector and tri-state), 2 CMOS:NAND, NOR, and NOT in CMOS, Comparison of logic families (TTL,ECL,CMOS) in terms of fan-in, fan-out, supply voltage, propagation delay, logic voltage and current levels, power dissipation and noise margin Programmable Logic devices - ROM, PLA, PAL, implementation of 2 simple circuits using PLA IV Sequential circuits - latch, flip flop ( SR, JK, T, D), master slave JK FF, 3 15 conversion of FFs, excitation table and characteristic equations Asynchronous and synchronous counter design, mod N counters, 5 random sequence generator SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Shift Registers - SIPO, SISO, PISO, PIPO, Shift registers with parallel 3 20 LOAD/SHIFT Shift register counter - Ring Counter and Johnson Counter Mealy and Moore models, state machine ,notations, state diagram, state 3 table, transition table, excitation table, state equations VI Construction of state diagram – up down counter, sequence detector 3 20 Synchronous sequential circuit design - State equivalence 2 State reduction – equivalence classes, implication chart 2 END SEMESTER EXAM Assignments: 1. Simple combinational circuit design using MUX,DEMUX, PLA & PAL 2. HDL simulation of circuits like simple ALU, up-down counter, linear feedback shift register, sequence generator

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper consists of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions. Each question have a maximum of four subparts. Among the three questions one will be a compulsory question covering both the modules and the remaining two questions will be as one question from each module, of which one is to be answered. Mark pattern is according to the syllabus with maximum 50 % for theory, derivation, proof and 50% for logical/numerical problems.

COURSE CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR OF INTRODUCTION EC231 Electronic Devices & Circuits Lab 0-0-3-1 2016 Prerequisite: Should have registered for EC205 Electronic circuits

Course objectives:  To study the working of analog electronic circuits.  To design and implement analog circuits as per the specifications using discrete electronic components. List of Experiments: (12 Mandatory Experiments) 1. VI Characteristics of rectifier and zener diodes 2. RC integrating and differentiating circuits (Transient analysis with different inputs and frequency response) 3. Clipping and clamping circuits (Transients and transfer characteristics) 4. Fullwave Rectifier -with and without filter- ripple factor and regulation 5. Simple Zener voltage regulator (load and line regulation) 6. Characteristics of BJT in CE configuration and evaluation of parameters 7. Characteristics of MOSFET in CS configuration and evaluation of parameters 8. RC coupled CE amplifier - frequency response characteristics 9. MOSFET amplifier (CS) - frequency response characteristics 10. Cascade amplifier – gain and frequency response 11. Cascode amplifier -frequency response 12. Feedback amplifiers (current series, voltage series) - gain and frequency response 13. Low frequency oscillators –RC phaseshift, Wien bridge, 14. High frequency oscillators –Colpitt’s and Hartley 15. Power amplifiers (transformer less) - Class B and Class AB 16. Transistor series voltage regulator (load and line regulation) 17. Tuned amplifier - frequency response 18. Bootstrap sweep circuit 19. Multivibrators -Astable, Monostable and Bistable 20. Schmitt trigger Expected outcome: The student should able to: 1. Design and demonstrate functioning of various discrete analog circuits. 2. Function effectively as an individual and in a team to accomplish the given task.

COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR OF CODE INTRODUCT ION EC233 ELECTRONICS DESIGN AUTOMATION 0-0-3-1 2016 LAB Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives : The primary objective of this course is to familiarize the students, how to simulate the electronics/digital circuits, signals and systems using the soft-wares which are available for the modern design methodologies for the rapid design and verification of complex electronic systems. List of Exercises / Experiments 1 Introduction to SPICE . [Institution can use any one circuit simulation package with schematic entry like EDWinXP, PSpice, Multisim, Proteus or CircuitLab.] Introduction to SPICE software. Recognize various schematic symbols /model parameters of resistor, capacitor, inductor, energy sources (VCVS, CCVS, Sinusoidal source, pulse, etc), transformer, DIODE, BJT, FET, MOSFET, etc., units & values. Use SPICE Schematic Editor to draw and analyse (DC, AC, Transient) simple analog and digital electronic circuits. List of Experiments using SPICE [Six experiments mandatory] Simulation of following circuits using SPICE [Schematic entry of circuits using standard package, Analysis –Transient, AC, DC] 1. Potential divider network 2. RC integrating and differentiating circuits 3. Diode, BJT and MOSFET characteristics 4. Diode Circuits (Clipping, Clamping, Rectifiers) 5. RC coupled amplifier (Single & two stages) 6. RC oscillator (RC phase shift / Wien Bridge) 7. Astable multivibrator 8. Truth table verification of basic and universal gates 9. Half adder /full adder circuits using gates 10. 4 bit adder/BCD adder 11. Encoder/Multiplexers 12. Flipflops/Counters 2 Introduction to MATLAB . [Institution can use any one numerical computational package like SciLab, Octave, Spyder, Python (scipy) or Freemat instead of MATLAB]

Fundamentals, basic operations on array, matrix, complex numbers etc., Script and function files, plotting commands, control statements. Writing simple programs for handling arrays and plotting of mathematical functions, plotting of analog, discrete and noise signals, analysing the simple electronic circuits/network using node and mesh equations. List of Experiments [Four experiments mandatory] Write program and obtain the solutions 1. Solve /plot the mathematical equations containing complex numbers, array, matrix multiplication and quadratic equations etc

2. Obtain different types of plots (2D/3D, surface plot, polar plot) 3. Generate and plot various signals like sine square, pulse in same window. 4. Plot the diode/transistor characteristics. 5. Solve node, mesh and loop equations of simple electrical/network circuits. 6. Find the poles and zeros hence plot the transfer functions/polynomials 7. Sort numbers in ascending order and save to another text file using text read and sort function after reading n floating point numbers from a formatted text file stored in the system. 8. Plot a full wave rectified waveform using Fourier series 3 Introduction to HDL

[Institution can choose VHDL or Verilog as language to describe the problem and any one simulation/synthesis tool like Xilinix ISE, Modelsim, QSim, verilog, VHDL, EDwinXP or ORCAD etc. for the simulation.]

List of Experiments using HDL

Write the HDL code to realise and simulate the following circuits: (at least 4 of the following) 1. Basic gates/universal gates 2. Combinational Circuits (Half adder/Half subtractor) 3. Full adder in 3 modelling styles (Dataflow/structural/Behavioural) 4. Multiplexer/De-multiplexer 5. Decoder/Encoder 6. 4 bit adder/BCD adder 7. Flipflops (SR,JK,T,D) 8. Binary Counters 9. Finite state machines Expected outcomes: 1. An ability to apply knowledge of computer, science, and engineering to the analysis of electrical and electronic engineering problems. 2. An ability to design systems which include hardware and software components. 3. An ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering problems. 4. An ability to use modern engineering techniques

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction HS200 Business Economics 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To familiarize the prospective engineers with elementary Principles of Economics and Business Economics.  To acquaint the students with tools and techniques that are useful in their profession in Business Decision Making which will enhance their employability;  To apply business analysis to the “firm” under different market conditions;  To apply economic models to examine current economic scenario and evaluate policy options for addressing economic issues  To gain understanding of some Macroeconomic concepts to improve their ability to understand the business climate;  To prepare and analyse various business tools like balance sheet, cost benefit analysis and rate of returns at an elementary level

Syllabus Business Economics - basic concepts, tools and analysis, scarcity and choices , resource allocation, marginal analysis, opportunity costs and production possibility curve. Fundamentals of microeconomics - Demand and Supply Analysis, equilibrium, elasticity, production and production function, cost analysis, break-even analysis and markets. Basics of macroeconomics - the circular flow models, national income analysis, inflation, trade cycles, money and credit, and monetary policy. Business decisions - investment analysis, Capital Budgeting decisions, forecasting techniques and elementary Balance Sheet and taxation, business financing, international investments

Expected outcome . A student who has undergone this course would be able to i. make investment decisions based on capital budgeting methods in alignment with microeconomic and macroeconomic theories. ii. able to analyse the profitability of the firm, economy of operation, determination of price under various market situations with good grasp on the effect of trade cycles in business. iii. gain knowledge on Monetary theory, measures by RBI in controlling interest rate and emerging concepts like Bit Coin. iv. gain knowledge of elementary accounting concepts used for preparing balance sheet and interpretation of balance sheet

Text Books 1. Geetika, Piyali Ghosh and Chodhury, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015 2. Gregory Mankiw, Principles of Macroeconomics, Cengage Learning, 2006. 3. M.Kasi Reddy and S.Saraswathi, Economics and Financial Accounting. Prentice Hall of India. New Delhi.

References: 1. Dornbusch, Fischer and Startz, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill, 11th edition, 2010. 2. Khan M Y, Indian Financial System, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th edition, 2011. 3. Samuelson, Managerial Economics, 6th edition, Wiley 4. Snyder C and Nicholson W, Fundamentals of Microeconomics, Cengage Learning (India), 2010. 5. Truett, Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems, Cases, 8th Edition, Wiley 6. Welch, Economics: Theory and Practice 7th Edition, Wiley 7. Uma Kapila, Indian Economy Since Independence, 26th Edition: A Comprehensive and Critical Analysis of India's Economy, 1947-2015 8. C Rangarajan, Indian Economy, Essays on monetary and finance, UBS Publishers’Distributors, 1998 9. A.Ramachandra Aryasri, Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi. 10. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in Global Economy, Thomas Western College Publishing, Singapore. 11. I.M .Pandey, Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House. New Delhi. 12. Dominick Salvatore, Theory and Problems of Micro Economic Theory. Tata Mac Graw- Hill, New Delhi. 13. T.N.Hajela.Money, Banking and Public Finance. Anne Books. New Delhi. 14. G.S.Gupta. Macro Economics-Theory and Applications. Tata Mac Graw- Hill, New Delhi. 15. Yogesh, Maheswari, Management Economics , PHI learning, NewDelhi, 2012 16. Timothy Taylor , Principles of Economics, 3rdedition, TEXTBOOK MEDIA. 17. Varshney and Maheshwari. Managerial Economics. Sultan Chand. New Delhi Course Plan Sem. Exam Module Contents Hours Marks Business Economics and its role in managerial decision making- 15% meaning-scope-relevance-economic problems-scarcity Vs choice (2 Hrs)-Basic concepts in economics-scarcity, choice, resource I 4 allocation- Trade-off-opportunity cost-marginal analysis- marginal utility theory, Law of diminishing marginal utility -production possibility curve (2 Hrs) Basics of Micro Economics I Demand and Supply analysis- 15% equillibrium-elasticity (demand and supply) (3 Hrs.) -Production II concepts-average product-marginal product-law of variable 6 proportions- Production function-Cobb Douglas function-problems (3 Hrs.) FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Basics of Micro Economics II Concept of costs-marginal, average, 15% fixed, variable costs-cost curves-shut down point-long run and short III run (3 Hrs.)- Break Even Analysis-Problem-Markets-Perfect 6 Competition, Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly- Cartel and collusion (3 Hrs.). Basics of Macro Economics - Circular flow of income-two sector 15% and multi-sector models- National Income Concepts-Measurement methods-problems-Inflation, deflation (4 Hrs.)-Trade cycles-Money- IV stock and flow concept-Quantity theory of money-Fischer’s Equation 8 and Cambridge Equation -velocity of circulation of money-credit control methods-SLR, CRR, Open Market Operations-Repo and Reverse Repo rate-emerging concepts in money-bit coin (4 Hrs.).

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Business Decisions I-Investment analysis-Capital Budgeting-NPV, 20% IRR, Profitability Index, ARR, Payback Period (5 Hrs.)- Business V decisions under certainty-uncertainty-selection of alternatives-risk 9 and sensitivity- cost benefit analysis-resource management (4 Hrs.). Business Decisions II Balance sheet preparation-principles and 20% interpretation-forecasting techniques (7 Hrs.)-business financing- VI sources of capital- Capital and money markets-international 9 financing-FDI, FPI, FII-Basic Principles of taxation-direct tax, indirect tax-GST (2 hrs.). END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

Max. marks: 100, Time: 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts

Part A 4 questions uniformly covering modules I and II. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part B 4 questions uniformly covering modules III and IV. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part C 6 questions uniformly covering modules V and VI. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

Course No. Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction MA201 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND COMPLEX 3-1-0-4 2016 ANALYSIS

Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives COURSE OBJECTIVES  To equip the students with methods of solving a general system of linear equations.  To familiarize them with the concept of Eigen values and diagonalization of a matrix which have many applications in Engineering.  To understand the basic theory of functions of a complex variable and conformal Transformations.

Syllabus Analyticity of complex functions-Complex differentiation-Conformal mappings-Complex integration-System of linear equations-Eigen value problem

Expected outcome . At the end of the course students will be able to (i) solve any given system of linear equations (ii) find the Eigen values of a matrix and how to diagonalize a matrix (iii) identify analytic functions and Harmonic functions. (iv)evaluate real definite Integrals as application of Residue Theorem (v) identify conformal mappings(vi) find regions that are mapped under certain Transformations Text Book: Erwin Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th ed. Wiley References: 1.Dennis g Zill&Patric D Shanahan-A first Course in Complex Analysis with Applications-Jones&Bartlet Publishers 2.B. S. Grewal. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. 3.Lipschutz, Linear Algebra,3e ( Schaums Series)McGraw Hill Education India 2005 4.Complex variables introduction and applications-second edition-Mark.J.Owitz-Cambridge Publication

Course Plan Sem. Exam Module Contents Hours Marks Complex differentiation Text 1[13.3,13.4] Limit, continuity and derivative of complex functions 3

Analytic Functions 2

Cauchy–Riemann Equation(Proof of sufficient condition of I 2 analyticity & C R Equations in polar form not required)-Laplace’s Equation

Harmonic functions, Harmonic Conjugate 2 15% Conformal mapping: Text 1[17.1-17.4] Geometry of Analytic functions Conformal Mapping, 1 II Mapping  zw 2 conformality of  ew z . 2 15%

1 The mapping zw  z 1 Properties of w  1 z

Circles and straight lines, extended complex plane, fixed points

Special linear fractional Transformations, Cross Ratio, Cross Ratio property-Mapping of disks and half planes 3

Conformal mapping by  sinzw &  cos zw 3 (Assignment: Application of analytic functions in Engineering)

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Complex Integration. Text 1[14.1-14.4] [15.4&16.1] Definition Complex Line Integrals, First Evaluation Method, Second 2 Evaluation Method Cauchy’s Integral Theorem(without proof), Independence of 2 path(without proof), Cauchy’s Integral Theorem for Multiply 15% Connected Domains (without proof) III Cauchy’s Integral Formula- Derivatives of Analytic 2 Functions(without proof)Application of derivative of Analytical

Functions Taylor and Maclaurin series(without proof), Power series as Taylor series, Practical methods(without proof) 2

Laurent’s series (without proof) 2 Residue Integration Text 1 [16.2-16.4] 15% Singularities, Zeros, Poles, Essential singularity, Zeros of analytic 2 functions

Residue Integration Method, Formulas for Residues, Several 4 singularities inside the contour Residue Theorem. IV Evaluation of Real Integrals (i) Integrals of rational functions of 3  sin and cos (ii)Integrals of the type  xf )( dx (Type I, Integrals  from 0 to  ) ( Assignment : Application of Complex integration in Engineering) SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION 20% Linear system of Equations Text 1(7.3-7.5)

Linear systems of Equations, Coefficient Matrix, Augmented Matrix 1 V Gauss Elimination and back substitution, Elementary row operations, Row equivalent systems, Gauss elimination-Three possible cases, 5 Row Echelon form and Information from it.

Linear independence-rank of a matrix 2 Vector Space-Dimension-basis-vector spaceR3

Solution of linear systems, Fundamental theorem of non- 1 homogeneous linear systems(Without proof)-Homogeneous linear systems (Theory only Matrix Eigen value Problem Text 1.(8.1,8.3 &8.4) 20%

Determination of Eigen values and Eigen vectors-Eigen space 3

Symmetric, Skew Symmetric and Orthogonal matrices –simple 2 properties (without proof)

VI Basis of Eigen vectors- Similar matrices Diagonalization of a matrix- Quadratic forms- Principal axis theorem(without proof) 4

(Assignment-Some applications of Eigen values(8.2))

END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 hours The question paper will consist of 3 parts. Part A will have 3 questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering modules I and II. Each question may have two sub questions.

Part B will have 3 questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering modules III and IV. Each question may have two sub questions.

Part C will have 3 questions of 20 marks each uniformly covering modules V and VI. Each question may have three sub questions.

Any two questions from each part have to be answered.

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction EC202 SIGNALS & SYSTEMS 3-1-0 -4 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives 1. To train students for an intermediate level of fluency with signals and systems in both continuous time and discrete time, in preparation for more advanced subjects in digital signal processing, image processing, communication theory and control systems. 2. To study continuous and discrete-time signals and systems, their properties and representations and methods those are necessary for the analysis of continuous and discrete- time signals and systems. 3. To familiarize with techniques suitable for analyzing and synthesizing both continuous-time and discrete time systems. 4. To gain knowledge of time-domain representation and analysis concepts as they relate to differential equations, difference equations, impulse response and convolution, etc. 5. To study frequency-domain representation and analysis concepts using Fourier analysis tools, Laplace Transform and Z-transform. To study concepts of the sampling process, reconstruction of signals and interpolation. Syllabus Elementary signals, Continuous time and Discrete time signals and systems, Signal operations, Differential equation representation, Difference equation representation, Continuous time LTI Systems, Discrete time LTI Systems, Correlation between signals, Orthogonality of signals, Frequency domain representation, Continuous time Fourier series, Continuous time Fourier transform, Laplace transform, Inverse Laplace transform, Unilateral Laplace transform, Transfer function, Frequency response, Sampling, Aliasing, Z transform, Inverse Z transform, Unilateral Z transform, Frequency domain representation of discrete time signals, Discrete time Fourier series and discrete time Fourier transform (DTFT), Analysis of discrete time LTI systems using the above transforms Expected outcome . The student will be able to: i. Define, represent, classify and characterize basic properties of continuous and discrete time signals and systems. ii. Represent the CT signals in Fourier series and interpret the properties of Fourier transform and Laplace transform iii. Outline the relation between convolutions, correlation and to describe the orthoganality of signals. iv. Illustrate the concept of transfer function and determine the magnitude and phase response of LTI systems. v. Explain sampling theorem and techniques for sampling and reconstruction. vi. Determine z transforms, inverse z transforms and analyze LTI systems using z transform. Text Book: 1. Alan V. Oppenheim and Alan Willsky, Signals and Systems, PHI, 2/e, 2009 2. Simon Haykin, Signals & Systems, John Wiley, 2/e, 2003 References: 1. Anand Kumar, Signals and Systems, PHI, 3/e, 2013. 2. B P. Lathi, Priciples of Signal Processing & Linear systems, Oxford University Press. 3. Gurung, Signals and System, PHI. 4. Mahmood Nahvi, Signals and System, Mc Graw Hill (India), 2015. 5. P Ramakrishna Rao, Shankar Prakriya, Signals and System, MC Graw Hill Edn 2013.

6. Rodger E. Ziemer, Signals & Systems - Continuous and Discrete, Pearson, 4/e, 2013 Course Plan Sem. Exam Module Contents Hours Marks Elementary Signals, Classification and representation of 4 continuous time and discrete time signals, Signal operations Continuous time and discrete time systems - Classification, 3 I Properties. 15% Representation of systems: Differential equation representation of continuous time systems. Difference equation representation 2 of discrete systems. Continuous time LTI systems and convolution integral. 3 Discrete time LTI systems and linear convolution. 2 II 15% Stability and causality of LTI systems. 2 Correlation between signals, Orthoganality of signals. 2 FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Frequency domain representation of continuous time signals- 15% 4 continuous time Fourier series and its properties. Convergence, Continuous time fourier transform and its 3 III properties. Laplace Transform, ROC, Inverse transform, properties, 3 unilateral Laplace transform. Relation between Fourier and Laplace transforms. 1 Analysis of LTI systems using Laplace and Fourier transforms. 15% Concept of transfer function, Frequency response, Magnitude 4 IV and phase response. Sampling of continuous time signals, Sampling theorem for 3 lowpass signals, aliasing. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Z transform, ROC , Inverse transform, properties, Unilateral Z 20% 4 transform. V Frequency domain representation of discrete time signals, 4 Discrete time fourier series and its properties. Discrete time fourier transform (DTFT) and its properties 4 Relation between DTFT and Z-Transform, Analysis of discrete 20% VI time LTI systems using Z transforms and DTFT, Transfer 6 function, Magnitude and phase response. END SEMESTER EXAM Assignment: Convolution by graphical methods, Solution of differential equations. Project: Use of Matlab in finding various transforms: magnitude and phase responses.

Question Paper Pattern The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers I and II module, Part B covers III and IV module, Part C covers V and VI module. Each part shall have three questions which may have maximum four subdivisions. Among the three questions one will be a compulsory question covering both modules and the remaining from each module, of which one to be answered. Part A & Part B questions shall carry 15 marks each and Part C questions shall carry 20 marks each with maximum 30% for theory and 70% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Year of Credits Introduction EC204 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 4-0-0-4 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To equip the students with a sound understanding of fundamental concepts of operational amplifiers  To understand the wide range of applications of operational amplifiers  To introduce special function integrated circuits To introduce the basic concepts and types of data converters Syllabus Differential amplifier configurations, Operational amplifiers, Block diagram, Ideal op-amp parameters, Effect of finite open loop gain, bandwidth and slew rate on circuit performance, op- amp applications-linear and nonlinear, Active filters, Specialized ICs and their applications, Monolithic Voltage Regulators - types and its applications, Data converters - specifications and types. Expected outcome . The students will i. have a thorough understanding of operational amplifiers ii. be able to design circuits using operational amplifiers for various applications Text Book: 1. Franco S., Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits, 3/e, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008 2. Salivahanan S. ,V. S. K. Bhaaskaran, Linear Integrated Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008 References: 1. Botkar K. R., Integrated Circuits, 10/e, Khanna Publishers, 2010 2. C.G. Clayton, Operational Amplifiers, Butterworth & Company Publ. Ltd. Elsevier, 1971 3. David A. Bell, Operational Amplifiers & Linear ICs, Oxford University Press, 2nd edition, 2010 4. Gayakwad R. A., Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Prentice Hall, 4/e, 2010 5. R.F. Coughlin & Fredrick Driscoll, Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits, 6th Edition, PHI,2001 6. Roy D. C. and S. B. Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age International, 3/e, 2010 7. Sedra A. S. and K. C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, 6/e, Oxford University Press, 2013 Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Differential amplifiers: Differential amplifier configurations using BJT, Large and small signal operations, Input resistance, Voltage gain, CMRR, Non-ideal characteristics of differential amplifier. 6 Frequency response of differential amplifiers, Current sources, Active load, Concept of current mirror circuits, Wilson current I 15% mirror circuits (Analysis using hybrid ‘pi’ model only). Operational amplifiers: Introduction, Block diagram, Ideal op-amp parameters, Equivalent circuit, Voltage transfer curve, Open loop 5 op-amp configurations, Effect of finite open loop gain, Bandwidth and slew rate on circuit performance II Op-amp with negative feedback: Introduction, Feedback 3 15%

configurations, Voltage series feedback, Voltage shunt feedback, Properties of practical op-amp. Op-amp applications: Inverting and non inverting amplifier, DC and AC amplifiers, Summing, Scaling and averaging amplifiers, 4 Instrumentation amplifier. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Op-amp applications: Voltage to current converter, Current to III voltage converter, Integrator, Differentiator, Precision rectifiers, 7 15% Log and antilog amplifier, Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators Astable and monostable multivibrators, Triangular and saw tooth wave generators, Comparators, Zero crossing detector, Schmitt 5 trigger IV 15% Active filters: Advantages, First and second order low pass, High pass, Band pass and band reject filters, Design of filters using 5 Butterworth approximations SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Specialized ICs and its applications: 20% Timer IC 555 : Astable and monostable operations, applications. 3 Analog Multipliers: Introduction, Gilbert multiplier cell. Voltage Controlled Oscillator IC AD633 and their applications. Phase Locked Loop – Operation, Closed loop analysis, Lock and capture range, Basic building blocks, PLL IC 565, Applications of V 4 PLL for AM & FM detection and Frequency multiplication, Frequency division, Frequency synthesizing. Monolithic Voltage Regulators - Fixed voltage regulators, 78XX and 79XX series, Adjustable voltage regulators, IC 723 – Low 4 voltage and high voltage configurations, Current boosting, Current limiting, Short circuit and Fold-back protection. Data Converters: D/A converter, Specifications, Weighted resistor 20% 3 type, R-2R Ladder type. VI A/D Converters: Specifications, Classification, Flash type, Counter ramp type, Successive approximation type, Single slope 5 type, Dual slope type, Sample-and-hold circuits. END SEMESTER EXAM Assignment 1. Explain the importance of frequency compensated networks in opamps and the commonly used compensation techniques. 2. Write short notes on commercially available integrated circuits (Opamp, ADC, DAC, VCO, Analog multiplier, PLL ) with pin outs and their important features Question Paper Pattern The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers I and II module, Part B covers III and IV module, Part C covers V and VI module. Each part has three questions, which may have maximum four subdivisions. Among the three questions, one will be a compulsory question covering both modules and the remaining from each module, of which, one to be answered. Part A & Part B questions shall carry 15 marks each and Part C questions shall carry 20 marks each with maximum 60% for theory and 40% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction EC206 COMPUTER ORGANISATION 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC207 Logic Circuit Design

Course Objectives  To impart knowledge in computer architecture.  To impart knowledge in machine language programming. To develop understanding on I/O accessing techniques and memory structures. Syllabus Functional units of a computer, Arithmetic circuits, Processor architecture, Instructions and addressing modes, Execution of program, Micro architecture design process, Design of data path and control units, I/O accessing techniques, Memory concepts, Memory interface, Cache and Virtual memory concepts. Expected outcome . The students will be able to: i. Understand the functional units of a computer ii. Identify the different types of instructions iii. Understand the various addressing modes iv. Understand the I/O addressing system v. Categorize the different types of memories Text Book: 1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessey, Computer Organisation and Design, Fourth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann 2. David Money Harris, Sarah L Harris, Digital Design and Computer Architecture,Morgan Kaufmann – Elsevier, 2009 References: 1. Carl Hamacher : “Computer Organization ”, Fifth Edition, Mc Graw Hill 2. John P Hayes: “Computer Architecture and Organisation”, Mc Graw Hill 3. William Stallings: “Computer Organisation and Architecture”, Pearson Education 4. Andrew S Tanenbaum: “Structured Computer Organisation”, Pearson Education 5. Craig Zacker: “PC Hardware : The Complete Reference”, TMH Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Functional units of a computer Arithmetic Circuits: Adder-carry propagate adder, Ripple carry 4 adder, Basics of carry look ahead and prefix adder, Subtractor, I Comparator, ALU 15% Shifters and rotators, Multiplication, Division 3 Number System: Review of Fixed point & Floating point number 1 system Architecture : Assembly Language, Instructions, Operands, 2 Registers, Register set, Memory, Constants II 15% Machine Language: R-Type, I-Type, J-Type Instructions, 3 Interpreting machine language code FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION MIPS Addressing modes – Register only, Immediate, Base, PC- III 3 15% relative, Pseudo - direct

MIPS memory map, Steps for executing a program - Compilation, 3 Assembling, Linking, Loading Pseudoinstuctions, Exceptions, Signed and Unsigned instructions, 3 Floating point instructions MIPS Microarchitectures – State elements of MIPS processor 1 Design process and performance analysis of Single cycle processor, Single cycle data path, Single cycle control for R – type 3 IV arithmetic/logical instructions. 15% Design process and performance analysis of multi cycle processor, Multi cycle data path, Multi cycle control for R – type 3 arithmetic/logical instructions. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION I/O system – Accessing I/O devices, Modes of data transfer, 20% Programmed I/O, Interrupt driven I/O, Direct Memory Access, 3 Standard I/O interfaces – Serial port, Parallel port, PCI, SCSI, and USB. V Memory system – Hierarchy, Characteristics and Performance analysis, Semiconductor memories (RAM, ROM, EPROM), 4 Memory Cells – SRAM and DRAM, internal organization of a memory chip, Organization of a memory unit. Cache Memory – Concept/principle of cache memory, Cache size, 20% mapping methods – direct, associated, set associated, Replacement 3 VI algorithms, Write policy- Write through, Write back. Virtual Memory – Memory management, Segmentation, Paging, 3 Address translation, Page table, Translation look aside buffer. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers I and II module, Part B covers III and IV module, Part C covers V and VI module. Each part has three questions, which may have maximum four subdivisions. Among the three questions, one will be a compulsory question covering both modules and the remaining from each module, of which one to be answered. Part A & Part B questions shall carry 15 marks each and Part C questions shall carry 20 marks each with maximum 80 % for theory and 20% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction EC208 ANALOG COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 3 - 0 - 0 - 3 2016 Prerequisite: EC205 Electronic Circuits

Course Objectives  To study the concepts and types of modulation schemes.  To study different types of radio transmitters and receivers.  To study the effects of noise in analog communication systems. To impart basic knowledge on public telephone systems. Syllabus Elements of communication system, Need for modulation, Noises, Amplitude Modulation, Amplitude modulator circuits, Demodulator circuits, AM transmitters, Types of AM, Angle modulation: principles of frequency modulation, phase modulation, AM and FM Receivers, Frequency modulator circuits, FM transmitters, FM receiver, Noise in AM and FM systems, Public telephone systems, standard telephone set, cordless telephones. Expected outcome . The students will be able to: i. understand the different analog modulation schemes. ii. understand the fundamental ideas of noises and its effect in communication systems. iii. explain the principle and working of analog transmitters and receivers. iv. know the basic idea of telephone systems. Text Book: 1. Dennis Roody and John Coolen, Electronic Communication, Pearson, 4/e, 2011. 2. George Kennedy, Electronic Communication Systems, McGrawHill, 4/e, 2008. 3. Tomasi, Electronic Communications System, Pearson, 5/e, 2011. References: 1. Blake, Electronic Communication system, Cengage, 2/e, 2012. 2. Simon Haykin, Communication Systems, Wiley 4/e, 2006. 3. Taub, Schilling, Saha, Principles of communication system, McGraw Hill, 2013. 4. Tomasi, Advanced Electronic Communications Systems, Pearson, 6/e, 2012. Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction, Elements of communication systems, Need for 2 modulation I Noise in communication system, Thermal noise (white noise), 15% Shot noise, Partition noise, Flicker noise, Burst noise, Signal to 3 noise ratio, Noise factor, Noise temperature, Narrow band noise. Amplitude modulation: Sinusoidal AM, Modulation index, Average power, Effective voltage and current, Nonsinusoidal 4 II modulation. 15% Amplitude modulator circuits, Amplitude demodulator circuits, 5 AM transmitters, Noise in AM Systems. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Single Sideband Modulation: Principles, Balanced modulators, Singly & doubly balanced modulators, SSB generation, Filter III 6 15% method, Phasing method & Third method, SSB reception, Modified SSB systems, Pilot carrier SSB & ISB, Companded SSB.

Angle modulation: Frequency modulation, Sinusoidal FM, Frequency spectrum, Modulation index, Average power, Non- 4 sinusoidal modulation, Deviation ratio, Comparison of AM and FM. IV 15% AM & FM Receivers: Super heterodyne receiver, Tuning range, Tracking, Sensitivity and gain, Image rejection, Double 4 conversion, Adjacent channel selectivity, Automatic Gain Control (AGC). SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Phase modulation, Equivalence between PM and FM, Sinusoidal 20% 3 phase modulation, Digital phase modulation. V Angle modulator Circuits: Varactor diode modulators, Transistor modulators. 3 FM Transmitters: Direct and Indirect Methods. Angle modulation detectors, Slope detector, Balanced slope 20% detector, Foster-Seeley discriminator, PLL demodulator, 4 Automatic Frequency Control (AFC), Amplitude limiters, Noise in VI FM systems, Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis. Telephone systems, standard telephone set, basic call procedures 4 and tones, DTMF, cordless telephones. END SEMESTER EXAM

Assignment Study of 1. The telephone circuit - Local subscriber loop, Private-line circuits, Voice-frequency circuit arrangements. 2. The public telephone network - Instruments, Local loops, Trunk circuits and exchanges, Local central exchanges, Automated central office switches and exchanges.

Question Paper The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers I and II module, Part B covers III and IV module, Part C covers V and VI module. Each part has three questions, which may have maximum four subdivisions. Among the three questions, one will be a compulsory question covering both modules and the remaining from each module, of which one to be answered. Part A & Part B questions shall carry 15 marks each and Part C questions shall carry 20 marks each with maximum 60 % for theory and 40% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P- YEAR OF CODE C INTRODUCTION EC230 LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN LAB 0-0-3-1 2016 Prerequisite: EC207 Logic circuit design Course objectives:  To study the working of standard digital ICs and basic building blocks  To design and implement combinational circuits  To design and implement sequential circuits List of Experiments: (Minimum 12 experiments are to be done)

1. Realization of functions using basic and universal gates (SOP and POS forms). 2. Design and Realization of half /full adder and subtractor using basic gates and universal gates. 3. 4 bit adder/subtractor and BCD adder using 7483. 4. 2/3 bit binary comparator. 5. Binary to Gray and Gray to Binary converters. 6. Study of Flip Flops: S-R, D, T, JK and Master Slave JK FF using NAND gates 7. Asynchronous Counter: Realization of 4-bit counter 8. Asynchronous Counter: Realization of Mod-N counters. 9. Asynchronous Counter:3 bit up/down counter 10. Synchronous Counter: Realization of 4-bit up/down counter. 11. Synchronous Counter: Realization of Mod-N counters. 12. Synchronous Counter:3 bit up/down counter 13. Shift Register: Study of shift right, SIPO, SISO, PIPO, PISO (using FF & 7495) 14. Ring counter and Johnson Counter. (using FF & 7495) 15. Realization of counters using IC’s (7490, 7492, 7493). 16. Multiplexers and De-multiplexers using gates and ICs. (74150, 74154), 17. Realization of combinational circuits using MUX & DEMUX. 18. Random sequence generator. 19. LED Display: Use of BCD to 7 Segment decoder / driver chip to drive LED display 20. Static and Dynamic Characteristic of NAND gate (MOS/TTL) Expected outcome: The student should able to: 1. Design and demonstrate functioning of various combination circuits 2. Design and demonstrate functioning of various sequential circuits 3. Function effectively as an individual and in a team to accomplish the given task

COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR OF CODE INTRODUCTION EC232 ANALOG INTEGRATED 0-0-3-1 2016 CIRCUITS LAB Prerequisite:.Should have registered for EC204 Analog Integrated Circuits Course objectives:  To acquire skills in designing and testing analog integrated circuits  To expose the students to a variety of practical circuits using various analog ICs.

List of Experiments: (Minimum 12 experiments are to be done)

1. Familiarization of Operational amplifiers - Inverting and Non inverting amplifiers, frequency response, Adder, Integrator, comparators. 2. Measurement of Op-Amp parameters. 3. Difference Amplifier and Instrumentation amplifier. 4. Schmitt trigger circuit using Op –Amps. 5. Astable and Monostable multivibrator using Op -Amps. 6. Timer IC NE555 7. Triangular and square wave generators using Op- Amps. 8. Wien bridge oscillator using Op-Amp - without & with amplitude stabilization. 9. RC Phase shift Oscillator. 10. Precision rectifiers using Op-Amp. 11. Active second order filters using Op-Amp (LPF, HPF, BPF and BSF). 12. Notch filters to eliminate the 50Hz power line frequency. 13. IC voltage regulators. 14. A/D converters- counter ramp and flash type. 15. D/A Converters- ladder circuit. 16. Study of PLL IC: free running frequency lock range capture range Expected outcome: The student should able to: 1. Design and demonstrate functioning of various analog circuits 2. Students will be able to analyze and design various applications of analog circuits.

Course code Course Name L-T-P- Year of Introduction Credits HS210 LIFE SKILLS 2-0-2 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To develop communication competence in prospective engineers.  To enable them to convey thoughts and ideas with clarity and focus.  To develop report writing skills.  To equip them to face interview & Group Discussion.  To inculcate critical thinking process.  To prepare them on problem solving skills.  To provide symbolic, verbal, and graphical interpretations of statements in a problem description.  To understand team dynamics & effectiveness.  To create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values.  To instill Moral and Social Values, Loyalty and also to learn to appreciate the rights of others.  To learn leadership qualities and practice them. Syllabus Communication Skill: Introduction to Communication, The Process of Communication, Barriers to Communication, Listening Skills, Writing Skills, Technical Writing, Letter Writing, Job Application, Report Writing, Non-verbal Communication and Body Language, Interview Skills, Group Discussion, Presentation Skills, Technology-based Communication. Critical Thinking & Problem Solving: Creativity, Lateral thinking, Critical thinking, Multiple Intelligence, Problem Solving, Six thinking hats, Mind Mapping & Analytical Thinking. Teamwork: Groups, Teams, Group Vs Teams, Team formation process, Stages of Group, Group Dynamics, Managing Team Performance & Team Conflicts. Ethics, Moral & Professional Values: Human Values, Civic Rights, Engineering Ethics, Engineering as Social Experimentation, Environmental Ethics, Global Issues, Code of Ethics like ASME, ASCE, IEEE. Leadership Skills: Leadership, Levels of Leadership, Making of a leader, Types of leadership, Transactions Vs Transformational Leadership, VUCA Leaders, DART Leadership, Leadership Grid & leadership Formulation. Expected outcome The students will be able to  Communicate effectively.  Make effective presentations.  Write different types of reports.  Face interview & group discussion.  Critically think on a particular problem.  Solve problems.  Work in Group & Teams  Handle Engineering Ethics and Human Values.  Become an effective leader.

Resource Book: Life Skills for Engineers, Complied by ICT Academy of Kerala, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd., 2016 References:  Barun K. Mitra; (2011), “Personality Development & Soft Skills”, First Edition; Oxford Publishers.  Kalyana; (2015) “Soft Skill for Managers”; First Edition; Wiley Publishing Ltd.  Larry James (2016); “The First Book of Life Skills”; First Edition; Embassy Books.  Shalini Verma (2014); “Development of Life Skills and Professional Practice”; First Edition; Sultan Chand (G/L) & Company  John C. Maxwell (2014); “The 5 Levels of Leadership”, Centre Street, A division of Hachette Book Group Inc. Course Plan Hours Sem. Module Contents L-T-P Exam L P Marks Need for Effective Communication, Levels of communication; 2 Flow of communication; Use of language in communication; Communication networks; Significance of technical communication, Types of barriers; Miscommunication; Noise; Overcoming measures,

Listening as an active skill; Types of Listeners; Listening for general content; Listening to fill up information; Intensive Listening; Listening for specific information; Developing 2 effective listening skills; Barriers to effective listening skills.

Technical Writing: Differences between technical and literary style, Elements of style; Common Errors, Letter Writing: Formal, informal and demi-official letters; business letters, Job 4 Application: Cover letter, Differences between bio-data, CV and Resume, Report Writing: Basics of Report Writing; I Structure of a report; Types of reports.

Non-verbal Communication and Body Language: Forms

of non-verbal communication; Interpreting body-language 3 scheme evaluation e cues; Kinesics; Proxemics; Chronemics; Effective use of body Se language

Interview Skills: Types of Interviews; Ensuring success in job interviews; Appropriate use of non-verbal communication, Group Discussion: Differences between group discussion and debate; Ensuring success in group discussions, Presentation Skills: Oral presentation and public speaking skills; business 4 presentations, Technology-based Communication: Netiquettes: effective e-mail messages; power-point presentation; enhancing editing skills using computer software.

Need for Creativity in the 21st century, Imagination, Intuition, 2 Experience, Sources of Creativity, Lateral Thinking, Myths of creativity

Critical thinking Vs Creative thinking, Functions of Left Brain & Right brain, Convergent & Divergent Thinking,

Critical reading & Multiple Intelligence. 2

II Steps in problem solving, Problem Solving Techniques, 2 Problem Solving through Six Thinking Hats, Mind Mapping, Forced Connections.

Problem Solving strategies, Analytical Thinking and quantitative reasoning expressed in written form, Numeric, symbolic, and graphic reasoning, Solving application 2 problems.

Introduction to Groups and Teams, Team Composition, Managing Team Performance, Importance of Group, Stages of 3 Group, Group Cycle, Group thinking, getting acquainted, Clarifying expectations.

Group Problem Solving, Achieving Group Consensus. 2

III Group Dynamics techniques, Group vs Team, Team Dynamics, Teams for enhancing productivity, Building & 3 Managing Successful Virtual Teams. Managing Team Performance & Managing Conflict in Teams.

Working Together in Teams, Team Decision-Making, Team 2 Culture & Power, Team Leader Development. Morals, Values and Ethics, Integrity, Work Ethic, Service 3 Learning, Civic Virtue, Respect for Others, Living Peacefully.

Caring, Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Valuing Time, Cooperation, Commitment, Empathy, Self-Confidence, 2 Character Spirituality, Senses of 'Engineering Ethics’, variety of moral issued, Types of inquiry, moral dilemmas, moral autonomy, Kohlberg's theory, Gilligan's theory, Consensus and IV controversy, Models of Professional Roles, Theories about 3 right action, Self-interest, customs and religion, application of ethical theories.

Engineering as experimentation, engineers as responsible experimenters, Codes of ethics, Balanced outlook on. 3

The challenger case study, Multinational corporations, Environmental ethics, computer ethics, 2

Weapons development, engineers as managers, consulting engineers, engineers as expert witnesses and advisors, moral leadership, sample code of Ethics like ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers(India), Indian Institute of Materials 3 Management, Institution of electronics and telecommunication engineers(IETE), India, etc. Introduction, a framework for considering leadership, 4 entrepreneurial and moral leadership, vision, people selection and development, cultural dimensions of leadership, style, followers, crises.

Growing as a leader, turnaround leadership, gaining control, trust, managing diverse stakeholders, crisis management 2 V

Implications of national culture and multicultural leadership 2 Types of Leadership, Leadership Traits.

Leadership Styles, VUCA Leadership, DART Leadership, Transactional vs Transformational Leaders, Leadership Grid, 2 Effective Leaders, making of a Leader, Formulate Leadership END SEMESTER EXAM

EVALUATION SCHEME

Internal Evaluation (Conducted by the College) Total Marks: 100

Part – A

(To be started after completion of Module 1 and to be completed by 30th working day of the semester)

1. Group Discussion – Create groups of about 10 students each and engage them on a GD on a suitable topic for about 20 minutes. Parameters to be used for evaluation is as follows;

(i) Communication Skills – 10 marks (ii) Subject Clarity – 10 marks (iii) Group Dynamics - 10 marks (iv) Behaviors & Mannerisms - 10 marks (Marks: 40)

Part – B

(To be started from 31st working day and to be completed before 60th working day of the semester)

2. Presentation Skills – Identify a suitable topic and ask the students to prepare a presentation (preferably a power point presentation) for about 10 minutes. Parameters to be used for evaluation is as follows;

(i) Communication Skills* - 10 marks (ii) Platform Skills** - 10 marks (iii) Subject Clarity/Knowledge - 10 marks (Marks: 30)

* Language fluency, auditability, voice modulation, rate of speech, listening, summarizes key learnings etc.

** Postures/Gestures, Smiles/Expressions, Movements, usage of floor area etc.

Part – C

(To be conducted before the termination of semester)

3. Sample Letter writing or report writing following the guidelines and procedures. Parameters to be used for evaluation is as follows;

(i) Usage of English & Grammar - 10 marks (ii) Following the format - 10 marks (iii) Content clarity - 10 marks

(Marks: 30)

External Evaluation (Conducted by the University) Total Marks: 50 Time: 2 hrs.

Part – A

Short Answer questions

There will be one question from each area (five questions in total). Each question should be written in about maximum of 400 words. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows;

(i) Content Clarity/Subject Knowledge (ii) Presentation style (iii) Organization of content

(Marks: 5 x 6 = 30)

Part – B

Case Study

The students will be given a case study with questions at the end the students have to analyze the case and answer the question at the end. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows;

(i) Analyze the case situation (ii) Key players/characters of the case (iii) Identification of the problem (both major & minor if exists) (iv) Bring out alternatives (v) Analyze each alternative against the problem (vi) Choose the best alternative (vii) Implement as solution (viii) Conclusion (ix) Answer the question at the end of the case (Marks: 1 x 20 = 20)

Course code Course Name L-T-P -Credits Year of Introduction MA204 Probability, Random Processes and 3-1-0-4 2016 Numerical Methods Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To introduces the modern theory of probability and its applications to modelling and analysis and processing of random processes and signals.  To learn most of the important models of discrete and continuous probability distributions and widely used models of random processes such as Poisson processes and Markov chains.  To understand some basic numerical methods for interpolation and integration and also for finding roots of equations and solutions of ODEs. Syllabus Discrete random variables- Continuous Random variables-Multiple Random variables. Random Processes- Autocorrelation, Power spectrum-Special Random Processes. Numerical Methods. Expected outcome. At the end of the course students would have become familiar with quantifying and analysing random phenomena using various models of probability distributions and random processes. They would also have learned the concepts of autocorrelation and power spectral density. Some of the fundamental numerical methods learned in the course would help them to solve a variety of mathematical problems by the use of computers when analytical methods fail or are difficult. Text Book: 1. V.Sundarapandian, “Probability, Statistics and Queueing theory”, PHI Learning, 2009 2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10th edition, Wiley, 2015. References: 1. HosseinPishro-Nik, “Introduction to Probability, Statistics and Random Processes”, Kappa Research, 2014 ( Also available online at www.probabilitycourse.com ) 2. OliverC.Ibe,FundamentalsofAppliedProbabilityandRandomProcesses”Elsevier,2005. 3. T Veerarajan “Probability Statistics and Random Process” Third edition-McGraw Hill. 4. Ward-Cheney , Numerical Mathematical and computing,Cengage Learning-7th Edition Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Discrete random variables [Text 1: Relevant portions of sections 2.1, 2.2,2.3, 2.5, 3.3 and 3.4] Discrete random variables, probability mass function, cumulative 3 distribution function, expected value, mean and variance. I Binomial random variable-, mean, variance. Poisson random variable, mean, variance, approximation of binomial 2 by Poisson. 2 Distribution fitting-binomial and Poisson. 2 15% Continuous random variables [Text 1: Relevant portions of sections 2.4, 2.5, 3.7, 3.8 and 3.11] II Continuous random variables, Probability density function, expected 2 value, mean and variance. Uniform random variable-, mean, variance. 2 15%

Exponential random variable-mean, variance, memoryless property. 2 Normal random variable-Properties of Normal curve mean, variance (without proof), Use of Normal tables. 3 FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Joint distributions [Text 1: Relevant portions of sections 4.1, 4.2, 15% 4.4 4.7and 4.10] Joint probability distributions- discrete and continuous, marginal 4 III distributions, independent random variables. Expectation involving two or more random variables, covariance of 3 pairs of random variables. Central limit theorem (without proof). 2 Random processes [Text 1: Relevant portions of sections 5.1, 5.2, 15% 5.3 and 6.2] Random processes, types of random processes, 2 Mean, correlation and covariance functions of random processes, Wide 4 IV Sense Stationary (WSS) process, Properties of autocorrelationand auto covariance functions of WSS processes. Power spectral density and its properties. 2 SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Special random processes [Text 1: Relevant portions of sections 20% 5.5, 5.5.1, 5.5.2, 5.5.3,5.5.4) and 5.6] Poisson process-properties, probability distribution of inter arrival 4 times. V Discrete time Markov chain- Transition probability matrix, Chapman 5 Kolmogorov theorem (without proof), computation of probability distribution and higher order transition probabilities, stationary distribution. Numerical Methods [Text 2: Relevant portions of sections 19.2, 20% 19.3, 19.5 and 21.1] (Derivation of formulae not required in this module) Finding roots of equations-Newton-Raphson method. 3 VI Interpolation-Newton's forward and backward difference formula, 3 Lagrange's interpolation method. Numerical Integration-trapezoidal rule, Simpson's 1/3rd rule. 3 Numerical solution of first order ODE-Euler method, Runge-Kutta 3 fourth order (classical method). END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 hours The question paper will consist of 3 parts. Part A will have 3 questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering modules I and II. Each question may have two sub questions. Part B will have 3 questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering modules III and IV. Each question may have two sub questions. Part C will have 3 questions of 20 marks each uniformly covering modules V and VI. Each question may have three sub questions.

Any two questions from each part have to be answered.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC301 Digital Signal Processing 3-1-0-4 2016 Prerequisite: EC 202 Signals & Systems Course objectives: 1. To provide an understanding of the principles, algorithms and applications of DSP 2. To study the design techniques for digital filters 3. To give an understanding of Multi-rate Signal Processing and its applications 4. To introduce the architecture of DSP processors Syllabus Discrete Fourier Transform and its Properties, Linear Filtering methods based on the DFT, Frequency analysis of signals using the DFT, Computation of DFT, FFT Algorithms, IDFT computation using Radix-2 FFT Algorithms, Efficient computation of DFT of two real sequences and a 2N-Point real sequence, Design of FIR Filters, Design of linear phase FIR Filters using window methods and frequency sampling method, Design of IIR Digital Filters from Analog Filters, IIR Filter Design, Frequency Transformations, FIR Filter Structures, IIR Filter Structures, Introduction to TMS320C67xx digital signal processor, Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing, Finite word length effects in DSP systems, IIR digital filters, FFT algorithms. Expected outcome: The students will understand (i) the principle of digital signal processing and applications. (ii) the utilization of DSP to electronics engineering Text Books: 1. Oppenheim A. V., Schafer R. W. and Buck J. R., Discrete Time Signal Processing, 3/e, Prentice Hall, 2007. 2. Proakis J. G. and Manolakis D. G., Digital Signal Processing, 4/e, Pearson Education, 2007. References: 1. Chassaing, Rulph., DSP applications using C and the TMS320C6x DSK. Vol. 13. John Wiley & Sons, 2003. 2. Ifeachor E.C. and Jervis B. W., Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach, 2/e, Pearson Education, 2009. 3. Lyons, Richard G., Understanding Digital Signal Processing, 3/e. Pearson Education India, 2004. 4. Mitra S. K., Digital Signal Processing: A Computer Based Approach, 4/e McGraw Hill (India), 2014. 5. NagoorKani, Digital Signal Processing, 2e, Mc Graw –Hill Education New Delhi, 2013 6. Salivahanan, Digital Signal Processing,3e, Mc Graw –Hill Education New Delhi, 2014 (Smart book) 7. Singh A., Srinivasan S., Digital Signal Processing: Implementation Using DSP Microprocessors, Cenage Learning, 2012.

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks The Discrete Fourier Transform: DFT as a linear transformation, Relationship of the DFT to other transforms, 2 IDFT Properties of DFT and examples Circular convolution 4 15 I Linear Filtering methods based on the DFT- linear convolution using circular convolution, overlap save and 3 overlap add methods Frequency Analysis of Signals using the DFT 2 Computation of DFT: Radix-2 Decimation in Time and 3 Decimation in Frequency FFT Algorithms II IDFT computation using Radix-2 FFT Algorithms 2 15 Efficient computation of DFT of Two Real Sequences and a 2 2N-Point Real Sequence FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Design of FIR Filters- Symmetric and Anti-symmetric FIR 2 Filters Design of linear phase FIR Filters using Window methods III (rectangular, Hamming and Hanning) and frequency sampling 6 15 Method Comparison of Design Methods for Linear Phase FIR Filters 1 Design of IIR Digital Filters from Analog Filters 4 (Butterworth) IIR Filter Design by Impulse Invariance, and Bilinear IV 3 15 Transformation Frequency Transformations in the Analog and Digital Domain 2 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

Block diagram and signal flow graph representations of filters 1 FIR Filter Structures: (Linear structures), Direct Form, 3 Cascade Form and Lattice Structure IIR Filter Structures: Direct Form, Transposed Form, Cascade 2 V 20 Form and Parallel Form Computational Complexity of Digital filter structures 1 Computer architecture for signal processing : Introduction to 2 TMS320C67xx digital signal processor Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing: Decimation and Interpolation (Time domain and Frequency Domain 3 Interpretation without proof) VI 20 Finite word length effects in DSP systems: Introduction (analysis not required), fixed-point and floating-point DSP 2 arithmetic, ADC quantization noise

Finite word length effects in IIR digital filters: coefficient 2 quantization errors Finite word length effects in FFT algorithms: Round off errors 2 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern (End Sem Exam)

Maximum Marks: 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 40 % for theory and 60% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC303 Applied Electromagnetic Theory 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course objectives: 1. To introduce basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector fields. 2. To impart knowledge on the basic concepts of electric and magnetic fields 3. To develop a solid foundation in the analysis and application of electromagnetic fields, Maxwell’s equations and Poynting theorem. 4. To become familiar with propagation of signal through transmission lines and waveguides. Syllabus: Co-ordinate transformation, vector algebra, vector calculus, electrostatics, magneto statics, Maxwell’s equations, Boundary condition, Solution of wave equation, propagation of plane EM wave in different media, Poynting vector theorem, transmission lines, Smith chart, Waveguides. Expected outcome: At the end of the course, students will be able: 1. To develop a solid foundation and a fresh perspective in the analysis and application of electromagnetic fields. 2. To analyse the propagation of electromagnetic waves in different media. 3. To analyze the characteristics of transmission lines. 4. To solve the different transmission line problems using Smith chart 5. To understand the different modes of propagation in waveguides. Text Books: 1. John D. Kraus, Electromagnetics, 5/e, TMH, 2010. 2. Mathew N O Sadiku, Elements of Electromagnetics, Oxford University Press, 6/e, 2014. 3. William, H., Jf Hayt, and John A. Buck. Engineering Electromagnetics. McGraw-Hill, 8/e McGraw-Hill, 2014. References: 1. Jordan and Balmain , Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems, PHI, 2/e,2013 2. Joseph A Edminister , Electromagnetics, Schaum‘s Outline Series McGraw Hill, 4/e, 1995 3. Martin A Plonus , Applied Electromagnetics, McGraw Hill, 2/e,1978. 4. Matthew N.O. Sadiku & S.V. Kulkarni "‘Principles of Electromagnetics’, Oxford University Press Inc. Sixth Edition, Asian Edition,2015 5. Nannapaneni Narayana Rao, Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, Pearson, 6/e, 2006. 6. Umran S. Inan and Aziz S. Inan, Engineering Electromagnetics, Pearson, 2010.

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Review of vector calculus, Spherical and Cylindrical 1 coordinate system, Coordinate transformation 0 Curl, Divergence, Gradient in spherical and cylindrical 1 coordinate system. Electric field – Application of Coulomb’s law, Gauss law and Amperes current law (proof not required, simple problems 1 only) Poisson and Laplace equations (proof not required, simple I problems only), Determination of E and V using Laplace 1 equation. 15 Derivation of capacitance and inductance of two wire transmission line and coaxial cable. Energy stored in Electric 2 and Magnetic field. Displacement current density, continuity equation. Magnetic vector potential. Relation between scalar potential and vector 2 potential. Maxwell’s equation from fundamental laws. 1 Boundary condition of electric field and magnetic field from 1 Maxwell's equations II Solution of wave equation 1 15 Propagation of plane EM wave in perfect dielectric, lossy medium, good conductor, media-attenuation, phase velocity, 3 group velocity, skin depth. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Reflection and refraction of plane electromagnetic waves at boundaries for normal & oblique incidence (parallel and 4 perpendicular polarization), Snell’s law of refraction, Brewster angle. III 15 Power density of EM wave, Poynting vector theorem, 3 Complex Poynting vector. Polarization of electromagnetic wave-linear, circular and 2 elliptical polarisation. Uniform lossless transmission line - line parameters 1 Transmission line equations, Voltage and Current distribution 2 IV of a line terminated with load 15 Reflection coefficient and VSWR. Derivation of input 2 impedance of transmission line. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Transmission line as circuit elements (L and C). 2 Half wave and quarter wave transmission lines. 1 V 20 Development of Smith chart - calculation of line impedance 2 and VSWR using smith chart.

Single stub matching (Smith chart and analytical method). 2 Parallel-Plate Waveguide - TE & TM waves. 1 The hollow rectangular wave guide – modes of propagation of wave- dominant mode, group velocity and phase velocity - 3 VI 20 derivation and simple problems only. Attenuation in wave guides, guide wavelength and impedance 3 -derivation and simple problems only. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper (End semester exam)

Maximum marks : 100 Time: 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50 % for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC305 Microprocessor & Microcontroller 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC207 Logic Circuit Design Course objectives: 1. To understand fundamental operating concepts of microprocessors and microcontrollers. 2. To communicate with various devices using controller. 3. To design a microcontroller based system with the help of the interfacing devices. 4. To program the controller to make various peripherals work for specified application. Syllabus: Microprocessors: 8085 architecture and its operation, microprocessor initiated operations and bus organization, pin configuration and functions, generation of control signals for external operations- fetch, IO/M, read/write, machine cycles and bus timings. Addressing modes, instruction set, instruction classification. Overview/concept of peripheral IC interfacing with 8085 microprocessor (8251, 8253, 8255, 8279). Simple examples in assembly language programming for 8085 (only for internal examination). Introduction to development tools: IDE, cross assembler, builder, linker and debugger.( not required for exam). Introduction to 8086 and comparison between 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium. Microcontrollers: 8051- features, architecture, memory organization, registers, I/O ports, pin configuration and functions. Addressing modes, instruction set, instruction classification. Assembly language programming. Interrupts in 8051. Timer/Counter programming: Operating modes, time delay generation, Waveform generation. Serial communication: RS 232 interface, registers in UART, modes of operation, programming examples for serial data transmission and reception. Interfacing of DIP switch, stepper motor, ADC, DAC, LEDs and seven segment displays, alphanumeric LCD module with 8051. Expected outcome: The students will be able to: 1. Distinguish various types of processor architectures. 2. Describe architectures, memory organization of 8085 microprocessor and 8051. 3. Develop programming skills in assembly for interfacing peripheral devices with 8051 Text Books: 1. Kenneth J. Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller, Cengage learning, 3/e. 2. Lyla B.Das : Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, Pearson Education, India, 2011 3. Ramesh S. Goankar. 8085 Microprocessors Archiecture Application and Programming. Penram International, 5/e. References: 1. Aditya P Mathur, Introduction to Microprocessor. Tata Mc Graw – Hill 2. Han Way Hung, “PIC Microcontroller, An introduction to software and hardware interfacing “, Cenage learning. 3. I.Scott Mackenzie, Raphel C.-W Phan, The 8051 microcontroller, 4th edition. 4. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd edition 5. Nagoorkani, Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 2e, McGraw Hill Education India, 2012. 6. Soumitra Kumar Mandal. Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture, Programming & Interfacing Using 8085, 8086 and 8051, McGraw Hill Education (2011). 7.

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Microprocessors: Introduction, organization of a microprocessor based system, evolution of microprocessors, 8085 architecture and its operation, microprocessor initiated 5 15 I operations and bus organization, pin configuration and functions, generation of control signals for external operations- fetch, IO/M, read/write. Machine cycles and bus timings, Addressing modes, instruction 4 set instruction classification. 15 Overview/concept of peripheral IC interfacing with 8085 3 microprocessor (8251, 8253, 8255, 8279). II Simple examples in assembly language programming for 8085 2 (only for internal examination) 0 Introduction to development tools: IDE, cross assembler, 3 builder, linker and debugger.( not required for exam) FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Introduction to 8086 and comparison between 2 8086,80286,80386,80486 and Pentium Microcontrollers: Introduction, comparison between III 15 microprocessors and microcontrollers, microcontroller families, 6 8051- features, architecture, memory organization, registers, I/O ports, pin configuration and functions. Addressing modes, instruction set, instruction classification. 2 IV 15 Assembly language programming examples for 8051. 3 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Interrupts in 8051: Types, interrupt source, interrupt handling 2 and programming Timer/Counter programming: Operating modes, time delay 2 V generation, Waveform generation. 20 Serial communication: RS 232 interface, registers in UART, modes of operation, programming examples for serial data 2 transmission and reception Interfacing: Interfacing (block schematic and assembly language programming) of DIP switch, stepper motor, ADC, VI 6 20 DAC, LEDs and seven segment displays, alphanumeric LCD module with 8051. END SEMESTER EXAM Question Paper Pattern (End semester exam) Max. Marks: 100 Time: 3 hours The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 80 % for theory and 20% for logical/numerical problems and programming.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC307 Power Electronics & Instrumentation 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC205 Electronic Circuits Course objectives: 1. To provide an insight on the concepts of Power Electronics and Electronic instruments. 2. To study the applications of Power electronics such as Switched mode regulators and inverters. 3. To develop understanding of the concept of Transducers and Digital instruments. Syllabus: Power semiconductor switches and its static and dynamic characteristics. Switched mode regulators, SMPS, Switched mode inverters, UPS. Performance characteristics of instruments, Measurement of passive components, Different Transducers, Digital Instruments. Expected outcome: The students will be able: 1. To understand the concepts of Power Electronics and the various applications. 2. To get an insight on various electronic instruments, their configuration and measurements using them. 3. To understand the principle of operation of Transducers Text Books: 1. Bell D. A., Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, Oxford University Press, 2003. 2. Rashid M. H., "Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall India, Third Edition, New Delhi. 3. Umanand L., Power Electronics Essentials and Applications, Wiley India, 2015. References: 1. Daniel W. Hart, Power Electronics, McGraw Hill, 2011. 2. Doeblin E., Measurement Systems, 5/e, McGraw Hill, 2003. 3. Helfrick A. D. and W. D. Cooper: Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, 5/e, PHI, 2003. 4. Mandal, Power Electronics 1e, McGraw Hill Education India, 2014 5. Mohan N. and T. M. Undeland, Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design, John Wiley, 2007. 6. Nakra, Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis,4e, Mc Graw –Hill Education New Delhi,2016 7. Patranabis D., Principles of Electronic Instrumentation, PHI, 2008.

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Linear Electronics versus Power Electronics - Power 1 semiconductor switches. Power diodes-structure, static and dynamic characteristics 2

Power transistors - Power BJT, Power MOSFET, GTO and 15 I 3 IGBT Steady state and switching characteristics of Power BJT, Power 2 MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction to Switched mode regulators 1 Buck, Boost and Buck-Boost DC-DC converters 2 Waveforms and expression of DC-DC converters for output II voltage, voltage and current ripple under continuous conduction 1 15 mode. (Derivation not required) Isolated converters - Flyback, Forward, Push Pull, Half Bridge and Full Bridge Converters - waveforms and governing 3 equations. (Derivation not required) FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Overview of SMPS, Switched mode inverters- Principles of 2 PWM switching schemes. Single phase inverters - half bridge, full bridge and push pull. 2 III 15 UPS - on line and off line. 1 Three phase inverters - PWM and Space vector modulation in 3 three phase inverters. Generalized configurations of instruments - Functional 1 elements. Classification of instruments Generalized performance characteristics of instruments - Static 2 IV characteristics and Dynamic characteristics. 15 Measurement of: resistance using Wheastone’s bridge, inductance using Maxwell-Wien bridge, and capacitance using 2 Schering’s bridge. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Transducers - Classification, Selection of transducers. 1 Resistance transducers - Principle of operation, strain gauge. 2 V Inductive Transducers: LVDT. 2 20 Capacitive transducers - different types, capacitor microphone, 2 Hall Effect transducer, proximity transducers. Electronic Multimeter, Audio Power Meter, RF power meter 2 Digital Instruments - Basics, digital measurement of time, 2 VI phase, frequency and digital voltmeter. 20 Frequency synthesizer, Spectrum analyzers, Logic State 1 analyzers (block diagram only).

Digital storage oscilloscope – Working Principle, controls and 2 applications. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End Sem Exam)

Max. Marks: 100 Time: 3 hours

COURSE YEAR OF COURSE NAME L-T-P-C CODE INTRODUCTION EC333 Digital Signal Processing Lab 0-0-3-1 2016 Prerequisite: EC 213 Electronics Design Automation Lab, EC 202 Signals & Systems Course objectives:  To enable the students to explore the concepts of design, simulation and implementation of various systems using MATLAB/SciLab/OCTAVE and DSP kit. List of Experiments:

Part A: Experiments on Digital Signal Processor/ DSP kits: (All experiments are mandatory)

1. Generation of sine wave and standard test signals. 2. Convolution : Linear and Circular 3. Real Time FIR Filter implementation (Low-pass, High-pass and Band-pass) by inputting a signal from the signal generator 4. Real Time IIR Filter implementation ( Low-pass, High-pass and Band-pass) by inputting a signal from the signal generator 5. Sampling of analog signal and study of aliasing.

Part B: Experiments based on MATLAB/SciLab/OCTAVE (7 experiments are mandatory)

1. Generation of Waveforms (Continuous and Discrete) 2. Verification of Sampling Theorem. 3. Time and Frequency Response of LTI systems (First and second order). 4. Linear Convolution, Circular Convolution and Linear Convolution using Circular Convolution. 5. To find the DFT and IDFT for the given input sequence. 6. Linear convolution using DFT (Overlap-add and Overlap-Save methods). 7. To find the DCT and IDCT for the given input sequence. 8. To find FFT and IFFT for the given input sequence. 9. FIR and IIR filter design using Filter Design Toolbox. 10. FIR Filter (Low-pass, High-pass and Band-pass)design (Window method). 11. IIR Filter (Low-pass, High-pass and Band-pass)design (Butterworth and Chebychev). 12. Generation of AM, FM & PWM waveforms and their spectrum. 13. Generation of DTMF signal. 14. Study of sampling rate conversion (Decimation, Interpolation, Rational factor). 15. Filtering of noisy signals 16. Implementation of simple algorithms in audio processing (delay, reverb, flange etc.). 17. Implementation of simple algorithms in image processing (detection, de-noising, filtering etc.) Expected outcome: The students will be able to: Design, simulate and realize various systems related to DSP.

COURSE YEAR OF COURSE NAME L-T-P-C CODE INTRODUCTION EC335 Power Electronics & Instrumentation Lab 0-0-3-1 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course objectives:  To design and implement basic power electronic circuits  To study the working of transducers  To train the usage of Digital Instruments List of Experiments (8 experiments mandatory):

Cycle I (Four mandatory) 1. Design and Set up DC-DC converter 2. Design and Set up Push pull DC- DC Converter 3. Design and Set up Buck DC-DC Converters 4. Design and Set up Simple SMPS 5. Design and Set up Half bridge and full bridge converters 6. Design and Set up basic Inverter Circuits

Cycle II (Four mandatory) 7. Transducer measurements using diode thermometer 8. Transducer measurements using LVDT 9. Transducer measurements using Strain gauge. 10. Transducer measurements using Pressure transducer. 11. Transducer measurements using Thermocouple & RTDS 12. Transducer measurements using Photocells

Desired Experiment 13. Study of Digital LCR meter, Frequency synthesizer, Spectrum analyzer and Logic State analyzer application. Expected outcome: The students will be able to: 1. Design and demonstrate basic power electronic circuits. 2. Use transducers for application. 3. Function effectively as an individual and in a team to accomplish the given task.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC360 Soft Computing 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course objectives: 1. To familiarize various components of soft computing like fuzzy logic, neural networks and genetic algorithm. 2. To give an overview of fuzzy Logic and to understand the concepts and terminologies of fuzzy systems 3. To give a description on artificial neural networks with its advantages and application. 4. To study the fundamentals of Genetic Algorithm (GA). 5. To understand the concepts of hybrid systems. Syllabus: Fuzzy sets and systems. Neural Networks - Applications - typical architecture, pattern Classification and pattern Association. Fundamentals of Genetic Algorithm, AI search algorithm and hybrid structure. Expected outcome: The students will be able to: 1. Identify and describe soft computing techniques and their roles in building intelligent Machines. 2. Apply fuzzy logic and reasoning to handle uncertainty and solve engineering problems 3. Recognize the feasibility of applying a soft computing methodology for a particular Problem. 4. Apply neural networks to pattern classification and regression problems. 5. Apply genetic algorithms to combinatorial optimization problems Text Books: 1. D.E. Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning", Addison Wesley,N.Y, 1989. 2. Laurene V. Fausett, (1993) “Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Architecture, Algorithms and Applications", Prentice Hall. 3. Timothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications” Wiley India. References: 1. Ibrahim A. M., Introduction to Applied Fuzzy Electronics, PHI, 2013. 2. J. Yen and R. Langari, Fuzzy Logic, Intelligence, Control and Information, Pearson Education. 3. K.H.Lee, First Course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications, Springer-Verlag. 4. Lin C. T. and C.S. G. Lee, Neural Fuzzy Systems, Prentice Hall, 1996. 5. S. Rajsekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and Applications” Prentice Hall of India. 6. S.N. Sivanandan and S.N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley India, 2007. ISBN: 10: 81-265-1075-7.

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Soft computing: Introduction, soft computing vs hard computing, Fuzzy Computing, Neural Computing, Genetic 2 Algorithms. applications of soft computing

Introduction to fuzzy sets and systems-crispness, vagueness, 15 I uncertainty and fuzziness. Basics of fuzzy sets, membership 3 functions, support of a fuzzy set height, normalized fuzzy set, alpha cuts. Type- 2 fuzzy sets. Operation on fuzzy set-complement, 4 intersection, union, Demorgan's Law Equality & subset hood. II Extension Principle and its application, Fuzzy relation- 15 operations, projection, max-min, min-max composition, 3 cylindrical extension. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Reflexivity, symmetry and transitivity of fuzzy relations. Fuzzy 4 prepositions, fuzzy connectives, linguistic variables, hedges. III Approximate reasoning or fuzzy inference, Fuzzy rule based 15 system. Fuzzification and defuzzification using centroid, centre 4 of sums. Introduction to Neural Networks - Applications –Biological neuron- Typical architecture of Artificial Neural Networks - 4 IV Common activation function. 15 McCulloh Pitts Neuron – Architecture, logic implementatons. 4 Supervised and Unsupervised learning SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Linear Separability, Pattern Classification: Perceptrons 2 V Back propagation network and its architecture, Back 20 4 propagation learning, back propagation algorithm Genetic Algorithm Basic concepts, Initialization and selection, 5 VI Survival of the Fittest - Fitness Computations. 20 Operators - Cross over, Mutation. 3 END SEMESTER EXAM Question Paper ( End semester exam) Max. Marks: 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50 % for theory, derivation, proof and 50% for logical/numerical problems.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC361 Digital System Design 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC207 Logic Circuit Design Course objectives: 1. To study synthesis and design of CSSN 2. To study synthesis and design of ASC 3. To study hazards and design hazard free circuits 4. To study PLA folding 1. To study architecture of one CPLDs and FPGA family Syllabus: Clocked synchronous networks, asynchronous sequential circuits, Hazards, Faults, PLA, CPLDs and FPGA Expected outcome: The student will be able: 1. To analyze and design clocked synchronous sequential circuits 2. To analyze and design asynchronous sequential circuits 3. To apply their knowledge in diagnosing faults in digital circuits, PLA 4. To interpret architecture of CPLDs and FPGA Text Books: 1. Donald G Givone, Digital Principles & Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003 2. John F Wakerly, Digital Design, Pearson Education, Delhi 2002 3. John M Yarbrough, Digital Logic Applications and Design, Thomson Learning References: 1. Miron Abramovici, Melvin A. Breuer and Arthur D. Friedman, Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design, John Wiley & Sons Inc. 2. Morris Mano, M.D.Ciletti, Digital Design, 5th Edition, PHI. 3. N. N. Biswas, Logic Design Theory, PHI 4. Richard E. Haskell, Darrin M. Hanna , Introduction to Digital Design Using Digilent FPGA Boards, LBE Books- LLC 5. Samuel C. Lee, Digital Circuits and Logic Design, PHI 6. Z. Kohavi, Switching and Finite Automata Theory, 2nd ed., 2001, TMH Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Analysis of clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks(CSSN) 2 Modelling of CSSN – State assignment and reduction 1

Design of CSSN 2 15 I Iterative circuits 1 ASM Chart and its realization 2 Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuits (ASC) 2 Flow table reduction- Races in ASC 1 II State assignment problem and the transition table- Design of 15 2 AS Design of Vending Machine controller. 2

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Hazards – static and dynamic hazards – essential 1 Design of Hazard free circuits – Data synchronizers 1 III Mixed operating mode asynchronous circuits 1 15 Practical issues- clock skew and jitter 1 Synchronous and asynchronous inputs – switch bouncing 2 Fault table method – path sensitization method – Boolean 2 difference method IV Kohavi algorithm 2 15 Automatic test pattern generation – Built in Self Test(BIST) 3 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM PLA Minimization - PLA folding 2 Foldable compatibility Matrix- Practical PLA 2 V 20 Fault model in PLA 1 Test generation and Testable PLA Design. 3 CPLDs and FPGAs - Xilinx XC 9500 CPLD family, functional 3 block diagram– input output block architecture - switch matrix VI 20 FPGAs – Xilinx XC 4000 FPGA family – configurable logic 3 block - input output block, Programmable interconnect END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End semester exam)

Max. Marks: 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50 % for theory, derivation, proof and 50% for logical/numerical problems.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC363 Optimization Techniques 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course objectives: 1. To understand the need and origin of the optimization methods. 2. To get a broad picture of the various applications of optimization methods used in engineering. 3. To define optimization problem and its various components Syllabus: Engineering applications of optimization, Formulation of design problems as mathematical programming problems, objective function, constraints, classification of optimization problems/techniques, necessary and sufficient conditions for optimality, uni- modality, convexity, Mathematical formulation of LP Problems, Reduction of a LPP to the standard form. Feasible solutions, Graphical solution methods, optimality conditions, degeneracy, Simplex algorithm, Duality in linear programming, Transportation Problem, Game theory, Network path models, Nonlinear unconstrained optimization, Modern methods of optimization, Genetic algorithm. Introduction to optimization tools and software.

Expected outcome: The students will (i) have a thorough understanding of optimization techniques (ii)l be able to formulate and solving the engineering optimization problems Text Books: 1. H.A. Taha, “ Operations Research”, 5/e, Macmillan Publishing Company, 1992. 2. Kalynamoy Deb. “Optimization for Engineering Design‐ Algorithms and Examples”, Prentice‐Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 3. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering optimization Theory and Practice”, New Age International, 2009 References: 1. A. Ravindran, D. T. Phillips, J. J. Solberg, Operations Research – Principles and Practice, John Wiley and Sons. 2. Ashok D Belegundu, Tirupathi R Chandrupatla, “Optimization concepts and Application in Engineering”, Pearson Education. 3. Hadley, G. “Linear programming”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi 4. J. S. Arora, Introduction to Optimum Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company. 5. Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, Operations Research, Sultan Chand and Sons 6. Papalambros & Wilde, Principles of Optimal Design, Cambridge University Press, 2008

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Introduction: Engineering applications of optimization, Formulation of design problems as mathematical programming 2 problems, objective function, constraints, classification of optimization problems/techniques. 15 I Optimization techniques: Classical optimization, unconstrained single and multivariable minimization- necessary and sufficient 5 conditions for optimality, uni-modality, convexity.

Linear programming problems-I: Mathematical formulation of LP Problems, slack, surplus and artificial variables. Reduction of a LPP to the standard form, feasible solutions. Graphical II 7 15 solution method, simplex algorithm and solution using tabular method, optimality conditions and degeneracy. Duality in linear programming FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Transportation Problem: Formulation of transportation problem, Basic feasible solution using different methods- East III 7 15 West corner method, Vogel approximation method, Optimality methods, MODI method, Unbalanced transportation problem Game Theory: Introduction, 2- person zero – sum game; Saddle point; Mini-Max and Maxi-Min Theorems (statement only); Graphical solution (2x n, m x 2 game), dominance property. IV 7 15 Network path Models: Tree Networks – Minimal Spanning Tree - Prim’s Algorithm. Shortest path problems- solution methods – Dijkstra’s Method. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Nonlinear unconstrained optimization: Single variable optimization methods- Fibonacci search method, Newton- V Raphson method. 7 20 Multi-variable methods- Hook-Jeeves pattern search method, Cauchy’s (steepest descent) method. Modern methods of optimization: Introduction to Genetic algorithm, Cross over, Mutation, Reproduction, Simple 5 20 VI examples of applications in electronics engineering Introduction to optimization tools and softwares. Solution of 2 0 optimization Problems using MATLAB. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End sem. Exam.)

Max. Marks: 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 30 % for theory and 70% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC365 Biomedical Engineering 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course objectives: 1. To introduce student to basic biomedical engineering technology 2. To understand the anatomy & physiology of major systems of the body in designing equipment for medical treatments. 3. To impart knowledge about the principle and working of different types of bio-medical electronic equipment/devices. Syllabus: Human body-overview, Physiological systems of body, Measurement of physiological parameters, Assisting and therapeutic devices, Medical laboratory equipments, Telemetry in patient care, Patient safety, Medical imaging system Expected outcome: The students will be able: 1. To understand diagnosis and therapy related equipments. 2. To understand the problem and identify the necessity of equipment for diagnosis and therapy. 3. To understand the importance of electronics engineering in medical field. 4. To understand the importance of telemetry in patient care Text Books: 1. K S Kandpur, “Hand book of Biomedical instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill 2nd e/d. 2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2004 References: 1. Barbara Christe, Introduction to Biomedical Instrumentation, Cambridge University Press, 2008. 2. J. J. Carr, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, Pearson Education 4th e/d. 3. John G Webster, “Medical Instrumentation application and design”, John Wiley 3rd e/d. 4. Richard Aston, “Principle of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”. Merrill Education/Prentice Hall. Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Introduction to bio-medical instrumentation system, overview 1 of anatomy and physiological systems of the body. Sources of bio-electric potential: Resting and action potential, propagation of action potentials. Bioelectric potentials 2 examples (ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG, EGG, etc 15 I introduction only.) Electrode theory: Nernst relation Bio potential electrodes: Microelectrodes, skin surface 1 electrodes, needle electrodes.

Instrumentation for clinical laboratory: Bio potential amplifiers- instrumentation amplifiers, carrier amplifiers, isolation 2 amplifiers, chopper amplifiers Heart and cardiovascular system (brief discussion), electro conduction system of the heart. Electrocardiography, ECG 3 machine block diagram, ECG lead configurations, ECG recording system, Einthoven triangle, analysis of ECG signals. Measurement of blood pressure: Direct, indirect and relative II 15 methods of blood pressure measurement, auscultatory method, 2 oscillometric and ultrasonic non-invasive pressure measurements. Measurement of blood flow: Electromagnetic blood flow 2 meters and ultrasonic blood flow meters. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM The human nervous system. Neuron, action potential of brain, brain waves, types of electrodes, placement of electrodes, 2 evoked potential, EEG recording, analysis of EEG. Electromyography: Nerve conduction velocity, instrumentation 1 system for EMG. III 15 Physiology of respiratory system (brief discussion), Respiratory parameters, spirometer, body plethysmographs, gas exchange 2 and distribution. Instruments for clinical laboratory: Oxymeters, pH meter, blood 3 cell counter, flame photometer, spectrophotometer Therapeutic Equipments: Principle, block schematic diagram, 15 working and applications of : pacemakers, cardiac IV 6 defibrillators, heart–lung machine, dialyzers, surgical diathermy equipment, ventilators SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Medical Imaging systems (Basic Principle only): X-ray imaging - Properties and production of X-rays, X-ray machine, 2 applications of X-rays in medicine. Computed Tomograpy: Principle, image reconstruction, 2 V scanning system and applications. 20 Ultrasonic imaging systems: Basic pulse echo system, propagation of ultrasonic through tissues and reflections, 3 display types, A-Scan, B-Scan, M-Scan, applications, real- time ultrasonic imaging systems and probes. Magnetic Resonance Imaging – Basic NMR components, 3 Biological effects and advantages of NMR imaging Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry VI system, application of telemetry in medicine, single channel 2 20 telemetry system for ECG and temperature Patient Safety: Electric shock hazards, leakage current, safety 1 codes for electro medical equipments END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End Sem. Exam)

Maximum Marks: 100 Time : 3 hours

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction HS300 Principles of Management 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To develop ability to critically analyse and evaluate a variety of management practices in the contemporary context;  To understand and apply a variety of management and organisational theories in practice;  To be able to mirror existing practices or to generate their own innovative management competencies, required for today's complex and global workplace;  To be able to critically reflect on ethical theories and social responsibility ideologies to create sustainable organisations. Syllabus Definition, roles and functions of a manager, management and its science and art perspectives, management challenges and the concepts like, competitive advantage, entrepreneurship and innovation. Early contributors and their contributions to the field of management. Corporate Social Responsibility. Planning, Organizing, Staffing and HRD functions, Leading and Controlling. Decision making under certainty, uncertainty and risk, creative process and innovation involved in decision making. Expected outcome. A student who has undergone this course would be able to i. manage people and organisations ii. critically analyse and evaluate management theories and practices iii. plan and make decisions for organisations iv. do staffing and related HRD functions Text Book: Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management, McGraw Hill Companies, 10th Edition. References: 1. Daft, New era Management, 11th Edition, Cengage Learning 2. Griffin, Management Principles and Applications, 10th Edition, Cengage Learning 3. Heinz Weirich, Mark V Cannice and Harold Koontz, Management: a Global, Innovative and Entrepreneurial Perspective, McGraw Hill Education, 14th Edition 4. Peter F Drucker, The Practice of Management, McGraw Hill, New York 5. Robbins and Coulter, Management, 13th Edition, 2016, Pearson Education Course Plan Sem. Exam Module Contents Hours Marks

Introduction to Management: definitions, managerial roles and functions; Science or Art perspectives- External environment- I global, innovative and entrepreneurial perspectives of Management (3 Hrs.)– Managing people and organizations in 6 the context of New Era- Managing for competitive advantage - the Challenges of Management (3 Hrs.) 15%

Early Contributions and Ethics in Management: Scientific Management- contributions of Taylor, Gilbreths, Human Relations approach-contributions of Mayo, McGregor's II Theory, Ouchi's Theory Z (3 Hrs.) Systems Approach, the Contingency Approach, the Mckinsey 7-S Framework Corporate Social responsibility- Managerial Ethics. (3 Hrs) 6 15% FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Planning: Nature and importance of planning, -types of plans III (3 Hrs.)- Steps in planning, Levels of planning - The Planning 6 15% Process. – MBO (3 Hrs.). Organising for decision making: Nature of organizing, organization levels and span of control in management Organisational design and structure –departmentation, line and IV staff concepts (3 Hrs.) Limitations of decision making- Evaluation and selecting from alternatives- programmed and 6 15% non programmed decisions - decision under certainty, uncertainty and risk-creative process and innovation (3 Hrs.) SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Staffing and related HRD Functions: definition, Empowerment, staff – delegation, decentralization and recentralisation of authority – Effective Organizing and culture-responsive organizations –Global and entrepreneurial V organizing (3 Hrs.) Manager inventory chart-matching person 9 20% with the job-system approach to selection (3 Hrs.) Job design- skills and personal characteristics needed in managers- selection process, techniques and instruments (3 Hrs.) Leading and Controlling: Leading Vs Managing – Trait approach and Contingency approaches to leadership - Dimensions of Leadership (3 Hrs.) - Leadership Behavior and styles – Transactional and Transformational Leadership (3 VI Hrs.) Basic control process- control as a feedback system – 9 20% Feed Forward Control – Requirements for effective control – control techniques – Overall controls and preventive controls – Global controlling (3 Hrs.) END SEMESTER EXAM Question Paper Pattern Max. marks: 100, Time: 3 hours . The question paper shall consist of three parts

Part A: 4 questions uniformly covering modules I and II. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks) Part B : 4 questions uniformly covering modules III and IV. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks) Part C: 6 questions uniformly covering modules V and VI. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC302 Digital Communication 4-0-0-4 2016 Prerequisite: EC204 Signals and Systems, EC208 Analog Communication Course Objectives:  To understand the concept of Digital representation of analog source  To understand the Performance comparison various pulse modulation schemes  To discuss Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) problem in digital communication and to derive the Nyquist Criteria for zero ISI in data Transmission  To analyse the need for introducing ISI in controlled manner  To understand signal space representation of signal using Gram Schmidt orthonormalisation procedure  To analyse the error probability for different modulation schemes like BPSK, BFSK, QPSK etc.  To understand the principle of spread spectrum communication and to illustrate the concept of FHSS and DSSS  To understand various Multiple Access Techniques

Syllabus: Overview of Random variables and Random process, Overall picture and relevance of digital communication, Digital Pulse modulation, Signal space concepts, Matched filter receiver, Review of Gaussian random process, Digital band pass modulation schemes, Detection of signals in Gaussian noise, Pseudo–noise sequences, Importance of synchronization, Spread spectrum communication, Diversity techniques, Multiple Access Techniques. Expected Outcome The students will be able to i. Illustrate the Digital representation of analog source ii. Compare the performance of various Digital Pulse Modulation Schemes iii. Apply the knowledge of ISI problems in Digital communication to derive Nyquist criteria for zero ISI iv. Analyse the need for introducing ISI in Digital Communication in a controlled manner v. Construct signal space representation of signal using Gram Schmidt orthonormalisation procedure vi. Compare the error probability for different digital modulation schemes like BPSK, BFSK, QPSK etc. vii. Describe the principle of spread spectrum communication and to illustrate the concept of FHSS and DSSS viii. Understand various Diversity Techniques Text Books: 1. John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi, Digital Communication, McGraw Hill Education Edition, 2014 2. Nishanth N, Digital Communication, Cengage Learning India , 2017 3. Ramakrishna Rao, Digital communication, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Limited. 4. Simon Haykin, Communication Systems, 4/e Wiley India, 2012.

References: 1. Couch: Analog and Digital Communication. 8e, Pearson Education India, 2013. 2. H.Taub and Schilling Principles of Communication Systems, , TMH, 2007 3. K.Sam Shanmugham, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, John Wiley & Sons 4. Pierre Lafrance ,Fundamental Concepts in Communication, Prentice Hall India. 5. Sheldon.M.Ross, “Introduction to Probability Models”, Academic Press, 7th edition. 6. Sklar: Digital Communication, 2E, Pearson Education. 7. T L Singal, Digital Communication, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd, 2015

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Overview of Random variables and Random process: Random variables–continuous and Discrete, random process- Stationarity, Autocorrelation and power spectral density, 3 Transmission of Random Process through LTI systems, PSD, AWGN Pulse Code Modulation (PCM): Pulse Modulation, Sampling 15 I process, Performance comparison of various sampling 3 techniques Aliasing, Reconstruction, PAM, Quantization, Noise in PCM system Modifications of PCM: Delta modulation, DPCM, ADPCM, ADM, Performance comparison of various pulse modulation 4 schemes, Line codes, PSD of various Line codes

Transmission over baseband channel: Matched filter, Inter Symbol Interference (ISI), Nyquist Criteria for zero ISI, Ideal 4 solution, Raised cosine spectrum, Eye Pattern II 15 Correlative Level Coding - Duobinary coding, precoding, Modified duobinary coding, Generalized Partial response 3 signalling. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Signal Space Analysis: Geometric representation of signals, 3 Gram Schmidt orthogonization procedure. III Transmission Over AWGN Channel: Conversion of the 15 continuous AWGN channel into a vector channel, Likelihood 4 function, Maximum Likelihood Decoding, Correlation Receiver Digital Modulation Schemes: Pass band transmission model, Coherent Modulation Schemes- BPSK, QPSK, BFSK. Non- 4 Coherent orthogonal modulation schemes, Differential Phase IV 15 Shift Keying (DPSK) Detection of Binary modulation schemes in the presence of 5 noise, BER for BPSK, QPSK, BFSK SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Pseudo–noise sequences: Properties of PN sequences. V Generation of PN Sequences, generator polynomials, Maximal 3 20 length codes and Gold Codes.

Importance of synchronization: Carrier, frame and 2 symbol/chip synchronization techniques. Spread spectrum communication: Direct sequence spread spectrum with coherent binary phase shift keying, Processing gain, Probability of error, Anti-jam Characteristics, Frequency 4 Hop spread spectrum with MFSK, Slow and Fast frequency hopping. Multipath channels: classification, Coherence time, Coherence bandwidth, Statistical characterization of multi path 3 channels, Binary signalling over a Rayleigh fading channel. VI Diversity techniques: Diversity in time, frequency and space. 2 20 Multiple Access Techniques: TDMA, FDMA, CDMA and SDMA – RAKE receiver, Introduction to Multicarrier 5 communication- OFDM END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End Semester Exam)

Maximum Marks : 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 30% for theory and 70% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC304 VLSI 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC203 Solid State Devices, EC204 Analog Integrated Circuit. Course objectives:  To give the knowledge about IC Fabrication Techniques  To impart the skill of analysis and design of MOSFET and CMOS logic circuits. Syllabus: IC Fabrication Technology, CMOS IC Fabrication Sequence, CMOS inverters, Design rules, Static CMOS Design, Dynamic CMOS circuits, Pass transistor, Read Only Memory, Random Access Memory, Sense amplifiers, Adders, multipliers, Testing of VLSI circuits. Expected outcome: The students will be able to design and analyse various MOSFET and CMOS logic circuits. Text Books: 1. John P Uyemura, Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems, Wiley India, 2006 2. S.M. SZE, VLSI Technology, 2/e, Indian Edition, McGraw-Hill,2003 References: 1. Jan M.Rabaey, Digital Integrated Circuits- A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall, Second Edition, 2005. 2. Neil H.E. Weste, Kamran Eshraghian, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design- A Systems Perspective, Second Edition. Pearson Publication, 2005 3. Razavi - Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits,1e, McGraw Hill Education India Education, New Delhi, 2003. 4. Sung –Mo Kang & Yusuf Leblebici, CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits- Analysis & Design, McGraw-Hill, Third Ed., 2003. 5. Yuan Taur & Ning, Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices, Cambridge University Press, 2008 Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Material Preparation- Purification, Crystal growth (CZ and FZ process), wafer preparation 4 Thermal Oxidation- Growth mechanisms, Dry and Wet

oxidation, Deal Grove model. 15 I Diffusion- Fick‘s Laws, Diffusion with constant surface concentration and from a constant source, diffusion techniques. 3 Ion implantation-Technique, Range Theory, annealing. Epitaxy : Vapour phase epitaxy and molecular beam epitaxy Lithography- Photo lithographic sequence, Electron Beam 4 Lithography, Etching and metal deposition II 15 Methods of isolation Circuit component fabrication: transistor, diodes, resistors, capacitors, N-well CMOS IC 3 Fabrication Sequence FIRST INTERNAL EXAM CMOS inverters- DC characteristics, switching characteristics, III 4 15 power dissipation

Layout Design rules, Stick Diagram and layout of CMOS 4 Inverter, two input NAND and NOR gates MOSFET Logic Design -Pass transistor logic, IV Complementary pass transistor logic and transmission gate 6 15 logic , realization of functions SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Read Only Memory-4x4 MOS ROM Cell Arrays(OR,NOR,NAND) Random Access Memory –SRAM-Six transistor CMOS 4 V SRAM cell, DRAM –Three transistor and One transistor 20 Dynamic Memory Cell Sense amplifiers –Differential Voltage Sensing Amplifiers 3 Introduction to PLDs and FPGAs, Design of PLAs. Adders- Static adder, Carry-By pass adder, Linear Carry- VI Select adder, Square- root carry- select adder 4 20 Multipliers-Array multiplier END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End Semester Exam)

Maximum Marks : 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 70% for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC306 Antenna & Wave Propagation 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC303 Applied Electromagnetic Theory Course objectives:  To learn the basic working of antennas.  To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.  To understand various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.  To understand the propagation of radio waves in the atmosphere. Syllabus: Antenna and antenna parameters, Duality of antennas, Derivation of electromagnetic fields and directivity of short dipole and half wave dipole, Measurement of antenna parameters. Antenna arrays and design of Endfire, broadside, binomial and Dolphchebyshev arrays, Principles of practical antennas. Traveling wave antennas, principle and applications of V and rhombic antennas Principles of Horn, Parabolic dish antenna and Cassegrain antenna, Log periodic antenna array and Helical antenna. Design of rectangular Patch antennas. Principle of smart antenna, Radio wave propagation, Different modes, effect of earth’s magnetic field. Fading and diversity techniques. Expected outcome: The student will be able to know: i. The basic working of antennas. ii. Various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas iii. Various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements. iv. The propagation of radio waves in the atmosphere. Text Books: 1. Balanis, Antenna Theory and Design, 3/e, Wiley Publications. 2. John D. Krauss, Antennas for all Applications, 3/e, TMH. References: 1. Collin R.E, Antennas & Radio Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill. 1985. 2. Jordan E.C. & K. G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves & Radiating Systems, 2/e, PHI. 3. Raju G.S.N., Antenna and Wave Propagation, Pearson, 2013. 4. Sisir K.Das & Annapurna Das, Antenna and Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill,2012 5. Terman, Electronics & Radio Engineering, 4/e, McGraw Hill. 6. Thomas A. Milligan, Modern Antenna Design, IEEE PRESS, 2/e, Wiley Inter science.

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Basic antenna parameters - gain, directivity, beam solid angle, beam width and effective aperture calculations. Effective height

- wave polarization - antenna temperature - radiation resistance 7 15 I - radiation efficiency - antenna field zones - principles of reciprocity. Duality of antennas. Concept of retarded potential. Field, directivity and radiation II resistance of a short dipole and half wave dipole. Measurement 7 15 of radiation pattern, gain, directivity and impedance of antenna FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Arrays of point sources - field of two isotropic point sources - principle of pattern multiplication - linear arrays of ‘n’ isotropic 4 III point sources. Grating lobes. 15 Design of Broadside, Endfire & Binomial arrays. Design of 4 DolphChebyshev arrays. Basic principle of beam steering. Travelling wave antennas. Principle and applications of V and rhombic antennas. IV 6 15 Principles of Horn, Parabolic dish antenna, Cassegrain antenna (expression for E, H andGain without derivation). SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Principle of Log periodic antenna array and Helical antenna. 3 Antennas for mobile base station and handsets. V 20 Design of rectangular Patch antennas. Principle of smart 3 antenna. Radio wave propagation , Modes , structure of atmosphere, sky wave propagation , effect of earth‘s magnetic field, Ionospheric 4 abnormalities and absorption, space wave propagation, LOS VI distance 20 Field strength of space wave, duct propagation, VHF and UHF Mobile radio propagation, tropospheric scatter propagation, 4 fading and diversity techniques. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End semester exam)

Max. Marks : 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC308 Embedded Systems 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC206 Computer Organization, EC305 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers Course objectives:  To have a thorough understanding of the basic structure and design of an Embedded System  To study the different ways of communicating with I/O devices and standard I/O interfaces.  To study the basics of RTOS for Embedded systems.  To study the programming concepts of Embedded Systems  To study the architecture of System-on-Chip and some design examples. Syllabus: Introduction to Embedded Systems, Embedded system design process, Serial and parallel communication standards and devices, Memory devices and device drivers, Programming concepts of embedded programming - Embedded C++ and embedded java, Real Time Operating Systems Micro C/OS-II. Expected outcome: The students will be able to: i. Understand the basics of an embedded system ii. Develop program for an embedded system. iii. Design, implement and test an embedded system. Text Books: 1. David E. Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint 2000. 2. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design, Morgan Kaufman Publishers - Elsevier 3ed, 2008 References: 1. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, Embedded Systems Design – A Unified Hardware / Software Introduction, John Wiley, 2002 2. Iyer - Embedded Real time Systems, 1e, McGraw Hill Education New Delhi, 2003 3. K.V. Shibu, Introduction to Embedded Systems, 2e, McGraw Hill Education India, 2016. 3. Lyla B. Das, Embedded Systems: An Integrated Approach, 1/e , Lyla B. Das, Embedded Systems, 2012 4. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, TMH, 2003 5. Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Newnes – Elsevier 2ed, 2002 6. Tammy Noergaard, Embedded Systems Architecture, A Comprehensive Guide for Engineers and Programmers, Newnes – Elsevier 2ed, 2012

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Introduction to Embedded Systems– Components of embedded system hardware–Software embedded into the system – 4 Embedded Processors - CPU architecture of ARM processor 15 I (ARM9) – CPU Bus Organization and Protocol. Design and Development life cycle model - Embedded system 3 design process – Challenges in Embedded system design Serial Communication Standards and Devices - UART, HDLC, 3 SCI and SPI. II 15 Serial Bus Protocols - I2C Bus, CAN Bus and USB Bus. 3 Parallel communication standards ISA, PCI and PCI-X Bus. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Memory devices and systems - memory map – DMA - I/O III Devices – Interrupts - ISR – Device drivers for handling ISR – 6 15 Memory Device Drivers – Device Drivers for on-board bus. Programming concepts of Embedded programming – Features of Embedded C++ and Embedded Java (basics only). Software 6 15 IV Implementation, Testing, Validation and debugging, system-on- chip. Design Examples: Mobile phones, ATM machine, Set top box 1 0 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Inter Process Communication and Synchronization -Process, tasks and threads –Shared data– Inter process communication - V 8 20 Signals – Semaphore – Message Queues – Mailboxes – Pipes – Sockets – Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs). Real time operating systems - Services- Goals – Structures - Kernel - Process Management – Memory Management – Device Management – File System Organization. VI Micro C/OS-II RTOS - System Level Functions – Task Service 8 20 Functions – Memory Allocation Related Functions – Semaphore Related Functions. Study of other popular Real Time Operating Systems. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End semester exam)

Maximum Marks : 100 Time : 3 hours

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC312 Object Oriented Programming 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course objectives:  To introduce the Object Oriented Programming paradigm using C++ and Java as the languages.  To learn simple Android application development from the fundamentals. Syllabus: Object Oriented Programming and basics of C++, Advanced features of C++ programming such as exception handling and templates. Object oriented features of Java and their implementation. Advanced features of Java including packages, multithreading and error management. Introduction to Android application development with a case study. Expected outcome: Tthe students will have: i. A thorough understanding of the features of OOP like class construction, polymorphism and inheritance of C++ and Java. ii. An understanding of advanced features of C++ such as templates, abstract classes and virtual functions. iii. Knowledge of advanced features of Java such as multithreading, packages and error management. iv. Skills in designing android application development. v. Skills in debugging, deploying and testing mobile applications. Text Books: 1. E. Balagurusamy, Object Oriented Programming with C++ and JAVA, McGrawHill, 2015 2. Hardy, Brian, and Bill Phillips, Android Programming: The Big Nerd Ranch Guide. Addison-Wesley Professional, 2013. 3. Yashwant P. Kanetkar, Let us C++, 2/e, BPB Publications, 2003 References: 1. Deitel, Harvey M., and Paul J. Deitel., Java how to program.,7th International edition.” (2007): 390-420. 2. G. Booch, R. A. Maksimchuk, M. W. Engel, and B J. Young, Object-oriented Analysis and Design with Applications, Addison-Wesley, 3rd Edition, 2007. 3. Horstmann, Cay S., and Gary Cornell., Core Java 2: Volume I, Fundamentals, Pearson Education, 2002. 4. Samanta, Debasis, Object-Oriented programming with C++ and Java, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2006. 5. Stroustrup, Bjarne. The C++ programming language, Pearson Education India, 1986. 6. www.tutorialspoint.com/android/android_tutorial.pdf

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Concepts of OOP – Introduction to OOP, Procedural Vs. Object Oriented Programming, Principles of OOP, Benefits and 2

applications of OOP. 15 I Beginning with C++: Overview and Structure of C++ Program, 4 Classes and Objects, Constructors and Destructors. Operator Overloading and Inheritance – Overloading Unary Operators, Overloading Binary Operators, Overloading Binary 4 Operators using Friends, Manipulation of Strings Using Operators. II 15 Inheritance – Multilevel Inheritance, Multiple Inheritance, Hierarchical Inheritance, Hybrid Inheritance. Virtual Base 5 Classes, Abstract Classes, Constructors in Derived Classes, Member Classes: Nesting of Classes FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Virtual Functions and Polymorphism – Pointers to objects, this III pointer, Pointers to derived classes, Virtual functions, Virtual 6 15 Constructors and Destructors. Programming with JAVA – Overview of Java Language, Classes Objects and Methods, Method Overloading and IV Inheritance, Overriding Methods, Final Variables and Methods. 8 15 Interfaces, Packages, Multithreaded programming, Managing Errors and Exceptions. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Introduction to Android : Setting up Development Environment, Basic Building blocks – Activities, Services, V Broadcast Receivers & Content providers, UI Components – 6 20 Views & notifications, Components for communication – Intents & Intent Filters, Application Structure-Android Manifest.xml, uses-permission & uses-sdk, Layouts & Drawable Resources, First sample Application, Emulator-Android Virtual Device, Basic UI VI 7 20 design, Styles & Themes, Content Providers-SQLite Programming, Case study –Develop an App to demonstrate database usage. END SEMESTER EXAM Assignment: 1. Assignment for implementing virtual base class in C++ related to some application. 2. Assignment for implementing a simple interactive applet in Java (eg: calculator) 3. A group assignment on simple android mobile app (eg: managing students’ details and rank calculation of a class).

Question Paper Pattern ( End semester exam)

Maximum marks : 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 60 % for theory and 40% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF COURSE NAME L-T-P-C CODE INTRODUCTION Communication Engineering Lab EC332 0-0-3-1 2016 (Analog & Digital) Prerequisite: EC204 Analog Integrated Circuit, EC208 Analog Communication Engineering. Course objectives:  To provide experience on design, testing and analysis of few electronic circuits used in communication engineering. List of Experiments: Cycle I (Six experiments are mandatory) 1. AM generation using discrete components. 2. AM using multiplier IC AD534 or AD633. 3. AM detection using envelope detector. 4. IF tuned amplifier. 5. FM using 555 IC. 6. FM generation and demodulation using PLL. 7. Frequency multiplier using PLL 8. Pre-emphasis and de-emphasis circuits 9. Analog signal sampling & Reconstruction Cycle II (Six mandatory) 10. Generation of Pseudo Noise Binary sequence using Shift registers 11. Time Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing 12. Generation & Detection of DM/SIGMA DELTA/ ADM 13. Generation & Detection of PAM/PWM/PPM 14. Generation & Detection of BPSK/DPSK/DEPSK 15. Generation & Detection of PCM 16. 16 QPSK Modulation and Demodulation

Expected outcome: The students will be able to understand the basic concepts of circuits used in communication systems.

COURSE YEAR OF COURSE NAME L-T-P-C CODE INTRODUCTION EC334 Microcontroller Lab 0-0-3-1 2016 Prerequisite: EC305 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers Course objectives: 1. To understand Assembly Language/embedded C programming of Microcontroller. 2. To interface simple peripheral devices to a Microcontroller. 3. To equip student groups to design and implement simple embedded systems. List of Experiments: PART –A (At least 6 experiments are mandatory) Assembly Language Programming experiments using 8051 Trainer kit.

1. Data transfer/exchange between specified memory locations. 2. Largest/smallest from a series. 3. Sorting (Ascending/Descending) of data. 4. Addition / subtraction / multiplication / division of 8/16 bit data. 5. Sum of a series of 8 bit data. 6. Multiplication by shift and add method. 7. Square / cube / square root of 8 bit data. 8. Matrix addition. 9. LCM and HCF of two 8 bit numbers. 10. Code conversion – Hex to Decimal/ASCII to Decimal and vice versa.

PART –B (At least 4 experiments are mandatory) Interfacing experiments using 8051 Trainer kit and interfacing modules. 1. Time delay generation and relay interface. 2. Display (LED/Seven segments/LCD) and keyboard interface. 3. ADC interface. 4. DAC interface with wave form generation. 5. Stepper motor and DC motor interface. 6. Realization of Boolean expression through port. 7. Elevator interfacing.

PART -C(At least 2 experiments are mandatory) Programming / interfacing experiments with IDE for 8051/PIC/MSP/Arduino/Raspberry Pi based interfacing boards/sensor modules (Direct downloading of the pre-written ALP/‘C’/Python programs can be used). 1. Relay control 2. Distance measurement. 3. Temperature measurement / Digital Thermometer 4. Txr-Rxr interface. 5. Alphanumeric LCD display interface. 6. Simple project work including multiple interfaces.

Expected outcome: The students will be able to: 1. Program Micro controllers. 2. Interface various peripheral devices to Micro controller. 3. Function effectively as an individual and in a team to accomplish the given task.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION Modelling & Simulation of EC362 Communication Systems 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC301 Digital Signal Processing Course objectives:  To impart the basic concepts of modeling and simulation of Communication Systems  To study and evaluate the behavior and performance of the systems. Syllabus: Simulation and Modelling Methodology, Review of Random Processes, Random Number generation, Modelling of Transmitter and Receiver subsystems, Communication channels and models, Estimation of parameters in simulation, Estimation of performance measures from simulation, Analysis of simulation results. Expected outcome: The students will be able to apply modeling and computational techniques to problems in the communication field Text Books: 1. M.C. Jeruchim, Philip Balaban , K.Sam Shanmugam, Simulation of communication systems, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Press, New York, 2000 2. Raj Jain. The Art of Computer Systems Performance Analysis, John Wiley and Sons, 1991 (Chapter 25) Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Simulation and Modelling Methodology: Review of Random Processes, Univariate and multivariate models, Transformation 3 of random variables Bounds and approximations, Random process models, Markov 3 15 I and ARMA Sequences, Poisson Process, Gaussian Process Random Number Generation, Generation of Random sequences 1 Testing Random Number Generators 1 Modelling of Transmitter and Receiver subsystems: 1 Information sources II Channel coding, Radio frequency and optical modulation 2 15 Demodulation and detection, Filtering 1 Multiple Access : Issues in the simulation of Multiple Access 1 FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Communication channels and models: Fading and multipath 3 channels, The Almost Free space channel III Conducting and Guided wave media 1 15 Finite state channel models, Methodology for simulating 4 Communication systems operating over Fading Channels. Estimation of parameters in simulation: Quality of an estimator, IV 3 15 Estimating the average level of a waveform,

Estimating the average power of a waveform, Estimating the 2 power spectral density of a process Estimating Delay and Phase. 2 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Estimation of performance measures from simulation: 3 Estimation of SNR Estimating Performance measures for digital systems-The V 2 20 Monte Carlo Method Importance sampling method 2 Analysis of simulation results: Model Verification Techniques, 3 Model Validation Techniques VI Transient Removal, Terminating Simulations 2 20 Stopping Criteria, Variance Reduction 2 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( end semester exam)

Maximum marks : 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 30% for theory and 70% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC366 Real Time Operating Systems 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC206 Computer Organization Course objectives:  To understand the basics of operating systems tasks and basic OS architectures and develop these to RTOS  To understand concepts of task scheduling  To understand problems and issues related with multitasking  To learn strategies to interface memory and I/O with RTOS kernels  To impart skills necessary to develop software for embedded computer systems using a real-time operating system. Syllabus: Introduction to OS and RTOS, Process management of OS/RTOS, Process Synchronization, Memory and I/O management, Applications of RTOS Expected outcome: At the end of the course the students will be familiar with operating systems. They will have an in depth knowledge about the real time operating systems and its applications. Text Books: 1. C.M. Krishna and G.Shin, Real Time Systems, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 1997. 2. Jean J Labrosse, Embedded Systems Building Blocks Complete and Ready-to-use Modules in C, CMP books, 2/e, 1999. References: 1. Jean J Labrosse , Micro C/OS-II, The Real Time Kernel, CMP Books, 2011 2. Sam Siewert, V, Real-Time Embedded Components and Systems: With Linux and RTOS (Engineering), 2015 3. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating Systems, 3/e, Pearson Edition, 2007. 4. VxWorks: Programmer's Guide 5.4, Windriver, 1999 5. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design, 2/e, Kindle Publishers, 2005. Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Operating system objectives and functions, Virtual Computers, Interaction of O. S. & hardware architecture, Evolution of 2 operating systems

Architecture of OS (Monolithic, Microkernel, Layered, Exo- 15 I 3 kernel and Hybrid kernel structures) Batch, Multi programming, Multitasking, Multiuser, parallel, 3 distributed & real –time O.S. Uniprocessor Scheduling: Types of scheduling 2 Scheduling algorithms: FCFS, SJF, Priority, Round Robin 3 II 15 UNIX Multi-level feedback queue scheduling, Thread 3 Scheduling, Multiprocessor Scheduling concept FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Concurrency: Principles of Concurrency, Mutual Exclusion H/W Support, software approaches, Semaphores and Mutex, 2 Message Passing techniques Classical Problems of Synchronization: Readers-Writers III Problem, Producer Consumer Problem, Dining Philosopher 3 15 problem. Deadlock: Principles of deadlock, Deadlock Prevention, Deadlock Avoidance, Deadlock Detection, An Integrated 3 Deadlock Strategies. Memory Management requirements, Memory partitioning: 3 Fixed, dynamic, partitioning Memory allocation Strategies (First Fit, Best Fit, Worst Fit, IV Next Fit), Fragmentation, Swapping, Segmentation, Paging, 2 15 Virtual Memory, Demand paging Page Replacement Policies (FIFO, LRU, Optimal, clock), 3 Thrashing, Working Set Model SECOND INTERNAL EXAM I/O Management and Disk Scheduling: I/O Devices, 2 Organization of I/O functions V 20 Operating System Design issues, I/O Buffering, Disk 3 Scheduling (FCFS, SCAN, C-SCAN, SSTF), Disk Caches Comparison and study of RTOS: Vxworks and µCOS 3 VI 20 Case studies: RTOS for Control Systems. 3 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern (End semester exam)

Maximum marks: 100 Time: 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50 % for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC368 Robotics 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC 307 Power Electronics & Instrumentation, EC 305 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers Course objectives:  To impart knowledge about the engineering aspects of Robots and their applications. Syllabus: Robots: Introduction, anatomy, Robot specifications, Robot characteristics, Areas of application, classification of robots. Robotic arm, Sensors, Encoders, Tachometers, Robotic drive systems and actuators, Specification, principle of operation and areas of application of: DC motor, Stepper motor, Servo motor and brushless DC motor, Microprocessor control of electric motors, speed control using PWM and direction control using H- Bridge, Robotic vision systems, Image processing techniques, kinematics, inverse kinematics, Velocity kinematics, Application of velocity kinematics for all serial manipulators, Digital and Programmable Logic (PLC) controllers. Robot Programming, Industrial applications of Robots, Mobile robots, Micro robots, Recent developments in Robotics. Expected outcome: i. The students will have a thorough understanding about Robots and their applications ii. The students will be able to analyse and design robotic structures. Text Books: 1. Mikell and Groover, Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications, McGraw Hill, 2/e, 2012 2. Saeed B. Niku Introduction to Robotics. Analysis and control, applications- Wiley student edition, 2010 3. Spong and Vidyasagar, Robot Dynamics and Control, John Wiley & Sons, 1990. References: 1. Ashitava Ghosal, Robotics, Fundamental concepts and analysis, OXFORD University Press, 2006 2. Fu, K.S,Gonzalez,R.C,Lee, C.S.G.,Robotics, Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence, McGraw-Hill, 1987. 3. John. J.Craig, Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, PHI, 2005. 4. Klafter, R.D., Chmielewski, T.A, Negin, M, Robotic Engineering An Integrated Approach, PHI, 2007 5. Robert J. Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics: Analysis & Control, Pearson Education, 2000 6. S. R. Deb, Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994.

Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Introduction – Definition and origin of robotics, Robot Anatomy, Robot specifications, Robot characteristics – accuracy, precision, and repeatability, Areas of application,

classification of robots. 7 15 I Robotic arm – Components and structure, Types of joints and workspace, Common kinematic arrangements, Wrists, End effectors. Sensors: Types and applications of sensors in Robotics, position and displacement sensors, Strain gauge based force- torque sensors, Tachometers. Robotic drive systems and actuators: Hydraulic, Pneumatic and II 6 15 Electric drives. Specification, principle of operation and areas of application of: Stepper motor, Servo motor and brushless DC motor. Microprocessor control of electric motors, speed control using PWM and direction control using H- Bridge FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Robotic vision systems: Imaging, Sensing and Digitization, Image processing techniques, Areas of application in robotics. III Introduction to kinematics: Position and orientation of objects, 7 15 Rotation, Euler angles, Rigid motion representation using Homogenous Transformation matrix. Forward kinematics: Link coordinates, Denavit-Hartenberg Representation, Application of DH convention to different serial kinematic arrangements fitted with spherical wrist. IV 9 15 Inverse kinematics – General properties of solutions, Kinematic Decoupling, Inverse kinematic solutions for all basic types of three-link robotic arms fitted with a spherical wrist. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Velocity kinematics – Derivation of the Jacobian, Application of velocity kinematics for serial manipulators, importance of Singularities. V Manipulator Dynamics. Introduction to Legrangian mechanics 6 20 and Dynamic equation for 2 DOF robots, Introduction to position control and force control of robotic manipulators, Robot actuation and control using PID controllers. Robot Programming – Programming methods, Robot language classification, Robot language structure, elements and its functions. Motion, End-effecter and Sensor commands in VAL VI 7 20 programming language. Simple programs. Industrial applications of Robots in material handling and assembly. Mobile robots, Recent developments in Robotics. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern (End Semester Examk Pattern)

Max. Marks : 100 Time : 3 Hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 70 % for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC370 Digital Image Processing 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC301 Digital Signal Processing Course objectives: 1. To study the image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image transform 2. To study the image processing techniques like image enhancement, image reconstruction, image compression, image segmentation and image representation. Syllabus: Digital image fundamentals, 2D Transforms, Image enhancement, Image restoration, Image segmentation, Image compression Expected outcome: The students will be able to: 1. Distinguish / Analyse the various concepts and mathematical transforms necessary for image processing 2. Differentiate and interpret the various image enhancement techniques 3. Illustrate image segmentation algorithm 4. Analyse basic image compression techniques Text Books: 1. Gonzalez Rafel C, Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education, 2009 2. S Jayaraman, S Esakkirajan, T Veerakumar, Digital image processing ,Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2015 References: 1. Jain Anil K , Fundamentals of digital image processing: , PHI,1988 2. Kenneth R Castleman , Digital image processing:, Pearson Education,2/e,2003 3. Pratt William K , Digital Image Processing: , John Wiley,4/e,2007 Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Digital Image Fundamentals: Image representation, basic relationship between pixels, elements of DIP system, elements 3 of visual perception-simple image formation model

Vidicon and Digital Camera working principles 1 15 I Brightness, contrast, hue, saturation, mach band effect, 1 Colour image fundamentals-RGB, CMY, HIS models 1 2D sampling, quantization. 1 Review of matrix theory: row and column ordering- Toeplitz, 2 Circulant and block matrix, 2D Image transforms : DFT, its properties, Walsh transform, II 3 15 Hadamard transform, Haar transform, DCT, KL transform and Singular Value Decomposition. 3 FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Image Enhancement: Spatial domain methods: point processing- intensity transformations, histogram processing, 2 image subtraction, image averaging III 15 Spatial filtering- smoothing filters, sharpening filters 1 Frequency domain methods: low pass filtering, high pass 2 filtering, homomorphic filter. Image Restoration: Degradation model, Unconstraint 2 restoration- Lagrange multiplier and constraint restoration Inverse filtering- removal of blur caused by uniform linear IV 2 15 motion, Weiner filtering, Geometric transformations-spatial transformations 2 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Image segmentation: Classification of Image segmentation 2 techniques, region approach, clustering techniques V Segmentation based on thresholding, edge based segmentation 2 20 Classification of edges, edge detection, Hough transform, active 3 contour Image Compression: Need for compression, redundancy, classification of image compression schemes, Huffman coding, 5 arithmetic coding, dictionary based compression, transform VI 20 based compression, Image compression standards- JPEG& MPEG, vector 3 quantization, wavelet based image compression. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End semester exam)

Maximum Marks : 100 Time : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50 % for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC401 INFORMATION THEORY & CODING 4-0-0-4 2016 Prerequisite: EC302 Digital Communication Course objectives:  To introduce the concept of information  To understand the limits of error free representation of information signals and the transmission of such signals over a noisy channel  To design and analyze data compression techniques with varying efficiencies as per requirements  To understand the concept of various theorems proposed by Shannon for efficient data compression and reliable transmission  To give idea on different coding techniques for reliable data transmission  To design an optimum decoder for various coding schemes used. Syllabus: Concept of amount of information, Entropy, Source coding, Channel Capacity, Shannon’s Limit, Rate Distortion Theory, Channel Coding, Linear Block Codes, Cyclic codes, Cryptography, Convolutional Codes, Viterbi Algorithm Expected outcome: The students will be able to i. Apply the knowledge of Shannon’s source coding theorem and Channel coding theorem for designing an efficient and error free communication link. ii. Analyze various coding schemes iii. Design an optimum decoder for various coding schemes used. Text Books: 1. P S Sathya Narayana, Concepts of Information Theory & Coding, Dynaram Publications, 2005 2. Simon Haykin: Digital Communication Systems, Wiley India, 2013. References: 1. Bose, Information theory coding and cryptography, 3/e McGraw Hill Education India , 2016 2. D.E.R. Denning, Cryptography and Data Security, Addison Wesley, 1983. 3. J S Chitode, Information Theory and Coding, Technical Publications, Pune, 2009 4. Kelbert & Suhov, Information theory and coding by examples, Cambridge University Press, 2013 5. Shu Lin & Daniel J. Costello. Jr., Error Control Coding : Fundamentals and Applications, 2/e, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ,2004 Course Plan End Sem. Module Course contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction to Information Theory. Concept of information, units, entropy, marginal, conditional and joint entropies, relation among I entropies, mutual information, information rate. 9 15% Source coding: Instantaneous codes, construction of instantaneous codes, Kraft‘s inequality, coding efficiency and redundancy Noiseless coding theorem , construction of basic source codes, II Shannon – Fano Algorithm, Huffman coding, 9 15% Channel capacity – redundancy and efficiency of a channel, binary

symmetric channel (BSC), Binary erasure channel (BEC) – capacity of band limited Gaussian channels FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Continuous Sources and Channels: Differential Entropy, Mutual information, III Waveform channels, Gaussian channels, Shannon – Hartley theorem, 9 15% bandwidth, SNR trade off, capacity of a channel of infinite bandwidth, Shannon‘s limit Introduction to rings, fields, and Galois fields. Codes for error detection and correction parity check coding linear block codes IV – – – 9 15% error detecting and correcting capabilities – generator and parity check matrices – Standard array and syndrome decoding SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Perfect codes, Hamming codes, encoding and decoding Cyclic codes, polynomial and matrix descriptions, generation of V 9 20% cyclic codes, decoding of cyclic codes BCH codes, Construction and decoding, Reed Solomon codes Convolutional Codes – encoding – time and frequency domain approaches, State Tree & Trellis diagrams transfer function and VI – 9 20% minimum free distance – Maximum likelihood decoding of convolutional codes – The Viterbi Algorithm. Sequential decoding. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC402 NANOELECTRONICS 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC203 Solid State Devices, EC304 VLSI Course objectives:  To introduce the concepts of nanoelectronics. Syllabus: Introduction to nanotechnology, Mesoscopic physics, trends in microelectronics and optoelectronics, characteristic lengths in mesoscopic systems, Quantum mechanical coherence, Schrodinger’s Equation, wave function, Low dimensional structures Quantum wells, Basic properties of two dimensional semiconductor nanostructures, Quantum wires and quantum dots, carbon nano tube, grapheme, Introduction to methods of fabrication of nano-layers, Introduction to characterization of nanostructures, Principle of operation of Scanning Tunnelling Microscope, X-Ray Diffraction analysis, MOSFET structures, Quantum wells, modulation doped quantum wells, multiple quantum wells, The concept of super lattices, Transport of charge in Nanostructures under Electric field, Transport of charge in magnetic field, Nanoelectonic devices, principle of NEMS Expected outcome:  The students will be able to understand basic concepts of nanoelectronic devices and nano technology. Text Books: 1. J.M. Martinez-Duart, R.J. Martin Palma, F. Agulle Rueda Nanotechnology for Microelectronics and optoelectronics, Elsevier, 2006 2. W.R. Fahrner, Nanotechnology and Nanoelctronics, Springer, 2005 References: 1. Chattopadhyay, Banerjee, Introduction to Nanoscience & Technology, PHI, 2012 2. George W. Hanson, Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics, Pearson Education, 2009. 3. K. Goser, P. Glosekotter, J. Dienstuhl, Nanoelectronics and nanosystems, Springer 2004. 4. Murty, Shankar, Text book of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, Universities Press, 2012. 5. Poole, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley, 2006. 6. Supriyo Dutta, Quantum Transport- Atom to transistor, Cambridge, 2013. Course Plan End Sem. Module Course contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction to nanotechnology, Impacts, Limitations of conventional microelectronics, Trends in microelectronics and 1 optoelectronics Mesoscopic physics, trends in microelectronics and optoelectronics, I characteristic lengths in mesoscopic systems, Quantum mechanical 2 15% coherence Classification of Nano structures, Low dimensional structures Quantum wells, wires and dots, Density of states and 1 dimensionality

Basic properties of two dimensional semiconductor nanostructures, square quantum wells of finite depth, parabolic and triangular 2 quantum wells, Quantum wires and quantum dots, carbon nano tube, graphene 1 Introduction to methods of fabrication of nano-layers, different 2 approaches, physical vapour deposition, chemical vapour deposition Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Ion Implantation, Formation of Silicon 2 II Dioxide- dry and wet oxidation methods. 15% Fabrication of nano particle- grinding with iron balls, laser ablation, reduction methods, sol gel, self assembly, precipitation of quantum 2 dots. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Introduction to characterization of nanostructures, tools used for of nano materials characterization, microscope-optical, electron, and 2 electron microscope. Principle of operation of Scanning Tunnelling Microscope, Atomic III 15% Force Microscope, Scanning Electron microscope, Specimen 2 interaction. Transmission Electron Microscope X-Ray Diffraction analysis, PL & UV Spectroscopy, Particle size 2 analyser. Two dimensional electronic system, two dimensional behaviour, 2 MOSFET structures, Heterojunctions Quantum wells, modulation doped quantum wells, multiple IV 2 15% quantum wells The concept of super lattices Kronig - Penney model of super lattice. 2

Transport of charge in Nanostructures under Electric field - parallel 2 transport, hot electrons, perpendicular transport. V Quantum transport in nanostructures, Coulomb blockade 2 20% Transport of charge in magnetic field - Effect of magnetic field on a crystal. Aharonov-Bohm effect, the Shubnikov-de Hass effect, the 3 quantum Hall effect. Nanoelectonic devices- MODFETS, heterojunction bipolar 1 transistors Resonant tunnel effect, RTD, RTT, Hot electron transistors 2 Coulomb blockade effect and single electron transistor, CNT 2 VI transistors 20% Heterostructure semiconductor laser 1 Quantum well laser, quantum dot LED, quantum dot laser 2 Quantum well optical modulator, quantum well sub band photo detectors, principle of NEMS. 2 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 70% for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION MICROWAVE & RADAR EC403 ENGINEERING 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC303 Applied Electromagnetic Theory, EC306 Antenna & Wave Propagation Course objectives:  To introduce the various microwave sources, their principle of operation and measurement of various parameters  To study the various microwave hybrid circuits and formulate their S matrices.  To understand the basic concepts, types, working of radar and introduce to radar transmitters and receivers. Syllabus: Microwaves: introduction, advantages, Cavity Resonators, Microwave vacuum type amplifiers and sources, Klystron Amplifiers, Reflex Klystron Oscillators, Magnetron oscillators, Travelling Wave Tube, Microwave measurements, Microwave hybrid circuits, Directional couplers, Solid state microwave devices, Gunn diodes, Radar, MTI Radar, Radar Transmitters, Radar receivers. Expected outcome: The students will be able to understand the basics of microwave engineering and radar systems. Text Books: 1. Merrill I. Skolnik, Introduction to Radar Systems, 3/e, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 2. Samuel Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, 3/e, Pearson Education, 2003. References: 1. Das, Microwave Engineering, 3/e, McGraw Hill Education India Education , 2014 2. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering,4/e, Wiley India, 2012. 3. Kulkarni M, Microwave and Radar Engineering, 4/e, Umesh Publications, 2012. 4. Rao, Microwave Engineering, 2/e, PHI, 2012. 5. Robert E. Collin, Foundation of Microwave Engineering, 2/e, Wiley India, 2012. Course Plan End Sem. Module Course contents Hours Exam Marks Microwaves: introduction, advantages, Cavity Resonators - Rectangular and Circular wave guide resonators- Derivation of 4 resonance frequency of Rectangular cavity. I 15% Microwave vacuum type amplifiers and sources: Klystron Amplifiers - Re-entrant cavities, Velocity modulation, 4 Bunching (including analysis), Output power and beam Reflex Klystron Oscillators: Derivation of Power output, 2 efficiency and admittance II Magnetron oscillators: Cylindrical magnetron, Cyclotron 15% 3 angular frequency, Power output and efficiency. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Travelling Wave Tube: Slow wave structures, Helix TWT, Amplification process, Derivation of convection current, axial 4 III electric field, wave modes and gain. 15% Microwave measurements: Measurement of impedance, 2 frequency and power

Microwave hybrid circuits: Scattering parameters, Waveguide tees- Magic tees, Hybrid rings, Corners, Bends, and Twists. 5 IV Formulation of S-matrix. 15% Directional couplers: Two hole directional couplers, S-matrix 4 of a directional coupler. Circulators and isolators. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Solid state microwave devices: Microwave bipolar transistors, Physical structures, Power frequency limitations 4 V equivalent circuit. Principle of Tunnel diodes and tunnel 20% diodeGunn oscillators. diodes: Different modes, Principle of operation Gunn Diode Oscillators. 2 Radar : The simple Radar equation. Pulse Radar, CW Radar, CW Radar with non zero IF, Equation for doppler frequency FM-CW Radar using sideband super heterodyne receiver. 5 MTI Radar-Delay line canceller, MTI Radar with power VI 20% amplifier & power oscillator, Non coherent MTI Radar, Pulse RadarDoppler Transmitters Radar : Radar Modulator-Block diagram, Radar receivers- noise figure, low noise front ends, Mixers, 3 Radar Displays END SEMESTER EXAM Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 60% for theory and 40% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE L-T-P- YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME C INTRODUCTION EC404 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC302 Digital Communication, EC403 Microwave & Radar Engineering Course objectives:  To impart the basic concepts of various communication system. Syllabus: Microwave Radio Communications, Diversity, protection switching arrangements, Digital TV, Satellite communication systems, Satellite sub systems, Evolution of mobile radio communications, Introduction to Modern Wireless Communication Systems, wireless networks, Over view of WIMAX technologies, Cellular concept, Wireless propagation mechanism, Introduction to Multiple Access GSM system architecture, Introduction to new data services Expected outcome:  The students will be able to understand the basics and technology of advanced communication system Text Books: 1. Dennis Roody, Satellite communication, 4/e, McGraw Hill, 2006. 2. Herve Benoit, Digital Television Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial, IPTV, Mobile TV in the DVB Framework, 3/e, Focal Press, Elsevier, 2008 3. Simon Haykin, Michael Mohar, Modern wireless communication, Pearson Education, 2008 4. Theodore S. Rappaport: Wireless communication principles and practice,2/e, Pearson Education, 1990 References: 1. Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communications, Pearson, 2008. 2. Mishra, Wireless communications and Networks, McGraw Hill, 2/e, 2013. 3. Nathan, Wirelesscommunications,PHI, 2012. 4. Singal, Wireless communications, Mc Graw Hill, 2010. 5. Tomasi, Advanced Electronic Communication Systems, 6/e, Pearson, 2015. 6. W.C.Y.Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunication, McGraw Hill, 2010. Course Plan End Sem. Module Course content (42hrs) Hours Exam Marks Microwave Radio Communications : Introduction, Advantages and Disadvantages, Analog vs digital microwave, frequency vs amplitude 1 modulation I Frequency modulated microwave radio system, FM microwave radio 15% 1 repeaters Diversity, protection switching arrangements, FM microwave radio 2 stations, microwave repeater station, line of sight path characteristics Digital TV: Digitized Video, Source coding of Digitized Video, Compression of Frames, DCT based (JPED), Compression of Moving 4 Pictures (MPEG). Basic blocks of MPEG2 and MPE4,Digital Video II 15% Broadcasting (DVB) Modulation: QAM (DVB-S, DVB-C), OFDM for Terrestrial Digital TV 4 (DVB –T). Reception of Digital TV Signals (Cable, Satellite and

terrestrial). Digital TV over IP, Digital terrestrial TV for mobile Display Technologies: basic working of Plasma, LCD and LED Displays 2 FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Satellite Communication systems, introduction, Kepler’s laws, orbits, orbital effects, orbital perturbations 2 Satellite sub systems, Antennas, Transponders, earth station technology, 2 III Link calculation, 15% Satellite systems- GEO systems, non-GEO communication systems, Satellite Applications- Global Positioning System, Very Small Aperture 3 Terminal system, Direct to Home Satellite Systems Evolution of mobile radio communications, paging systems, Cordless telephone systems, comparison of various wireless systems 2 Introduction to Modern Wireless Communication Systems, Second IV generation cellular networks, third generation wireless networks, fourth 1 15% generation wireless technologies Wireless in local loop, wireless local area networks, Blue tooth and

Personal Area networks, Over view of WIMAX Technologies, architecture, 2 spectrum allocation SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Cellular concept, hand off strategies, Interference and system capacity: Cell splitting, Sectoring, Repeaters, and Microcells. Cellular System Design Fundamentals: Frequency Reuse, channel 3 assignment strategies, handoff Strategies, Interference and system capacity, V tracking and grade off service, improving coverage and capacity 20% Wireless propagation mechanism, free space propagation model, ground reflection model, knife edge diffraction model, path loss prediction in hilly 3 terrain, introduction to fading and diversity techniques, Introduction to MIMO system Introduction to Multiple Access, FDMA, TDMA, Spread Spectrum multiple 2 Access, space division multiple access, CDMA, OFDM Wireless Networking, Difference between wireless and fixed telephone networks, development of wireless networks, fixed network transmission 2 hierarchy, traffic routing in wireless networks, wireless data services, Wireless standards, VI 20% GSM system architecture, radio link aspects, network aspects 1 Introduction to new data services like High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT) , Enhanced Data Rate for Global 5 Evolution (EDGE), Ultra wideband systems (UWB), Push To Talk (PTT) technology, Mobile IP END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 60% for theory and 40% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC405 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC203 Solid State Devices, EC205 Electronic Circuits Course objectives:  To introduce the concepts of light transmission through optical fibers, optical sources and detectors.  To compare the performance of various optical transmission schemes.  To impart the working of optical components and the principle of operation of optical amplifiers.  To give idea on WDM technique. Syllabus: General light wave system, advantages, classification of light wave systems, fibre types, linear and non linear effects in fibres, Fibre materials, fabrication of fibres, Optical sources, LEDs and LDs Optical detectors, Optical receivers, Digital transmission systems, Optical Amplifiers, WDM concept, Introduction to free space optics, Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Expected outcome: The students will be able to:- i. Know the working of optical source and detectors. ii. Compare the performance of various optical modulation schemes. iii. Apply the knowledge of optical amplifiers in the design of optical link. iv. Analyse the performance of optical amplifiers. v. Know the concept of WDM vi. Describe the principle of FSO and LiFi. Text Books: 1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, 5/e, McGraw Hill, 2013. 2. Mishra and Ugale, Fibre optic Communication, Wiley, 2013. References: 1. Chakrabarthi, Optical Fibre Communication, McGraw Hill, 2015. 2. Hebbar, Optical fibre communication, Elsevier, 2014 3. John M Senior- Optical communications, 3/e, Pearson, 2009. 4. Joseph C. Palais, Fibre Optic Communications, 5/e Pearson, 2013. 5. Keiser, Optical Communication Essentials (SIE), 1/e McGraw Hill Education New Delhi, 2008. Course Plan End Sem. Module Course contents Hours Exam Marks General light wave system, advantages, classification of light wave systems. Fibres: types and refractive index profiles, mode theory of fibres: modes in SI and GI fibres, linear and non linear I effects in fibres, dispersion, 8 15% Group Velocity Dispersion, modal, wave guide and Polarization, Modes, Dispersion, attenuation- absorption, bending and scattering losses. Fibre materials, fabrication of fibres, photonic crystal fibre, index II guiding PCF, photonic bandgap fibre, fibre cables. 7 15% Optical sources, LEDs and LDs, structures, characteristics,

modulators using LEDs and LDs. coupling with fibres, noise in Laser diodes, Amplified Spontaneous Emission noise, effects of Laser diode noise in fibre communications FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Optical detectors, types and characteristics, structure and working of PIN and AP, noise in detectors, comparison of performance. III 6 15% Optical receivers, Ideal photo receiver and quantum limit of detection. Digital transmission systems, design of IMDD links- power and rise time budgets, coherent Systems, sensitivity of a coherent receiver, comparison with IMDD systems. IV 8 15% Introduction to soliton transmission, soliton links using optical amplifiers, GH effect, soliton-soliton interaction, amplifier gain fluctuations, and design guide lines of soliton based links. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Optical Amplifiers ,basic concept, applications, types, doped fibre amplifiers, EDFA, basic theory, structure and working, V 6 20% Semiconductor laser amplifier, Raman amplifiers, TDFA, amplifier configurations, performance comparison. The WDM concept, WDM standards, WDM components, couplers, splitters, Add/ Drop multiplexers, gratings, tunable filters, system performance parameters. VI Introduction to optical networks. Introduction to free space optics, 7 20% LiFi technology and VLC. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) – fault detection, length and refractive index measurements. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION

EC407 COMPUTER COMMUNICATION 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course objectives:  To give the basic concepts of computer network and working of layers, protocols and interfaces in a computer network.  To introduce the fundamental techniques used in implementing secure network communications and give them an understanding of common threats and its defences. Syllabus: Introduction to computer communication, Transmission modes, Networks, Interconnection of Networks: Internetwork, Network models: OSI model, TCP/IP protocol suite. Physical Layer, Data Link Layer, Media access control, Ethernet(802.3), Logical link control, Logical addressing: IPV4, IPV6, Subnetting, CIDR, ICMP, IGMP, DHCP, Routing, Transport Layer, Congestion Control & Quality of Service, Application Layer, Introduction to system and network security, security attacks, Firewalls, Intrusion detection systems. Expected outcome: The students will have a thorough understanding of: i. Different types of network topologies and protocols. ii. The layers of the OSI model and TCP/IP with their functions. iii. The concept of subnetting and routing mechanisms. iv. The basic protocols of computer networks, and how they can be used to assist in network design and implementation. v. Security aspects in designing a trusted computer communication system. Text Books: 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Cryptography & Network Security , , IV Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008 2. J F Kurose and K W Ross, Computer Network A Top-down Approach Featuring the Internet, 3/e, Pearson Education, 2010 References: 1. Behrouz A Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, 4/e, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006. 2. Larry Peterson and Bruce S Davie: Computer Network- A System Approach, 4/e, Elsevier India, 2011. 3. S. Keshav, An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking, Pearson Education, 2005. 4. Achyut S.Godbole, Data Communication and Networking, 2e, McGraw Hill Education New Delhi, 2011

Course Plan Module Course content (42 hrs) End Sem. Hours Exam Marks I Introduction to computer communication: Transmission modes - serial and parallel transmission, asynchronous, synchronous, 2 15% simplex, half duplex, full duplex communication. Switching: circuit switching and packet switching

Networks: Network criteria, physical structures, network models, 2 categories of networks, Interconnection of Networks: Internetwork Network models: Layered tasks, OSI model, Layers in OSI model, 2 TCP/IP protocol suite. II Physical Layer: Guided and unguided transmission media 2 (Co-axial cable, UTP,STP, Fiber optic cable) Data Link Layer: Framing, Flow control (stop and wait , sliding 2 window flow control) 15% Error control, Error detection( check sum, CRC), Bit stuffing, 2 HDLC Media access control: Ethernet (802.3), CSMA/CD, Logical link 2 control, Wireless LAN (802.11), CSMA/CA FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Network Layer Logical addressing : IPv4 & IPV6 2 Address Resolution protocols (ARP, RARP) 2 15% Subnetting, Classless Routing(CIDR), ICMP, IGMP, DHCP 3 III Virtual LAN, Networking devices ( Hubs, Bridges & Switches) 1 IV Routing: Routing and Forwarding, Static routing and Dynamic 1 routing Routing Algorithms: Distance vector routing algorithm, Link state 2 15% routing (Dijkstra’s algorithm) Routing Protocols: Routing Information protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), 3 MPLS SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Transport Layer –UDP, TCP 1 Congestion Control & Quality of Service – Data traffic, 4 Congestion, Congestion Control, QoS and Flow Characteristics 20% Application Layer – DNS, Remote Logging (Telnet), SMTP, FTP, 3 WWW, HTTP, POP3, MIME, SNMP VI Introduction to information system security, common attacks 1 Security at Application Layer (E-MAIL, PGP and S/MIME). Security at Transport Layer (SSL and TLS). 3 20% Security at Network Layer (IPSec). Defence and counter measures: Firewalls and their types. DMZ, Limitations of firewalls, Intrusion Detection Systems -Host based, 2 Network based, and Hybrid IDSs END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 90% for theory and 10% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION

EC409 CONTROL SYSTEMS 3-0-0-3 2016

Prerequisite: EC202 Signals & Systems Course objectives:  To introduce the elements of control system and its modelling  To introduce methods for analyzing the time response, the frequency response and the stability of systems.  To design control systems with compensating techniques.  To introduce the state variable analysis method.  To introduce basic concepts of digital control systems. Syllabus: Control system, types and application, feedback system, mathematically modelling of control systems, block diagram representation, signal flow graph, Mason’s formula, test signals, time response analysis, frequency analysis, stability concepts and analysis, state variable analysis, Observability and controllability, digital control systems , state space analysis, Jury’s test Expected outcome: The Students will be able to i. Represent mathematically a systems and deriving their transfer function model. ii. Analyse the time response and frequency response of the systems for any input iii. Find the stability of system iv. Design a control system with suitable compensation techniques v. Analyse a digital control system. Text Books 1. Farid Golnaraghi, Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, 9/e, Wiley India. 2. Gopal, Control Systems, 4/e, McGraw Hill Education India Education , 2012. 3. Ogata K., Discrete-time Control Systems, 2/e, Pearson Education. References 1. Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Method, 4/e, McGraw Hill Education India 2012. 2. Norman S. Nise, Control System Engineering, 5/e, Wiley India 3. Ogata K., Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 4/e, Pearson Education, 2002. 4. Richard C Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, 9/e, Pearson Education, 2001. Course Plan

Module Course contents End Sem Hours Exam Marks

Basic Components of a Control System, Applications, Open-Loop Control Systems and Closed-Loop Control Systems, Examples of 1 I control system 15% Effects of Feedback on Overall Gain, Stability, External, 1 disturbance or Noise

Types of Feedback Control Systems, Linear versus Nonlinear 1 Control Systems, Time-Invariant versus Time-Varying Systems. Overview of solving differential equations using Laplace transforms 1 Mathematical modelling of control systems - Electrical Systems and 2 Mechanical systems. Block diagram representation and reduction methods 2 Signal flow graph and Mason’s rule formula. 2 Standard test signals. Time response specifications. 1 Time response of first and second order systems to unit step input, 2 II ramp inputs, time domain specifications 15% Steady state error and static error coefficients. 1 Dynamic error coefficient. 1 FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Stability of linear control systems: methods of determining stability, 2 Routh‘s Hurwitz Criterion. III Root Locus Technique: Introduction, properties and its construction. 2 15% Frequency domain analysis: Frequency domain specifications, 1 correlation between time and frequency responses. Nyquist stability criterion: fundamentals and analysis 2 Relative stability: gain margin and phase margin. Stability analysis 2 IV with Bode plot. Design of Control Systems: PI,PD and PID controllers 2 15% Design with phase-lead and phase-lag controllers (frequency domain 2 approach), Lag-lead SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

State variable analysis: state equation, state space representation of 2 Continuous Time systems V Transfer function from State Variable Representation, Solutions of 2 20% the state equations, state transition matrix Concepts of Controllability and Observability, Kalman’s Test, 2 Gilbert’s test Discrete Control systems fundamentals: Overview of Z transforms. 2 State space representation for Discrete time systems. Sampled Data control systems, Sampling Theorem, Sample & Hold, 2 VI Open loop & Closed loop sampled data systems. 20% State space analysis : Solving discrete time state space equations, pulse transfer function, Discretization of continuous time state space 3 equations Stability analysis of discrete time systems Jury‘s test 1 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 30% for theory and 70% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LAB EC431 (OPTICAL & MICROWAVE) 0-0-3-1 2016 Prerequisite: EC403 Microwave & Radar Engineering, EC405 Optical Communication Course objectives:  To provide practical experience in design, testing, and analysis of few electronic devices and circuits used for microwave and optical communication engineering. List of Experiments Microwave Experiments: (Minimum Six experiments are mandatory) 1. GUNN diode characteristics. 2. Reflex Klystron Mode Characteristics. 3. VSWR and Frequency measurement. 4. Verify the relation between Guide wave length, free space wave length and cut off wave length for rectangular wave guide. 5. Measurement of E-plane and H-plane characteristics. 6. Directional Coupler Characteristics. 7. Unknown load impedance measurement using smith chart and verification using transmission line equation. 8. Measurement of dielectric constant for given solid dielectric cell. 9. Antenna Pattern Measurement. 10. Study of Vector Network Analyser

Optical Experiments: (Minimum Six Experiments are mandatory) 1. Measurement of Numerical Aperture of a fiber, after preparing the fiber ends. 2. Study of losses in Optical fiber 3. Setting up of Fiber optic Digital link. 4. Preparation of a Splice joint and measurement of the splice loss. 5. Power vs Current (P-I) characteristics and measure slope efficiency of Laser Diode. 6. Voltage vs Current (V-I) characteristics of Laser Diode. 7. Power vs Current (P-I) characteristics and measure slope efficiency of LED. 8. Voltage vs Current (V-I) characteristics of LED. 9. Characteristics of Photodiode and measure the responsivity. 10. Characteristics of Avalanche Photo Diode (APD) and measure the responsivity. 11. Measurement of fiber characteristics, fiber damage and splice loss/connector loss by OTDR.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION MICROWAVE DEVICES AND EC461 CIRCUITS 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC403 Microwave & Radar Engineering Course objectives:  To study microwave semiconductor devices & applications.  To study microwave sources and amplifiers.  To analyse microwave networks.  To introduce microwave integrated circuits. Syllabus: Limitation of conventional solid state devices at Microwave, Gunn – effect diodes, Microwave generation and amplification, IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes, Bipolar transistors, MESFET, Microwave amplifiers and oscillators, Microwave Network Analysis, Signal flow graphs, Microwave filters, Filter design by image parameter method, Filter transformation and implementation, Introduction to MICs, Distributed and lumped elements of integrated circuits, Diode control devices Expected outcome: The Students will be able to understand with active & passive microwave devices & components used in microwave communication systems and analyse microwave networks. Text Books: 1. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, 4/e, Wiley India, 2012 2. Robert E. Collin, Foundation of Microwave Engineering, 2/e, Wiley India, 2012. 3. Samuel Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, 3/e, Pearson Education, 2003. References: 1. Bharathi Bhat and Shiban K. Koul: Stripline-like Transmission Lines for MIC, New Age International (P) Ltd, 1989. 2. I Kneppo, J. Fabian, et al., Microwave Integrated Circuits, BSP, India, 2006. 3. Leo Maloratsky, Passive RF and Microwave Integrated Circuits, Elsevier, 2006. Course Plan Module Course contents End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Introduction, Characteristic, features of microwaves, Limitation of 1 conventional solid state devices at Microwave. Gunn – effect diodes – Gunn effect, Ridley – Watkins-Hilsum I theory, Modes of operation, Limited space – Charge accumulation 2 15% (LSA) mode of Gunn diode. Microwave generation and amplification. Structure, Operation, 2 Power output and efficiency of IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes Bipolar transistors biasing, FET biasing, MESFET Structure, – – – 4 Operation. Microwave amplifiers and oscillators Amplifiers Gain and II – – 4 15% stability, Single stage transistor amplifier design. Oscillator design – One port negative resistance oscillators. 2 FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Microwave Network Analysis – Equivalent voltages and currents, Impedance and Admittance matrices, Scattering matrix, The 3 transmission matrix. III 15% Signal flow graphs. Impedance matching and tuning – Matching with lumped elements, Single stub tuning, Double stub tuning. 4 Quarter wave transformer, Theory of small reflections. Microwave filters – Periodic structures – Analysis of infinite periodic structures and terminated periodic structures, IV Filter design by image parameter method – Constant k, m-derived 7 15% and composite. Filter design by insertion loss method. Filter transformation and implementation. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Introduction to MICSs:-Technology of hybrid MICs, monolithic 4 MICs. Comparison of both MICs. V 20% Planar transmission lines such as stripline, microstrip line, and 3 slotline. Distributed and lumped elements of integrated circuits - capacitors, inductors, resistors, terminations, attenuators, resonators and 5 VI discontinuities. 20% Diode control devices – switches, attenuators, limiters. Diode phase 2 shifter. Circulators and isolators.

END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 70% for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION MIXED SIGNAL CIRCUIT EC462 DESIGN 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC 304 VLSI, EC308 Embedded Systems Course objectives:  To give the knowledge about various analog and digital CMOS circuits  To impart the skill in analysis and design of analog and digital CMOS circuits. Syllabus: CMOS Amplifiers: CS,CG,CD stages, Cascoded stages, Folded cascode Amplifier, MOS Current Mirror, MOSFET cascode current mirror, Differential Amplifiers, MOS telescopic cascode amplifier,CMOS OP AMPS, Design of classical Two Stage OP AMP, Comparator, Band gap References, Phase Locked Loop, Dynamic analog circuits, Data Converters, Switched Capacitor Circuits, Data Converters- Specifications, DAC, ADC Architecture Expected outcome: The students will be able to design and analyse various analog and digital CMOS circuits.

Text Books: 1. Phillip E. Allen, Douglas R. Holbery, CMOS Analog Circuit Design, Oxford, 2004. 2. Razavi B., Fundamentals of Microelectronics, Wiley student Edition2014. References: 1. Baker, Li, Boyce, CMOS: Circuits Design, Layout and Simulation, Prentice Hall India, 2000 2. Razavi B., Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, Mc Graw Hill, 2001.

Course Plan End Sem. Module Course contents Hours Exam Marks CMOS Amplifiers- Common Source with diode connected loads and current source load, CS stage with source degeneration, 4 CG stage and Source Follower (Only Voltage Gain and Output I 15% impedance of circuits ) Cascoded stages - Cascoded amplifier, Cascoded amplifier with 4 cascoded loads , Folded cascode Amplifier MOS Current Mirror- Basic circuit, PMOS and NMOS current mirrors 3 Current mirror copying circuits, MOSFET cascode current mirror circuits II 15% Differential Amplifiers-Differential Amplifier with MOS current source Load, with cascaded load and with current mirror 4 load, MOS telescopic cascode amplifier. (Only Voltage Gain and Output impedance of circuits) FIRST INTERNAL EXAM CMOS OP AMPS- Two Stage Operational Amplifiers - III 3 15% Frequency compensation of OPAMPS - miller compensation,

Design of classical Two Stage OP AMP

Comparator- Characterization of a comparator-static and dynamic, A Two stage open loop comparator (analysis not 3 required) Band gap References- Supply Independent Biasing, 5 Temperature independent references –band gap reference IV 15% Phase Locked Loop Simple PLL ,Basic PLL Topology, – 3 Charge Pump PLL, Basic Charge Pump PLL SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Dynamic analog circuits – charge injection and capacitive feed 3 V through in MOS switch, Reduction technique 20% Switched Capacitor Circuits- sample and hold circuits, 3 Switched Capacitor Integrator, Ladder filters Data Converters- DAC Specifications-DNL, INL, latency, SNR, Dynamic Range 4 ADC Specifications-Quantization error, Aliasing, SNR, Aperture VI error 20% DAC Architecture - Resistor String, Charge Scaling and Pipeline types. 3 ADC Architecture- Flash and Pipe line types END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 60% for theory and 40% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION SPEECH AND AUDIO SIGNAL EC463 PROCESSING 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC301 Digital Signal Processing Course objectives:  To familiarize the basic mechanism of speech production and the basic concepts of methods for speech analysis and parametric representation of speech.  To give an overall picture about various applications of speech processing  To impart ideas of Perception of Sound, Psycho-acoustic analysis, Spatial Audio Perception and rendering.  To introduce Audio Compression Schemes. Syllabus: Speech production, Time domain analysis, Frequency domain analysis, Cepstral analysis, LPC analysis, Speech coding, Speech recognition, Speech enhancement, Text to speech conversion. Signal Processing Models of Audio Perception, Psycho-acoustic analysis, Spatial Audio Perception and rendering, Audio compression methods, Parametric Coding of Multi- channel audio, Transform coding of digital audio, audio quality analysis. Expected outcome: The students will be able to i. Understand basic concepts of speech production, speech analysis, speech coding and parametric representation of speech and apply it in practical applications ii. Develop systems for various applications of speech processing iii. Learn Signal processing models of sound perception and application of perception models in audio signal processing. iv. Implement audio compression algorithms and standards. Text Books: 1. Douglas O'Shaughnessy, Speech Communications: Human & Machine, IEEE Press, Hardcover 2/e, 1999; ISBN: 0780334493. 2. Nelson Morgan and Ben Gold, Speech and Audio Signal Processing: Processing and Perception Speech and Music, July 1999, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0471351547 References: 1. Donald G. Childers, Speech Processing and Synthesis Toolboxes, John Wiley & Sons, September 1999; ISBN: 0471349593 2. Rabiner and Juang, Fundamentals of Speech Recognition, Prentice Hall, 1994. 3. Rabiner and Schafer, Digital Processing of Speech Signals, Prentice Hall, 1978. 4. Thomas F. Quatieri, Discrete-Time Speech Signal Processing: Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall; ISBN: 013242942X; 1/e Course Plan

End Sem. Module Course contents Hours Exam Marks Speech Production: Acoustic theory of speech production. Speech Analysis: Short-Time Speech Analysis, Time domain I analysis (Short time energy, short time zero crossing Rate, ACF). 5 15% Parametric representation of speech: AR Model, ARMA model. LPC Analysis (LPC model, Auto correlation method).

Frequency domain analysis (Filter Banks, STFT, Spectrogram), Cepstral Analysis, MFCC. II 8 15% Fundamentals of Speech recognition and Text-to-speech conversion FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Speech coding, speech enhancement, Speaker Verification, III 7 15% Language Identification Signal Processing Models of Audio Perception: Basic anatomy of hearing System. Auditory Filter Banks, Psycho-acoustic IV analysis: Critical Band Structure, Absolute Threshold of 6 15% Hearing, Simultaneous Masking, Temporal Masking, Quantization Noise Shaping, MPEG psycho-acoustic model. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Audio compression methods: Sampling rate and bandwidth requirement for digital audio, Redundancy removal and V perceptual irrelevancy removal, Transform coding of digital 7 20% audio: MPEG2-AAC coding standard, MDCT and its properties, Pre-echo and pre-echo suppression, Loss less coding methods. Spatial Audio Perception and rendering: The physical and psycho-acoustical basis of sound localization and space VI perception. Spatial audio standards. 6 20% Audio quality analysis: Objective analysis methods- PEAQ, Subjective analysis methods - MOS score, MUSHRA score END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC464 LOW POWER VLSI 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC 304 VLSI, EC308 Embedded Systems Course objectives:  To identify the power dissipation mechanisms in various MOS logic styles  To familiarize suitable techniques to reduce power dissipation Syllabus: Physics of Power dissipation in MOSFET devices, Sources of power dissipation in CMOS, Circuit techniques for leakage power reduction, Design and test of low voltage CMOS, Non clocked circuit design style, Adiabatic switching. Expected outcome: The students will be able to: i. Identify the sources of power dissipation in digital IC systems. ii. Understand the impact of power on system performance and reliability iii. Understand leakage sources and reduction techniques iv. Recognise advanced issues in VLSI systems, specific to the deep-submicron silicon technologies v. Identify the mechanisms of power dissipation in CMOS integrated circuits Text Books: 1. Gray Yeap, Practical low power digital VLSI design, Springer, 1998 2. Kaushik Roy, Sharat C Prasad, Low power CMOS VLSI circuit design, Wiley India, 2000 References: 1. Abdellatif Bellaouar, Mohamed I Elmasry, Low power digital VLSI design, Kluwer Academic, 1995 2. Anatha P Chandrakasan, Robert W Brodersen, Low power digital CMOS Design, Kluwer Academic, 1995 3. Christian Piguet, Low power CMOS circuits, Taylor & Francis, 2006 4. Kiat Seng Yeo, Kaushik Roy, Low voltage, low power VLSI sub systems, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004 Course Plan Module Course contents End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Physics of Power dissipation in MOSFET devices MIS structure, Need for low power circuit design 2 Threshold voltage, body effects, 1 I Short channel effects-surface scattering, punch through, velocity 15% 2 saturation, impact ionization Hot electron effects, drain induced barrier lowering, narrow width 2 effects Sources of power dissipation in CMOS-Switching power 2 dissipation, II Short circuit power dissipation, glitching power dissipation 2 15% Leakage power dissipation, Transistor leakage mechanisms of 3

deep submicron transistors FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Circuit techniques for leakage power reduction standby – 2 leakage control using transistor stacks multiple Vth techniques, Dynamic Vth techniques 2 III supply voltage scaling techniques, Deep submicron devices design 15% issues 2 Minimizing short channel effect 2 Design and test of low voltage CMOS – Circuit design style- clocked design style- Basic concept 2 IV 15% Domino logic (domino NAND gate) 1 Differential Current Switch Logic. 2 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Non clocked circuit design style-fully complementary logic 2 V NMOS and pseudo –NMOS logic 2 20% differential cascade voltage switch logic(DCVS), 2 pass transistor logic 2 Adiabatic switching – Adiabatic charging, adiabatic amplification 2 One stage and two stage adiabatic buffer 2 VI 20% fully adiabatic system 1 Adiabatic logic gates, pulsed power supplies 2 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 60% for theory and 40% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC465 MEMS 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite : NIL Course objectives:  To understand the operation of major classes of MEMS devices/systems  To give the fundamentals of standard micro fabrication techniques and processes  To understand the unique demands, environments and applications of MEMS devices Syllabus: MEMS and Microsystems applications, Review of Mechanical concepts, Actuation and Sensing techniques, Scaling laws in miniaturization, Materials for MEMS, Micro System fabrication techniques, Micro manufacturing, Micro system Packaging, Bonding techniques for MEMS, Overview of MEMS areas. Expected outcome: The student will be able to: i. Understand the working principles of micro sensors and actuators ii. Understand the application of scaling laws in the design of micro systems iii. Understand the typical materials used for fabrication of micro systems iv. Understand the principles of standard micro fabrication techniques v. Appreciate the challenges in the design and fabrication of Micro systems

Text Books: 1. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson 2012 2. Tai-Ran Hsu, MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture, TMH, 2002 References: 1. Chang C Y and Sze S. M., VLSI Technology, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2000 2. Julian W Gardner, Microsensors: Principles and Applications, John Wiley & Sons, 1994 3. Mark Madou, Fundamentals of Micro fabrication, CRC Press, New York, 1997 4. Stephen D. Senturia, Microsystem design, Springer (India), 2006. 5. Thomas B. Jones, Electromechanics and MEMS, Cambridge University Press, 2001

Course Plan Module Course content (42hrs) End Sem. Hours Exam Marks MEMS and Microsystems: Applications – Multidisciplinary nature of MEMS – principles and examples of Micro sensors and micro actuators – micro accelerometer –comb drives - Micro grippers – 4 micro motors, micro valves, micro pumps, Shape Memory Alloys. I Review of Mechanical concepts: Stress, Strain, Modulus of 15%

Elasticity, yield strength, ultimate strength – General stress strain relations – compliance matrix. Overview of commonly used 3 mechanical structures in MEMS - Beams, Cantilevers, Plates, Diaphragms – Typical applications

Flexural beams: Types of Beams, longitudinal strain under pure bending – Deflection of beams – Spring constant of cantilever – 3 Intrinsic stresses II 15% Actuation and Sensing techniques : Thermal sensors and actuators, Electrostatic sensors and actuators , Piezoelectric sensors and 4 actuators, magnetic actuators FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Scaling laws in miniaturization - scaling in geometry, scaling in rigid body dynamics, Trimmer force scaling vector, scaling in III 5 electrostatic and electromagnetic forces, scaling in electricity and fluidic dynamics, scaling in heat conducting and heat convection. 15% Materials for MEMS – Silicon – Silicon compounds – Silicon Nitride, Silicon Dioxide, Silicon carbide, Poly Silicon, GaAs , 4 Silicon Piezo resistors, IV Polymers in MEMS – SU-8, PMMA, PDMS, Langmuir – Blodgett Films, Micro System fabrication Photolithography – – 5 15% Ion implantation- Diffusion – Oxidation – Chemicalvapour deposition – Etching SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Overview of Micro manufacturing – Bulk micro manufacturing, Surface micro machining , LIGA process –Microstereo 6 V lithography 20% Micro system Packaging: general considerations in packaging 3 design – Levels of Micro system packaging Bonding techniques for MEMS : Surface bonding , Anodic bonding , Silicon - on - Insulator , wire bonding , Sealing – 3 VI Assembly of micro systems 20% Overview of MEMS areas : RF MEMS, BioMEMS, MOEMS, 2 NEMS END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 70% for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC466 CYBER SECURITY 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC407 Computer Communication Course objectives:  To familiarize various types of cyber-attacks and cyber-crimes.  To give an overview of the cyber laws  To study the defensive techniques against these attacks Syllabus: Vulnerability scanning, tools for scanning, Network defense tools, Firewalls and Intrusion Detection Systems, Virtual Private Networks, Scanning for web vulnerabilities tools, Cyber crimes and law, cyber crime investigation

Expected outcome: The students will be able to understand cyber-attacks, types of cybercrimes, cyber laws and also how to protect them self and ultimately the entire Internet community from such attacks Text Books: 1. Mike Shema , Anti-Hacker Tool Kit, Mc Graw Hill 2. Nina Godbole and Sunit Belpure, Cyber Security Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer Forensics and Legal Perspectives, Wiley References: 1. Achyut S.Godbole Data Communication and Networking,2e, McGraw –Hill Education New Delhi,2011 2. Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking (Global Edition) 5/e, McGraw Hill Education India, 2013. 3. Forouzan,TCP/IP Protocol Suite 4e, McGraw Hill Education India, 2010 Course Plan

Module Course contents End Sem. Hours Exam Marks I Introduction to Vulnerability Scanning Overview of vulnerability scanning, Open Port / Service 7 15% Identification, Banner / Version Check, Traffic Probe, Vulnerability Probe, Vulnerability Examples, OpenVAS, Metasploit. II Network Vulnerability Scanning Networks Vulnerability Scanning - Netcat, Socat, understanding Port and Services tools - Datapipe, Fpipe, WinRelay, Network 7 15% Reconnaissance – Nmap, THC-Amap and System tools, Network Sniffers and Injection tools – Tcpdump and Windump, Wireshark, Ettercap, Hping, Kismet FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Network Defense tools Firewalls and Packet Filters: Firewall Basics, Packet Filter Vs Firewall, How a Firewall Protects a Network, Packet Characteristic to III 8 15% Filter, Stateless Vs Stateful Firewalls, Network Address Translation (NAT) and Port Forwarding, the basic of Virtual Private Networks, Linux Firewall, Windows Firewall, Snort: Introduction Detection System

Web Application Tools Scanning for web vulnerabilities tools: Nikto, W3af, HTTP utilities - Curl, OpenSSL and Stunnel, Application Inspection tools – Zed 6 IV 15% Attack Proxy, Sqlmap. DVWA, Webgoat, Password Cracking and Brute-Force Tools – John the Ripper, L0htcrack, Pwdump, HTC- Hydra SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Introduction to Cyber Crime and law Cyber Crimes, Types of Cybercrime, Hacking, Attack vectors, Cyberspace and Criminal Behavior, Clarification of Terms, Traditional Problems Associated with Computer Crime, V Introduction to Incident Response, Digital Forensics, Computer 8 20% Language, Network Language, Realms of the Cyber world, A Brief History of the Internet, Recognizing and Defining Computer Crime, Contemporary Crimes, Computers as Targets, Contaminants and Destruction of Data, Indian IT ACT 2000.

Introduction to Cyber Crime Investigation Firewalls and Packet Filters, password Cracking, Keyloggers and 6 VI Spyware, Virus and Warms, Trojan and backdoors, Steganography, 20% DOS and DDOS attack, SQL injection, Buffer Overflow, Attack on wireless Networks END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION

EC467 PATTERN RECOGNITION 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course objectives:  To introduce the fundamental algorithms for pattern recognition  To instigate the various classification and clustering techniques Syllabus: Review of Probability Theory and Probability distributions, Introduction to Pattern Recognition and its applications, Bayesian decision theory, Bayesian estimation: Gaussian distribution, ML estimation, EM algorithm, Supervised and unsupervised learning, Feature selection, Linear Discriminant Functions, Non-parametric methods, Hidden Markov models for sequential data classification, Linear models for regression and classification, Clustering Expected outcome: The students will be able to i. Design and construct a pattern recognition system ii. Know the major approaches in statistical and syntactic pattern recognition. iii. Become aware of the theoretical issues involved in pattern recognition system design such as the curse of dimensionality. iv. Implement pattern recognition techniques Text Books 1. C M Bishop, Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Springer 2. R O Duda, P.E. Hart and D.G. Stork, Pattern Classification and scene analysis, John Wiley References 1. Morton Nadier and Eric Smith P., Pattern Recognition Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1993. 2. Robert J. Schalkoff, Pattern Recognition : Statistical, Structural and Neural Approaches, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 2007. 3. S.Theodoridis and K. Koutroumbas, Pattern Recognition, 4/e, Academic Press, 2009. 4. Tom Mitchell, Machine Learning, McGraw-Hill 5. Tou and Gonzales, Pattern Recognition Principles, Wesley Publication Company, London, 1974. Course Plan

Module Course content End Sem Hours Exam Marks

Introduction: Basics of pattern recognition system, various applications, Machine Perception, classification of pattern 3 I recognition systems 15% Design of Pattern recognition system, Pattern recognition Life Cycle 2

Statistical Pattern Recognition: Review of probability theory, Gaussian distribution, Bayes decision theory and Classifiers, 4 Optimal solutions for minimum error and minimum risk criteria, Normal density and discriminant functions, Decision surfaces Parameter estimation methods: Maximum-Likelihood estimation, Expectation-maximization method, Bayesian parameter estimation 2 II Concept of feature extraction and dimensionality, Curse of 15% dimensionality, Dimension reduction methods - Fisher discriminant analysis, Principal component analysis 6 Hidden Markov Models (HMM) basic concepts, Gaussian mixture models.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Non-Parameter methods: Non-parametric techniques for density 3 estimation - Parzen-window method, K-Nearest Neighbour method. III Non-metric methods for pattern classification: Non-numeric data or 15% nominal data 3 Decision trees: Concept of construction, splitting of nodes, choosing of attributes, overfitting, pruning IV Linear Discriminant based algorithm: Perceptron, Support Vector 5 15% Machines SECOND INTERNAL EXAM

Multilayer perceptrons, Back Propagation algorithm, Artificial 4 V Neural networks 20% Classifier Ensembles: Bagging, Boosting / AdaBoost 3 Unsupervised learning: Clustering - Criterion functions for VI clustering, Algorithms for clustering: K-means and Hierarchical 5 20% methods, Cluster validation END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 70% for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC468 SECURE COMMUNICATION 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC407 COMPUTER COMMUNICATION Course objectives: •To impart the students about the theory and technology behind the secure communication. Syllabus: Introduction on Security, Security Goals, Types of Attacks, Modular arithmetic: Groups, Ring, Fields. The Euclidean algorithm, Finite fields of the form GF(p), Polynomial arithmetic, Symmetric Ciphers, Symmetric Cipher Model, Substitution Techniques, Transposition techniques, Block Ciphers, Data encryption Standards, Differential and Linear Crypt analysis Advanced Encryption standard, The AES Cipher, Public key cryptosystem, RSA algorithm, Intruders, Password management Expected outcome: The student will be i. Exposed to the different approaches that handle security and the algorithms in use for maintaining data integrity and authenticity. ii. Enabled student to appreciate the practical aspects of security features design and their implementation Text Books: 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan , Cryptography and Network security Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008 2. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network security: principles and practice", 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002 References: 1. David S. Dummit & Richard M Foote, Abstract Algebra, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 2008. 2. Douglas A. Stinson, Cryptography, Theory and Practice, 2/e, Chapman & Hall, CRC Press Company, Washington, 2005. 3. Lawrence C. Washington, Elliptic Curves: Theory and Cryptography, Chapman & Hall, CRC Press Company, Washington, 2008. 4. N. Koeblitz: A course in Number theory and Cryptography, 2008 5. Thomas Koshy: Elementary Number Theory with Applications, 2/e, Academic Press, 2007 6. Tyagi and Yadav , Cryptography and network security, Dhanpatrai, 2012

Course Plan End Sem. Module Course contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction on security, security goals and types of attacks: Passive I attack, active attack, attacks on confidentiality, attacks on integrity 5 15% and availability, Security services and mechanisms. Modular arithmetic: Groups, Ring, Fields. The Euclidean algorithm, 4 II Finite fields of the form GF(p) 15% Polynomial arithmetic: Finite fields of the form GF (2n). 4 FIRST INTERNAL EXAM III Symmetric Ciphers, Symmetric Cipher Model 3 15%

Substitution Techniques, Caesar Cipher, Mono alphabetic Cipher, Play fair cipher, Hill cipher, Poly alphabetic Cipher, one time pad 4 Transposition techniques ,Block Ciphers, Data encryption Standards, 3 DES Encryption, DES decryption Differential and Linear Crypt analysis Advanced Encryption IV 2 15% standard The AES Cipher, substitute bytes transformation, Shift row transformation, Mix Column transformation. 2 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Public key cryptosystem, Application for Public key cryptosystem 2 requirements V 20% RSA algorithm, Key management, Distribution of public key, public key certificates, Distribution of secret keys. 5 Intruders: Intrusion techniques, Intrusion detection, Statistical anomaly detection, Rule based intrusion detection, Distributed 5 VI intrusion detection, Honey pot, Intrusion detection exchange format. 20% Password management: Password protection, password selection strategies. 2 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC469 OPTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course objectives:  To know the physics of absorption, recombination and photoemission from semiconductors.  To analyse different types of photo detectors based on their performance parameters.  To discuss different LED structures with material properties and reliability aspects.  To explain optical modulators and optical components  To illustrate different types of lasers with distinct properties. Syllabus: Optical processes in semiconductors – LASERS- Nitride light emitters- White-light LEDs- Optical modulators - optical switching and logic devices, optical memory- Optical detection - Optoelectronic ICs - Introduction to optical components Expected outcome: The students will be able to: i. Explain the property of absorption, recombination and photoemission in semiconductors. ii. Illustrate different types of lasers with distinct properties. iii. Explain different LED structures with material properties. iv. Analyse different types of photo detectors. v. Explain optical modulators and optical components. Text Books: 1. Pallab Bhattacharya: Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Pearson, 2009 2. Yariv, Photonics Optical Electronics in modern communication, 6/e ,Oxford Univ Press,2006. References: 1. Alastair Buckley, Organic Light-Emitting Diodes, Woodhead, 2013. 2. B E Saleh and M C Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics:, Wiley-Interscience, 1991 3. Bandyopadhay, Optical communicatoion and networks, PHI, 2014. 4. Mynbaev, Scheiner, Fiberoptic Communication Technology, Pearson, 2001. 5. Piprek, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Elsevier, 2008. 6. Xun Li, Optoelectronic Devices Design Modelling and Simulation, Cambridge University Press, 2009 Course Plan End Sem. Module Course content (42hrs) Hours Exam Marks Optical processes in semiconductors – electron hole recombination, absorption, Franz-Keldysh effect, Stark effect, I 7 15% quantum confined Stark effect, deep level transitions, Auger recombination heat generation and dissipation, heat sources. Lasers – threshold condition for lasing, line broadening mechanisms, axial and transverse laser modes, heterojunction II 7 15% lasers, distributed feedback lasers, DBR lasers, quantum well lasers, tunneling based lasers, modulation of lasers.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Nitride light emitters, nitride material properties, InGaN/GaN LED, structure and working, performance parameters, InGaN/GaN Laser Diode, structure and working, performance parameters. White-light LEDs, generation of white light with LEDs, III 9 15% generation of white light by dichromatic sources, ,generation of white light by trichromatic sources, temperature dependence of trichromatic, 7generation of white light by tetrachromatic and pentachromatic sources, white-light sources based on wavelength converters. Optical modulators using pn junction, electro-optical modulators, acousto-optical modulators, Raman-Nath modulators, Franz- IV Keldysh and Stark effect modulators, quantum well electro- 5 15% absorption modulators, optical switching and logic devices, optical memory. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Optical detection – PIN, APD, modulated barrier photodiode, Schottky barrier photodiode, wavelength selective detection, micro cavity photodiodes. V Optoelectronic ICs, advantages, integrated transmitters and 7 20% receivers, guided wave devices. Working of LDR, liquid crystal display, structure, TFT display, structure, polymer LED, organic LED. Introduction to optical components, directional couplers, multiplexers, attenuators, isolators, circulators, tunable filters, VI 7 20% fixed filters, add drop multiplexers, optical cross connects, wavelength convertors, optical bistable devices. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION INTEGRATED OPTICS & PHOTONIC EC472 SYSTEMS 3-0-0 -3 2016 Prerequisite: EC303 Applied Electromagnetic Theory, EC405 Optical Communication Course objectives:  To discuss basic goals, principles and techniques of integrated optical devices and photonic systems  To explain operation and integration of various optoelectronic devices in an integrated optical system  To study about various components like optical waveguides, optical couplers, design tools, fabrication techniques, and the applications of optical integrated circuits.  To introduce some of the current state-of-the-art devices and systems. Syllabus: Review of Electromagnetics: Maxwell’s equations, optical waveguides and devices, Waveguide Fabrication Techniques, Electro-Optic Waveguides, Polymer Waveguide Device, Losses in optical wave guide, Wave guide input and output couplers, coupled mode theory, Light Propagation in Waveguides, FFT-BPM, FD-BPM, Electro-Optic Modulators: Types, Integrated semiconductor laser, integrated semiconductor optical amplifier, integrated optical detectors, applications of optical integrated circuits, devices and systems for telecommunications, microwave carrier generation by optical techniques, photonic crystals, nanophotonic device. Expected outcome: The student will have an in depth knowledge of i. Devices that are basic components of integrated optics and photonic systems including Optical wave guides, optical couplers, Lasers, Detectors and modulators ii. Light propagation in waveguides iii. The fabrication process of Optical Integrated devices iv. Applications of Optical Integrated devices v. Nano photonic devices Text Books: 1. Lifante, Integrated Photonics: Fundamentals, John Wiley 2003 2. Robert Hunsperger, Integrated optics :Theory and technology 6/e Springer, 2009 References: 1. H. Nishihara, M. Haruna, and T. Suhara, Optical Integrated Circuits, McGraw-Hill Professional, 1989. 2. KeicoIizuka, Elements of photonics, John Wiley, 2002 . 3. Pappannareddy, Introduction to light wave systems,Artech House,1995 RELATED LINKS Website of IEEE photonics society: www.ieee.org/photonics. Course Plan End Sem. Module Course content (42hrs) Hours Exam Marks Review of Electromagnetics , Maxwell’s equations - Wave equation 3 Analysis of optical waveguides and devices- Planar waveguides, I 15% chanel waveguides, graded index waveguides. 4

Waveguide Fabrication Techniques -substrate materials for optical 4 IC , Epitaxially Grown Waveguides- Electro-Optic Waveguides II 15% Types of Polymers-Polymer Waveguide Devices, Optical Fiber 3 Waveguide Devices FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Losses in optical wave guide, measurement of losses. Wave guide input and output couplers, types of couplers, coupling between wave 4 III guides, 15% Optical Fiber Couplers and Splitters, coupled mode theory 3 Light Propagation in Waveguides: The Beam Propagation Method- Fresnel Equation - Fast Fourier Transform Method (FFT-BPM) - IV 7 15% Solution based on discrete fourier transform - Method Based on Finite Differences (FD-BPM), Boundary Conditions SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Electro-Optic Modulators - Basic Operating Characteristics- The Electro-Optic Effect,Mach-Zehnder Modulator, acousto-optic 4 V modulator, 20% Integrated semiconductor laser, integrated semiconductor optical 3 amplifier, integrated optical detectors, structures. Applications of Optical Integrated Circuits-Spectrum Analyser- 3 Temperature and High Voltage Sensors, VI Devices and Systems for Telecommunications- Microwave Carrier 20% Generation by Optical Techniques, - Photonic Crystals- 4 Nanophotonic Device. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC474 COMPUTER VISION 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: EC301 Digital Signal Processing Course objectives:  To review image processing techniques for computer vision  To understand shape and region analysis  To understand three-dimensional image analysis techniques and motion analysis  To study some applications of computer vision algorithms  To introduce methods and concepts which will enable the student to implement computer vision systems with emphasis on applications and problem solving Syllabus: Review of Image processing operations, Image formation models, Image processing and feature extraction, Motion Estimation, Shape representation and Object recognition. Expected outcome: The students will be able to: i. Implement fundamental image processing techniques required for computer vision ii. Perform shape analysis and boundary tracking techniques iii. Implement motion related techniques iv. To develop applications using computer vision techniques Text Books: 1. B K P Horn , Robot Vision, McGraw-Hill,1986 2. D Forsyth and J Ponce, Computer Vision - A modern approach, Prentice Hall of India, 2002 References: 1. E R Davies, Computer & Machine Vision, Fourth Edition, Academic Press, 2012. 2. R. Szeliski, Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, Springer 2011 3. Simon J D Prince, Computer Vision: Models, Learning, and Inference, Cambridge University Press, 2012. Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Review of image processing techniques : filtering, thresholding 1 Mathematical morphology, Texture 1 I 15 Binary shape analysis, connectedness, object labelling and counting 2 Boundary descriptors 1 Monocular and binocular imaging system 2 II Orthographic & Perspective Projection 2 15 Camera models 2

Camera Calibration, Stereo vision: introduction; concept of disparity and its relationship with depth 3 FIRST INTERNAL EXAM Image Processing for Feature Detection and Image Synthesis, Edge 1 detection III Corner detection, Harris corner detection algorithm, Line and curve 15 detection,Hough transform 3 SIFT operator, Mosaics, snakes 2 Shape from X - Shape from shading, Photometric stereo, Texture, 3 Occluding contour detection. Motion Analysis- Regularization theory,Optical Flow: brightness IV 15 constancy equation, aperture problem, Horn-Shunck method, Lucas- 4 Kanade method Structure from motion. 2 SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Object recognition: Hough transforms and other simple object recognition methods 3 V Shape correspondence and shape matching, Principal Component 20 3 Analysis Shape priors for recognition 1 Application: Photo album, Face detection, Face recognition, Eigen faces, 3 Active appearance and 3D shape models of faces VI Application: In-vehicle vision system: locating roadway, road markings, 20 identifying road signs, locating pedestrians 3 END SEMESTER EXAM Question Paper Pattern ( End semester exam)

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A covers modules I and II, Part B covers modules III and IV, and Part C covers modules V and VI. Each part has three questions uniformly covering the two modules and each question can have maximum four subdivisions. In each part, any two questions are to be answered. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 70% for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction **341 DESIGN PROJECT 0-1-2-2 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To understand the engineering aspects of design with reference to simple products  To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems  To develop design that add value to products and solve technical problems Course Plan Study :Take minimum three simple products, processes or techniques in the area of specialisation, study, analyse and present them. The analysis shall be focused on functionality, strength, material, manufacture/construction, quality, reliability, aesthetics, ergonomics, safety, maintenance, handling, sustainability, cost etc. whichever are applicable. Each student in the group has to present individually; choosing different products, processes or techniques.

Design: The project team shall identify an innovative product, process or technology and proceed with detailed design. At the end, the team has to document it properly and present and defend it. The design is expected to concentrate on functionality, design for strength is not expected.

Note : The one hour/week allotted for tutorial shall be used for discussions and presentations. The project team (not exceeding four) can be students from different branches, if the design problem is multidisciplinary. Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. Think innovatively on the development of components, products, processes or technologies in the engineering field ii. Analyse the problem requirements and arrive workable design solutions

Reference: Michael Luchs, Scott Swan, Abbie Griffin, 2015. Design Thinking. 405 pages, John Wiley & Sons, Inc

Evaluation First evaluation ( Immediately after first internal examination ) 20 marks Second evaluation ( Immediately after second internal examination) 20 marks Final evaluation ( Last week of the semester) 60 marks

Note: All the three evaluations are mandatory for course completion and for awarding the final grade.

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction **352 Comprehensive Examination 0-1-1-2 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To assess the comprehensive knowledge gained in basic courses relevant to the branch of study  To comprehend the questions asked and answer them with confidence. Assessment

Oral examination – To be conducted by the college (@ three students/hour) covering all the courses up to and including V semester– 50 marks Written examination - To be conducted by the Dept. on the date announced by the University– common to all students of the same branch – objective type ( 1 hour duration)– 50 multiple choice questions ( 4 choices) of 1 mark each covering the six common courses of S1&S2 and six branch specific courses listed – questions are set by the University - no negative marks – 50 marks.

Note: Both oral and written examinations are mandatory. But separate minimum marks is not insisted for pass. If a students does not complete any of the two assessments, grade I shall be awarded and the final grade shall be given only after the completion of both the assessments. The two hours allotted for the course may be used by the students for discussion, practice and for oral assessment. Expected outcome.  The students will be confident in discussing the fundamental aspects of any engineering problem/situation and give answers in dealing with them

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction **451 Seminar and Project Preliminary 0-1-4-2 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To develop skills in doing literature survey, technical presentation and report preparation.  To enable project identification and execution of preliminary works on final semester project Course Plan Seminar: Each student shall identify a topic of current relevance in his/her branch of engineering, get approval of faculty concerned, collect sufficient literature on the topic, study it thoroughly, prepare own report and present in the class. Project preliminary: Identify suitable project relevant to the branch of study. Form project team ( not exceeding four students). The students can do the project individually also. Identify a project supervisor. Present the project proposal before the assessment board (excluding the external expert) and get it approved by the board. The preliminary work to be completed: (1) Literature survey (2) Formulation of objectives (3) Formulation of hypothesis/design/methodology (4) Formulation of work plan (5) Seeking funds (6) Preparation of preliminary report Note: The same project should be continued in the eighth semester by the same project team. Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. Analyse a current topic of professional interest and present it before an audience ii. Identify an engineering problem, analyse it and propose a work plan to solve it.

Evaluation Seminar : 50 marks (Distribution of marks for the seminar is as follows: i. Presentation : 40% ii. Ability to answer questions : 30% & iii. Report : 30%) Project preliminary : 50 marks( Progress evaluation by the supervisor : 40% and progress evaluation by the assessment board excluding external expert : 60%. Two progress evaluations, mid semester and end semester, are mandatory.)

Note: All evaluations are mandatory for course completion and for awarding the final grade.

Course code Course Name Credits Year of Introduction **492 PROJECT 6 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving  To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems  To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems Course Plan In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the preliminary report prepared in the seventh semester Review and finalization of the approach to the problem relating to the assigned topic Preparing a detailed action plan for conducting the investigation, including team work Detailed Analysis/Modelling/Simulation/Design/Problem Solving/Experiment as needed Final development of product/process, testing, results, conclusions and future directions Preparing a paper for Conference presentation/Publication in Journals, if possible Preparing a report in the standard format for being evaluated by the dept. assessment board Final project presentation and viva voce by the assessment board including external expert Expected outcome The students will be able to iii. Think innovatively on the development of components, products, processes or technologies in the engineering field iv. Apply knowledge gained in solving real life engineering problems

Evaluation Maximum Marks : 100 (i) Two progress assessments 20% by the faculty supervisor(s) (ii) Final project report 30% by the assessment board (iii) Project presentation and viva voce 50% by the assessment board

Note: All the three evaluations are mandatory for course completion and for awarding the final grade.

Course Course name L-T-P- Year Of code Credits Introduction AE482 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To equip the students with the basic knowledge of pressure, temperature, flow, level, density and viscosity measurements.  To understand the construction and working of measuring instruments Syllabus Temperature measurement- Pressure measurement- Measurement of viscosity- Flow measurement- Anemometers- Target flow meters- Level measurement Expected outcome  The student will be able to understand the various instruments used for industrial measurement. Text Books 1. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003. 2. Patranabis D, “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 2ndEdition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1997. 3. Spitzer D. W., Flow measurement, ISA press, New York, 1998

Reference Books 1. Andrew W.G, “Applied Instrumentation in Process Industries – A survey”, Vol I & Vol II, Gulf Publishing Company, Houston, 2001. 2. Douglas M. Considine, “Process / Industrial Instruments & Controls Handbook”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1999. 3. Liptak B.G, “Process Measurement and Analysis”, 4th Edition, Chilton Book Company, Radnor, Pennsylvania, 2003. 4. Noltingk B.E., “Instrumentation Reference Book”, 2ndEdition, Butterworth Heinemann, 1995. Course Plan Module Contents Hours End Sem. Exam Marks Temperature measurement: Resistance temperature detector (RTD), principle and types, construction requirements for industry, measuring circuits. Thermistors, principle and sensor types, manufacturing techniques, measuring circuits, linearization methods and applications. Pneumatic and I 7 15% suction pyrometers, integrated circuit sensors, diode type sensors, ultrasonic thermometers, Johnson noise thermometer, fluidic sensors, spectroscopic temperature measurements, thermograph, temperature switches and thermostats. Pressure measurement basics, mechanical type instruments, electromechanical type, low pressure measurement, related accessories, pressure measuring standards, selection and II 7 15% application. Transmitter definition, classification, pneumatic transmitter-force balance type, torque balance type, two wire and four wire transmitters, I/P and P/I converters.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Measurement of viscosity: definitions, units, Newtonian and Newtonian behaviour, measurement of viscosity using laboratory viscometers, industrial viscometers. Viscometer III 7 15% selection and application. Measurement of density, definitions, units, liquid density measurement, gas densitometers, its application and selection. Flow measurement: Introduction, definitions and units, classification of flow meters, pitot tubes, positive IV displacement liquid meters and provers, positive 6 15% displacement gas flow meters, variable area flow meters.

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Anemometers: Hot wire/hot film anemometer, laser Doppler anemometer (LDA), electromagnetic flow meter, turbine and other rotary element flow meters, ultrasonic flow meters, doppler flow meters, cross correlation flow meters, vortex flow meters. Measurement of mass flow rate: radiation, angular momentum, impeller, turbine, constant torque 8 V 20% hysteresis clutch, twin turbine Coriolis, gyroscopic and heat transfer type mass flow meters. Target flow meters: V-cone flow meters purge flow regulators, flow switches, flow meter calibration concepts, flow meter selection and application.

Level measurement: introduction, float level devices, displacer level devices, rotating paddle switches, diaphragm and deferential pressure detectors, resistance, capacitance VI 7 20% and RF probes, radiation, conductivity, field effect, thermal, ultrasonic, microwave level switches, radar and vibrating type level sensors. Level sensor selection and application. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hours

Part A Answer any two out of three questions from Module 1 and 2 together. Each question carries 15 marks and may have not more than four sub divisions. (15 x 2 = 30 marks) Part B Answer any two out of three questions from Module 3 and 4 together. Each question carries 15 marks and may have not more than four sub divisions. (15 x 2 = 30 marks) Part C Answer any two out of three questions from Module 5 and 6 together. Each question carries 15 marks and may have not more than four sub divisions. (20 x 2 = 40 marks)

Course Course name L-T-P- Year of code Credits Introduction AE484 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM DESIGN 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : NIL Course Objective  To equip the students with the basic Concept of Instrumentation system design  To understand the construction and working of different instrumentation system Syllabus Temperature measurement- Pressure measurement- Measurement of viscosity- Flow measurement- Anemometers- Target flow meters- Level measurement Expected outcome The students will be able to understand the concepts behind instrumentation system design and its working Text Books 1. E.O. Dobelin, Measurement Systems Application and Design, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003 2. Harry N Norton, Hand Book of transducers, PHI, 1989

Reference Books 1. Gregory K McMillan, Douglas M Conside, Process and Industrial Instrumentation Control, McGraw Hill, 5ed, 1999 2. John P Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, Pearson Education, 2004 Course Plan Module Contents Hours End Sem. Exam Marks Introduction: Concept of generalized measurement system, functional elements, generalized input-output configuration, I 7 15% static sensitivity, drifts, linearity, hysteresis, threshold, resolution, static stiffness and input-output impedance Transducers: Operating principle, construction and design of variable resistive transducers, variable inductive transducers, II 7 15% variable capacitive transducers, piezoelectric transducers, magnetostrictive transducers FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Hall effect, eddy current, ionization, optical transducers, digital transducers, single shaft encoders, photo voltaic cell, III 7 15% photo conductive, photo emissive, fiber optic sensors, concept of smart and intelligent sensor, bio-sensors Construction and performance of industrially important transducer for measuring displacement, speed, vibrations, IV 6 15% temperature, electrical power, strain, torque Force, Design of intelligent instrumentation system. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Signal Conditioning & Recording (Part1): Quarter, half and 8 V full bridge circuit, active filters, differential instrumentation 20%

amplifiers, carrier amplifiers Signal Conditioning & Recording (Part2): design of display VI elements, LED, bar graph displays, LCDs , nixie tube and 7 20% their interfacing

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hours

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction AO482 FLIGHT AGAINST GRAVITY 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To introduce the basic concepts of aerospace engineering and the current developments in the field. Syllabus: History of aeronautics – helicopters – aircraft propulsion – aircraft configurations – Atmosphere and atmospheric flight – space flight – aircraft structures and materials – rockets. Text Book: Anderson, J.D., “Introduction to Flight”, McGraw-Hill, 1995. Reference: Kermode, A.C., “Flight without Formulae”, McGraw-Hill, 1997. Syllabus &Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Historical Developments in Aeronautical Activities: Early air vehicles: 3 Balloons, Biplanes and Monoplanes 15% I Helicopters; Developments in aerodynamics, aircraft materials, 3 aircraft structures & aircraft propulsion. Aircraft Configurations: Different types of flight vehicles and their 2 classifications; II Components of fixed wing airplane and their functions; 2 Airfoils, wings and other shapes. 2 15% FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Principles of Atmospheric Flight: Physical properties and structure of 3 15% the atmosphere: The Standard Atmosphere, Temperature, Pressure and Altitude 2 III relationships, Mach number Evolution of theory of lift and drag, Maneuvers, Concepts of stability 3 and control. Introduction to Space Flight: Introduction to basic concepts, the upper 3 15% atmosphere IV Space vehicle trajectories-some basic concepts, Kepler’s Laws of 3 planetary motion. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Introduction to airplane structures and materials : General types of 3 20% construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque. Typical wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic 2 V materials Use of aluminium alloy, titanium, stainless steel and composite 2 materials. Power plants used in airplanes : Basic ideas about piston, turboprop 3 20% VI and jet engines.

Comparative merits, Principles of operation of rocket, types of rockets 3 and typical applications, Exploration into space. 2 END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

Maximum marks: 100 Exam duration: 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts

Part A 4 questions uniformly covering modules I and II. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part B 4 questions uniformly covering modules III and IV. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part C 6 questions uniformly covering modules V and VI. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

Course code. Course Name L-T-P -C Year of Introduction AU484 MICROPROCESSOR AND 3-0-0-3 2016 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS Prerequisite: NIL Course Objectives • To impart the basic concepts of microprocessors • To impart the basic concepts of embedded systems

Syllabus Introduction to microprocessors, Intel 8085 microprocessor, Instruction Set of 8085, Assembly language programming, Interfacing I/O devices, Overview of embedded system, Intel 8051 microcontroller, 8051 interfacing, Other microcontroller architectures: PIC-Atmel AVR-ARM

Expected outcome. The students will i. Get idea about Intel 8085 Microprocessor ii. Be able to do assembly language programming iii. Gain an overview of embedded systems iv. Know about Intel 8051 microcontroller and its interfacing Text Books: 1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, "Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the 8085", Fifth edition, Prentice hall, 2002. 2. Shibu K.V, Introduction to Embedded Systems, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009

References: 1. Aditya P. Mathur, "Introduction to Microprocessors", Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd., New Delhi, 1989. 2. Ahson.S.I., "Microprocessors with Applications in Process Control", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd.,New Delhi, 1986. 3. K Uma Rao,“The 8051 Microcontrollers: Architecture, Programming & Applications”, Pearson, 2010. 4. Steve Heath, “Embedded system design second edition”, Elsevier, 2002 Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction to microprocessors:Microcomputers and microprocessors, 8/16/32/ 64-bit microprocessor families. Internal architecture of Intel 8085 I 7 15% microprocessor: Block diagrams, Registers, Functional details of pins, Control signals. Instruction Set of 8085: Instruction set, Instruction format, Addressing modes. Machine cycle and instruction cycles, Timing diagrams, Fetch and II execute operations. 7 15% Assembly Language Programming:Data copy operations, Arithmetic operations, Branching operations, Logic and bit manipulation instructions FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION III Interfacing I/O devices: Interrupts, Programmable interface 7 15%

devices,Interfacing keyboard and seven segment display, Serial I/O and data communication. Overview of Embedded System:Embedded System, Categories of Embedded System, Requirements of Embedded Systems, Challenges and IV 7 15% Issues in Embedded Software Development, Major application areas of embedded system. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Intel 8051 microcontroller: Architecture, Memory organization, V Registers and I/O ports, Addressing modes, Instruction sets, Assembly 7 20% language programming.

8051 interfacing:Keyboard, Stepper motor, ADC, DAC, and LCD module interface. Frequency counter and temperature measurement. VI 7 20% Other microcontroller architectures: Microchip technology PIC, Atmel AVR, ARM core processors. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

Maximum marks: 100 Duration: 3 hrs

The question paper should consist of three parts

Part A 4 questions uniformly covering modules I and II. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part B 4 questions uniformly covering modules III and IV. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part C 6 questions uniformly covering modules V and VI.Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

Course code Course Name L-T-P - C Year of Introduction AU486 Noise, Vibration and Harshness 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : NIL Course Objectives  To impart the basics of noise, vibration, sources of vibration and noise in automobiles  To study the effect of noise and vibration on human beings and nature.  To introduce the methods of measurement of noise and vibration.  To provide knowhow on various methods to reduce the vibration and noise Syllabus Fundamentals of Acoustics and Noise, Vibration - Effects of Noise, Blast, Vibration, and Shock on People- Introduction to Transportation Noise and Vibration Sources – Engine noise - Reduction of noise and vibrations - Noise and Vibration Transducers - Noise and Vibration Measurements - Vibration Data Analysis

Expected outcome. The students will i. understand the sources, effects, prediction, control techniques, measurement techniques of noise, vibration pertain to an automobile ii. know about reduction of noise and vibration from an automobile. Text Books: 1. Clarence W. de Silva , ―Vibration Monitoring, Testing, and Instrumentation ―,CRC Press, 2007 2. Colin H Hansen ―Understanding Active Noise Cancellation― , Spon Press , London 2003 3. Kewal Pujara ―Vibrations and Noise for Engineers, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 1992. 4. Singiresu S.Rao,―Mechanical Vibrations‖ - Pearson Education, ISBM –81-297-0179-2004. References: 1. Allan G. Piersol ,Thomas L. Paez ―Harris’ Shock and Vibration Handbook‖ , McGraw-Hill , New Delhi, 2010 2. Bernard Challen and Rodica Baranescu - ―Diesel Engine Refrence Book‖ - Second edition - SAE International - ISBN 0-7680-0403-9 – 1999. 3. David A.Bies and Colin H.Hansen ―Engineering Noise Control: Theory and Practice ―Spon Press, London, 2009 4. Julian Happian-Smith - ―An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design‖- Butterworth- Heinemann, ISBN 0750-5044-3 – 2004 5. Matthew Harrison ―Vehicle Refinement: Controlling Noise and Vibration in Road Vehicles ―, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, Burlington, 2004 Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Fundamentals of Acoustics and Noise, Vibration: Introduction, classification of vibration and noises: Theory of Sound—Predictions I 7 15% and Measurement, Sound Sources, Sound Propagation in the Atmosphere, Sound Radiation from Structures and Their Response to

Sound, General Introduction to Vibration, free and forced vibration, undamped and damped vibration, linear and non linear vibration, response of damped and undamped systems under harmonic force, analysis of single degree and two degree of freedom systems Effects of Noise, Blast, Vibration, and Shock on People: General Introduction to Noise and Vibration Effects on People and Hearing Conservation, Noise Exposure, Noise-Induced Annoyance, Effects of Infrasound, Low-Frequency Noise, and Ultrasound on II 7 15% People, Effects of Intense Noise on People and Hearing Loss, Effects of Vibration on People, Effects of Mechanical Shock on People, Rating Measures, Descriptors, Criteria, and Procedures for Determining Human Response to Noise. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Introduction to Transportation Noise and Vibration Sources, Noise Characteristics of engines, engine overall noise levels, assessment of III combustion noise, assessment of mechanical noise, engine radiated 7 15% noise, intake and exhaust noise, engine accessory contributed noise, transmission noise, aerodynamic noise, tyre noise, brake noise Reduction of noise and vibrations I: Vibration isolation, tuned absorbers, untuned viscous dampers, damping treatments, application IV 7 15% dynamic forces generated by IC engines, engine isolation, crank shaft damping, modal analysis of the mass elastic model shock absorbers. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Reduction of noise and vibrations: noise dose level, legislation, measurement and analysis of noise, measurement environment, equipment, frequency analysis, tracking analysis, sound quality V analysis. Methods for control of engine noise, combustion noise, 8 20% mechanical noise, predictive analysis, palliative treatments and enclosures, automotive noise control principles, sound in enclosures, sound energy absorption, sound transmission through barriers Noise and Vibration Transducers, Analysis Equipment, Signal Processing, and Measuring Techniques: General Introduction to Noise and Vibration Transducers, Measuring Equipment, Measurements, Signal Acquisition and Processing, Acoustical Transducer Principles and Types of Microphones, Vibration Transducer Principles and Types of Vibration Transducers, Sound VI 8 20% Level Meters, Noise Dosimeters, Analyzers and Signal Generators, Equipment for Data Acquisition, Noise and Vibration Measurements, Determination of Sound Power Level and Emission Sound Pressure Level, Sound Intensity Measurements, Noise and Vibration Data Analysis, Calibration of Measurement Microphones, Calibration of Shock and Vibration Transducers. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

Maximum marks: 100 Duration: 3 hrs

The question paper should consist of three parts

Part A 4 questions uniformly covering modules I and II. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part B 4 questions uniformly covering modules III and IV. Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part C 6 questions uniformly covering modules V and VI.Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

Course Course Name L-T-P- Year of code Credits Introduction BM482 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 3-0-0-3 2016

Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To impart knowledge about the principle and working of different types of biomedical electronic equipment/ devices.

Syllabus Bioelectric potentials, Electrodes, Transducers, ECG, Pacemakers, Defibrillators, PCG, Blood pressure, PPG, Pulse oximeters, Holter ECG, Stress testing, Patient monitoring systems, EEG, EP, EMG, Spirometers, Heart lung machine, Infant incubators, Infusion pumps, Artificial heart valves, lithotripsy, Surgical diathermy, X-ray radiography, CT, US and MR imaging systems.

Expected Outcome At the end of the course the students will be i. Familiar with the principle and applications various analytical, diagnostic and therapeutic instruments ii. Knowing the different methods and modalities used for medical imaging.

Text Books: Joseph J. Carr, John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., 2001.

Reference Books: 1. Bronzino, Hand book of Biomedical Engineering, IEEE press book. 2. Geddes& Baker,’ Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation’, Wiley 3. John G Webster (Ed), Encyclopedia of Medical Devices and Instrumentation ,Wiley 4. R.S Khandpur – Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation – Tata McGraw 5. Webster J,’ Medical Instrumentation-Application and Design’, John Wiley

Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks I Origin of bioelectric potentials – resting and action potentials - 3 15% propagation of action potentials – Examples of bioelectric potentials - ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG, EGG – Electrodes for measurement of biopotentials. Transducers for measurement of temperature, pressure & 3 displacement - Basic principles only II Electrical activity of heart, electrocardiogram - lead systems - 2 15% ECG machine – block diagram Cardiac pacemakers – internal and external pacemakers, 3 defibrillators – basic principles. Measurement of heart sounds – phonocardiography

Measurement of blood pressure – sphygmomanometer & 2 oscillometric methods. Photo plethysmography - for pulse rate measurement - Pulse oximeters Holter recorders. Cardiac stress testing – methods & protocols 2 Patient monitoring systems-Bed side & central station FIRST INTERNAL EXAM IV Electrical activity of brain - Electro encephalogram – EEG 3 15% measurement & waveforms - block diagram. Evoked potential - types & applications Electrical activity of Muscle – Electromyogram (EMG) – Types 1 of electrodes. Spiro meter - measurement of respiratory parameters. 2 III Heart lung machine, Infant incubators, Infusion pumps, 4 15% Artificial heart valves - Basic principles & block diagram only. Lithotripsy – principles, types & applications. Surgical 3 diathermy - Basic principles & block diagram only. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V X-ray radiography - Principles of x-ray generation – Block 3 20% diagram of x-ray machine - Description. Angiography - Basic principles X-ray computed tomography - Principle of operation, sectional 5 imaging, scanner configurations. Reconstruction of images - Iterative & Fourier methods VI Ultrasonic imaging – Basic principles - Ultrasonic transducers 3 20% & Types - modes of image display-Principles & applications. Doppler & colour flow imaging MRI – Basic Principles - FID signal-excitation & emission – 3 Basic pulse sequences - Block diagram END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hours There shall be three parts for the question paper. Part A includes Modules 1 & 2 and shall have three questions of fifteen marks out of which two are to be answered. There can be subdivisions, limited to a maximum of 4, in each question. Part B includes Modules 3 & 4 and shall have three questions of fifteen marks out of which two are to be answered. There can be subdivisions, limited to a maximum of 4, in each question. Part C includes Modules 5 & 6 and shall have three questions of twenty marks out of which two are to be answered. There can be subdivisions, limited to a maximum of 4, in each question.

Note: Each part shall have questions uniformly covering both the modules in it.

Course code Course Name L-T-P-Credits Year of Introduction BM484 MEDICAL IMAGING & IMAGE 3-0-0-3 2016 PROCESSING TECHNIQUES Course Objectives  To introduce the underlying principles of biomedical imaging modalities such as US, X- ray, CT, SPECT, PET and MRI  To provide an overview of the image processing techniques used in these images Syllabus Imaging Techniques – X-ray - CT, Nuclear medicine imaging modalities - SPECT and PET, Ultrasound Imaging - Doppler ultrasound, Magnetic resonance imaging –T1, T2 and Proton density weighted, Thermography and Microwave imaging, Image sampling and quantization, Image enhancement-spatial and frequency domain methods, Image segmentation-edge based and region based.

Expected Outcome The students will be able to i. Identify major processes involved in formation of medical images ii. Recognize the imaging modality from their visualizations iii. Classify the various medical image processing algorithms iv. Describe fundamental methods for image enhancement and segmentation Reference Books: 1. A C Kak, Principle of Computed Tomography, IEEE Press New York 2. Atam P Dhawan , Medical Imaging Analysis, Wiley Interscience publication, 2003 3. D L Hykes, W R Hedrick &D E Starchman: Ultrasound Physics &Instrumentation, Churchill Livingstone, Melbourne, 1985. 4. Douglas A Christensen: Ultrasonic Bioinstrumentation, John Wiley, New York, 1988. 5. Gonzalez Rafel C, Wintz Paul: Digital Image Processing, Addison Wesley.1993 6. Issac N Bankman, Handbook of Medical Imaging, Processing and Analysis, Academic Press, 2008 7. M N Rehani: Physics of Medical Imaging, Macmillian India Ltd., 1991. 8. Peter Fish, The Physics of Diagnostic Ultrasound, John Wiley &sons, Eng land,1990. 9. S Webb, The Physics of Medical Imaging, IOP Publishing Ltd., 1988. 10. Thomas M. Deserno : Biomedical Image Processing Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2011

Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks I X-ray imaging – basic principles of image formation – block 3 15% diagram of an x-ray machine. Digital radiography - basic principles. X-ray Computed Tomography - basic principles, contrast scale, 4 different generations of CT scanners, basic principles of image reconstruction. II Ultrasonic imaging – Physical principles, Transducer parameters, 4 15% Different modes - A-mode, M-mode (echocardiograph), B-mode. Principles of Doppler ultrasonic imaging.

Magnetic Resonance Imaging – Principles of MRI, T1 weighted , 3 T2 weighted and proton density weighted images, applications of MRI

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM III Nuclear medicine imaging modalities - Emission Computed 4 15% Tomography – SPECT & PET Thermography- Physics of thermography, applications of 3 thermography IV Image sampling and quantization, Image enhancement in spatial 4 15% domain-gray level transformations, histogram processing Smoothing and sharpening, spatial filters 3

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Image enhancement in frequency domain- filtering- low pass 4 20% high pass , band pass and band stop filters Homomorphic filter, Zooming operation 3

VI Image segmentation - detection of discontinuities- point, line, 4 20% edge, edge-based image segmentation- edge linking and boundary detection Region based segmentation- region growing, region splitting and 3 merging

END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Note: Each part shall have questions uniformly covering both the modules in it.

Course Year of Course Name L-T-P Credits Code Introduction BT362 Sustainable Energy Processes 3-0-0 3 2016

Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To introduce the current and potential future energy systems, covering resources, extraction, conversion, and applications, with emphasis on meeting regional and global energy needs in a sustainable manner. Syllabus Classification of energy, extraction, conversion, and applications of solar energy, wind energy, ocean energy, biomass energy, fuel cells and hydro-dynamic systems, merits and demerits of various energy systems, energy storage.

Expected outcome Students who successfully complete this course should be able to i. Identify global and Indian energy sources. ii. Explain capture, conversion and application of solar and wind energy. iii. Explain conversion of biomass to energy. iv. Explain the capture of energy from oceans. v. Explain fuel cells and energy storage routes. Reference Books 1. Bansal N K, Kleemann M, Michael Meliss, Renewable Energy Sources & Conversion Technology, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990. 2. Boyle, Godfrey, Renewable Energy, 3/e, Oxford University Press, 2012. 3. S P Sukhatme, Solar Energy - Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage, 2/e, Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing company, New Delhi,1996. 4. Pramod Jain, Wind Energy Engineering, McGraw Hill, 2011. 5. Donald L Klass, Biomass for Renewable Energy, Fuels and Chemicals, Academic Press, 1998. Course Plan Sem. Exam Module Contents Hours Marks I General classification of energy. Conventional and non- 7 15% conventional. Renewable and non-renewable. Global and Indian energy sources. Global and Indian energy consumption. Problems of fossil fuels. Environmental aspects of energy utilization. Energy and sustainable development. Energy planning. Renewable energy sources, potentials, achievements and applications. II Solar energy. Solar radiation. Solar thermal systems. Flat 7 15% plate and concentrating collectors. Solar desalination. Solar pond. Solar cookers. Solar dryers. Solar thermal electric power plant. Solar photovoltaic conversion. Semiconductor and thin film technology. Solar cells. Solar photovoltaic power generation. Hybrid systems. Merits and limitations of solar energy. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

III Wind energy. Availability of wind energy, Site 7 15% characteristics, Wind turbine types-horizontal axis and vertical axis-design principles of wind turbine. Wind power plants, Wind energy storage. Safety and environmental aspects. Merits and limitations of wind energy. IV Biomass energy. Biomass resources, Biomass conversion 7 15% technologies-direct combustion, pyrolysis, biomass gasification. Biogas production. Biomethanation as an aid to environment improvement. Bioethanol, biodiesel and biobutanol production. Hydrogen as fuel. Biohydrogen production. Storage of hydrogen. SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Energy from the oceans. Ocean thermal electric conversion. 7 20% Tidal energy conversion. Geothermal energy conversion. Hydro power-global and Indian scenario. Positive and negative attributes of hydropower. Electricity from hydropower. Small hydropower. VI Fuel cells. Alkaline fuel cells. Phosphoric acid fuel cell. 7 20% Molten carbonate fuel cell. Solid oxide fuel cell, Solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell. Magneto-hydrodynamic systems. Electric vehicles. Energy storage routes like thermal, chemical, mechanical, electrical storage. Batteries. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 hours

The question paper consists of Part A, Part B and Part C.

Part A consists of three questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering Modules I and II. The student has to answer two questions (15×2=30 marks). Part B consists of three questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering Modules III and IV. The student has to answer two questions (15×2=30 marks). Part C consists of three questions of 20 marks each uniformly covering Modules V and VI. The student has to answer two questions (20×2=40 marks). For each question there can be a maximum of 4 subparts.

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of Introduction Code Design of Biological Wastewater BT461 3-0-0 3 2016 Treatment Systems Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To provide the necessary theoretical background for the design of most common biological waste treatment systems. Syllabus Characteristics and impacts of wastewater on the environment, basic design considerations, types of biological treatment processes and reactors, aerobic suspended growth systems, anaerobic digesters, design consideration for upflow anaerobic sludge blanket reactors, biogas production.

Expected outcome A student who successfully completes this course will be able to i. Explain the characteristics of wastewater. ii. Identify different types of reactors for wastewater treatment. iii. Design a completely mixed activated sludge system. iv. Explain the design features of an upflow anaerobic sludge blanket reactor. v. Explain the factors affecting biogas production.

Reference Books 1. G Karia, R A Christian, Wastewater Treatment: Concepts and Design Approach, 2/e, PHI Learning Pvt., Ltd., 2013. 2. P Venugopala Rao, Textbook of Environmental Engineering, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2002. 3. Metcalf & Eddy, Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse, 4/e, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2003. 4. M Narayana Rao, Amal K Datta, Waste Water Treatment: Rational Methods of Design and Industrial Practices, 3/e, Oxford & IBH Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 5. R S Khoiyangbam, Navindu Gupta, Sushil Kumar, Biogas Technology: Towards Sustainable Development, The Energy and Resources Institute (TERI), 2011. Course Plan Sem. Exam Module Contents Hours Marks Wastewater-origin, characteristics, impacts of wastewater on the environment, basic design considerations-estimation of wastewater quantities, variation in wastewater flow rates- I average daily flow, maximum daily flow, peak hourly flow, 5 15% minimum daily flow, minimum hourly flow, process flow sheet, reactor considerations.

Objectives and fundamentals of biological treatment, types of biological treatment processes, types of reactors used for II wastewater treatment process, kinetics of biological treatment 5 15% systems-batch and continuous systems, biological nitrogen removal, biological phosphorous removal. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

III Aerobic suspended growth systems-Conventional activated sludge processes and its modifications-theoretical principles, design of completely mixed activated sludge system, F/M ratio, hydraulic loading, MLSS, MLVSS, sludge age, sludge 8 15% return, calculation of the reactor volume, production and removal of excess sludge, sludge volume index, Solids Retention Time (SRT) or Mean Cell Residence Time, oxygen requirements. IV Aerobic attached growth system-Trickling filters-theoretical principles, classification, design principles, process design considerations, Oxidation ponds-construction and design 8 15% considerations, aerobic sludge digestion, waste stabilization ponds, oxidation ditches-theory and design, factors affecting the design, theory and design of rotating biological contactors SECOND INTERNAL EXAM V Fundamentals of anaerobic treatment, types of anaerobic digesters-conventional systems, high-rate systems and combined treatment systems, design of upflow anaerobic sludge blanket reactors, anaerobic sequencing batch reactor, 8 20% anaerobic filters-upflow and downflow anaerobic filters, sludge treatment and disposal, sludge digestion, sludge drying, sludge conditioning, sludge drying characteristics. VI Biogas technology-microbiology of biogas production, process parameters for a biogas plant, biogas yield from different substrates, methods to enhance biogas production- effect of heating, insulation and stirring on gas production, basic components of a biogas plant, biogas plant designs- 8 20% continuous type plants, semi-continuous plants, fixed dome type, floating gasholder digester (KVIC),kinetic models for predicting biogas production, design equations of biogas plants. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 hours

The question paper consists of Part A, Part B and Part C.

For each question there can be a maximum of 4 subparts.

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 hours

The question paper consists of Part A, Part B and Part C.

For each question there can be a maximum of 4 subparts.

Year of Course Code Course Name L-T-P-Credits Introduction ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT CE482 3-0-0-3 2016 ASSESSMENT

Prerequisites: Nil

Courseobjectives:  To study the various types of environmental pollution  To study the impact of various types of pollutants and their assessment techniques Syllabus: Pollution, Types. Air pollution-sources, effects, types of pollutants. Water pollution, characteristics of water pollutants, Solid wastes, sources, types, soil pollution, pesticide pollution. Noise pollution, Impacts, positive and negative Environmental impact assessment, steps of doing EIA, methodology adopted, EIA procedure in India, Case studies. Course Outcomes:  The students will have a basic knowledge of various pollution sources and their impacts Text Books / References: 1. B.C Punmia , “Waste Water Engineering”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2. Dr. PN Modi, “Sewage Treatment & Disposal and Waste water Engineering”, Standard Book House, New Delhi 3. John Glasson, Riki Therivel & S Andrew Chadwick “Introduction to EIA” University College London Press Limited 4. Larry W Canter, “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill Inc. , Newyork. 5. Mackenzie L Davis, Introduction to Environmental Engineering, McGraw hill Education (India) 6. Peavy H S, Rowe, D.R. Tchobanaglous “Environmental Engineering” Mc Graw Hill Education 7. Rau G J and Wooten C.D “EIA Analysis Hand Book” McGraw Hill 8. Robert A Corbett “Standard Handbook of Environmental Engineering” McGraw Hill COURSE PLAN End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks % INTRODUCTION: Classification of Pollution and Pollutants, AIR POLLUTION: Primary and Secondary Pollutants, air I pollutants-sulfur dioxide- nitrogen dioxide, carbon monoxide, 7 15 Impact of air pollutants on human, vegetation and environment, , Ambient Air Quality Standards WATER POLLUTION: Point and Non-point Source of Pollution, Major Pollutants of Water, Physical, chemical and biological II 7 15 characteristics of water , Water borne diseases, Water Quality standards

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION SOLID WASTE: Classification and sources of Solid Waste, Characteristics of Solid Waste, e waste, Radioactive wastes III LAND/SOIL POLLUTION: Effects of urbanization on land 6 15 degradation, Impact of Modern Agriculture on Soil, pesticide pollution, Effect on Environment NOISE POLLUTION: Sources of Noise, Effects of Noise, IV measurement of noise, Equivalent sound pressure level, Control 6 15, measures SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Impacts of pollutants, types, scale of impact-Global, local

pollutants. Climate change, Ozone layer depletion, Deforestation, 8 20 V land degradation Environmental impact assessment, Need for EIA, EIA Procedure-Screening, Scoping, EIA procedure in India, VI Impact analysis- checklists, matrix methods, overlay analysis, 8 20 Case studies of EIA END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN (External Evaluation) :

Maximum Marks :100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs

Part A -Module I & II : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part B - Module III & IV: 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part C - Module V &VI : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 20 marks each

Note : 1.Each part should have at least one question from each module

2.Each question can have a maximum of 4 subdivisions (a,b,c,d)

Course Year of Course Name L-T-P-C Code Introduction GEOINFORMATICS FOR CE486 3-0-0-3 2016 INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Prerequisites: Nil Course objectives:  To expose the concept of GIS and Remote sensing  To introduce the applications of GIS and Remote sensing for infrastructure management Syllabus: Remote Sensing - Energy sources and radiation principles - Data acquisition - Multispectral, Thermal and Microwave remote sensing -; Elements of visual image interpretation- Introduction to Digital Image processing - Coordinate Systems – Map projections - GIS: Components of GIS - Data input and editing –GIS output- Data visualization -Digital Elevation Models and Digital Terrain Models – Mapping - Site suitability analysis - Network Analysis Course Outcomes: The students will  Understand various satellite data products and their uses.  Know about the Geospatial data and its importance in Spatialanalysis.  Apply Geoinformatics techniques in various engineering applications and for infrastructure development. Text Books / References: 1. Burrough P.P. &McDonnel, R.A. (1998) Principles of GIS, Oxford University Press 2. Chang, K (2008), Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill 3. Davis, B. E. (2001), GIS: A visual approach, Onword Press 4. F.F Sabins(Jr.), Remote Sensing : Principals and Interpretation, Freeman & Co., San Francisco, 1978 5. Joseph, G., Fundamentals of Remote Sensing, Universities Press (2003) 6. Keith P.B., Thompson et. Al. (Ed.), Remote Sensing and Water Resources Management, American Water Resources Association, Urbana Illinois, 1973. 7. Kennie, T.J.M. and Matthews, M.C., Remote Sensing in Civil Engineering, Surrey University Press (1985) 8. Lo, C.P. and Albert Yeung , Concepts and Techniques of GIS , Prentice Hall, 2nd Ed. 2006 9. M Anji Reddy(2001), Remote Sensing and Geographic Information Systems, B S Publications, Hyderabad 10. Panigrahi,N (2008), Geographical Information Science, University Press 11. R.N. Colwel (Ed.), Manual of Remote Sensing, Vol. I & II, American Society of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing, Falls Church, Va. (1983) 12. Schowengerdt, R. A.,Remote sensing, Models and Methods for image processing, Academic Press (2009) 13. T.M. Lillesand and R.W.Kiefer, Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, 1979 COURSE PLAN End Sem Module Contents Hours Exam Marks % Remote Sensing: Energy sources and radiation principles- I 7 15 Interaction of EM energy with atmosphere and surface features,

spectral reflectance patterns, Data acquisition - Multistage and multispectral remote sensing concept

Classification of Remote sensing systems - Optical, Thermal and Microwave remote sensing. II Image Interpretation: Elements of visual image interpretation – 7 15 Image interpretation keys - Introduction to Digital Image processing.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Coordinate Systems: Geographic coordinate systems- approximations of earth, ellipsoid and geoid models, geodetic III 7 15 datum and vertical datum, coordinate transformation, Map projections-concepts, properties, and types. GIS: Geographical concepts and terminology, Components of GIS, Spatial and non-spatial data, Vector and raster data; Methods of data input, Spatial data editing; IV Vector data analysis-buffering, overlay, slivers; Raster data 7 15 analysis- categories; GIS output: cartographic and non-cartographic output

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Digital Elevation Models and Digital Terrain Models;

Land use/ Land cover mapping, Ground Water Potential Zonation 7 20 V Mapping, Hazard Zonation Mapping.

Site suitability analysis for Residential area, Industrial area, Recreational Area, Solid Waste Disposal, Water treatment plant VI 7 20 Network Analysis- Water supply line, Sewer line, Power line, Telecommunication,Road network

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER PATTERN (End semester examination)

Maximum Marks : 100 Duration : 3 hours

Part A -Module I & II : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part B - Module III & IV: 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part C - Module V &VI : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 20 marks each

Note : 1.Each part should have at least one question from each module

2.Each question can have a maximum of 4 subdivisions (a,b,c,d)

Year of Course Code Course Name L-T-P-Credits Introduction CE488 DISASTER MANAGEMENT 3-0-0-3 2016

Course Objectives  To provide an overview of the common hazards and their dynamics  To inculcate the basic concepts of disaster management Syllabus Fundamental concepts of hazards and disasters - Basic concept of Earth as a system and its component sub systems - . Climate Change - Introduction to key concepts and terminology of hazard, vulnerability, exposure, risk, crisis, emergencies, Disasters, Resilience - Natural Disasters - Earth quakes, Landslides. Floods, Coastal disasters, Tidal waves, Tsunamis. Nature of Impacts - Anthropogenic Disasters – Soil degradation and desertification -water and atmospheric pollution -Hazard and disaster management plans for floods, tidal waves. Expected Outcome The students will i. get general ideas about the processes involved in natural and anthropogenic disasters ii. understand the concepts of disaster management and measures to mitigate and contain common episodes of disasters References: 1. Andrew, S., “Environmental Modeling with GIS and Remote Sensing”, John Willey and sons, 2002 2. Ariyabandu, M. and Sahni P. (Eds), “Disaster Risk Reduction in South Asia”, Prentice- Hall (India), 2003. 3. Bell, F.G., “Geological Hazards: Their assessment, avoidance and mitigation”, E & FN SPON Routledge, London. 1999 4. Bossler, J.D., “Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2001 5. David Alexander, “Natural Disasters”, Research Press, New Delhi, 1993 6. Matthews, J.A., “Natural hazards and Environmental Change”, Bill McGuire, Ian Mason, 2002 7. Nick Carter. W., “Disaster Management - A Disaster Manager's Handbook”. Asian Development Bank, Philippines. 1991 8. United Nations , Mitigating Natural Disasters, Phenomena, Effects and options, A Manual for policy makers and planners, New York, 1991 COURSE PLAN End Module Contents Hours Sem. Exam Marks Fundamental concepts of hazards and disasters: Introduction to key concepts and terminology of hazard, vulnerability, exposure, risk, crisis, emergencies, Disasters, Resilience. I 7 15% Basic concept of Earth as a system and its component sub systems. Climate Change vis-a-vis the interrelationships of the subsystems- Green House Effect and Global warming, basic

ideas about their causes and effects.

Types of Natural Disasters I- Earth quakes, Landslides. Nature II of impacts. 7 15%

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Types of Natural Disasters II- Floods, Coastal disasters- III Cyclones, Tsunamis. Nature of impacts. 7 15%

Types of Anthropogenic Disasters I– soil and soil degradation, IV desertification. 7 15%

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Types of Anthropogenic Disasters II-Fundamental concepts of 7 20% V water and atmospheric pollution. VI Hazard and disaster management plans for floods, tidal waves. 7 20% END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN (End Semester Examination)

Maximum Marks :100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs

Part A -Module I & II : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part B - Module III & IV: 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part C - Module V &VI : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 20 marks each

Note : 1.Each part should have at least one question from each module

2.Each question can have a maximum of 4 subdivisions (a,b,c,d)

Course L-T-P- Year of Course Name code Credits Introduction CH482 PROCESS UTILITIES AND PIPE LINE DESIGN 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives 1. To impart the basic concepts of project engineering 2. To develop understanding about process auxiliaries and utilities in process industries Syllabus Process Auxiliaries. Piping design, Piping insulation, Piping fittings, Valves, Pumps, Process control and instrumentation diagram. Process Utilities: Process Water, Steam, Compressors and Vacuum Pumps, Methods of vacuum development and their limitations, materials handling under vacuum. Refrigeration and Chilling systems, Oil heating systems, Nitrogen systems Expected Outcome After successful completion of the course the students will be able to i. Acquire the overall knowledge about the process plant. ii. Understand the importance of process auxiliaries and utilities in process industries. iii. Learn the conceptual design of chemical process plant. iv. Build a bridge between theoretical and practical concepts used for process auxiliaries and utilities in any process industry.

References: 1. F.C. Vibrandt and C.E. Dryden, “Chemical Engineering Plant Design”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition. 2. Jack Broughton; Process utility systems; Institution of Chem. Engineers, U.K. 3. M.S. Peters and Timmerhaus, “Plant design and Economics for Chemical Engineers”, Mc Graw Hill 3rd Edition. 4. Roger Hunt and Ed Bausbacher, “Process Plant layout and Piping Design” PTR Prentice-Hall Inc., Course Plan Sem. Mod Contents Hours Exam ule Marks Process Auxiliaries: Basic considerations and flow diagrams in chemical engineering plant design. Piping design: Selection of material, pipe sizes, working pressure, Basic principles of piping design, piping drawings, pipe installations, overhead I 7 15 installations, Process steam piping, selection and determination of steam – pipe size, Piping insulation, application of piping insulation, weather proof and fire resisting pipe insulation jackets, piping fittings, pipe joints Valves: Types of valves, selection criteria of valves for various systems. Pumps: Types of pumps, NPSH requirement, pump II location, pump piping, pump piping support. Process control and 7 15 instrumentation diagram, control system design for process auxiliaries.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Process Utilities: Process Water: Sources of water, hard and soft water, Requisites of industrial water and its uses, Methods of water treatment, Chemical softening, Demineralization, Resins III used for water softening, Water for boiler use, cooling purposes, 7 15 cooling towers, drinking and process water treatment, reuse and conservation of water, 27 50% water resources management, waste water treatment and disposal. Steam: Steam generation and its application in chemical process plants, distribution and utilization, boilers, design of efficient IV steam heating systems, steam economy, condensate utilization, 7 15 steam traps, their characteristics, selection and application, waste heat utilization SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Compressors and Vacuum Pumps: Types of compressors and vacuum pumps and their performance characteristics, Methods of vacuum development and their limitations, materials handling 7 20 V under vacuum, lubrication and oil removal in compressors and pumps, instrument air. Refrigeration and Chilling systems. Oil heating systems, VI 7 20 Nitrogen systems. END SEMESTEREXAMINATION

Question Paper Pattern:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hours

Part A: There shall be Three questions uniformly covering Modules 1 and 2, each carrying 15 marks, of which the student has to answer any Two questions. At the most 4 subdivisions can be there in one main question with a total of 15 marks for all the subdivisions put together. (2 x15= 30 Marks)

Part B: There shall be Three questions uniformly covering Modules 3 and 4, each carrying 15 marks, of which the student has to answer any Two questions. At the most 4 subdivisions can be there in one main question with a total of 15 marks for all the subdivisions put together. (2 x15= 30 Marks)

Part C: There shall be Three questions uniformly covering Modules 5 and 6, each carrying 20 marks, of which the student has to answer any Two questions. At the most 4 subdivisions can be there in one main question with a total of 20 marks for all the subdivisions put together. (2 x20= 40 Marks)

Course L-T-P- Year of Course Name code Credits Introduction CH484 FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To expose the students to the fundamental knowledge required in the development of fuel cell technology. Syllabus Introduction to Fuel Cells and Fuel Cell Technology, General Thermodynamics, Reaction Kinetics, Charge and Mass Transport, Overview of Fuel Cell Types, Stack Design, Fuel Cell Characterization, Hydrogen Economy. Expected Outcome At the end of the course the students will be able to: 1. Know the fundamentals of electrochemistry, thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and heat and mass transfer, appropriate for the design or review of components of fuel cells and fuel cell systems. 2. Analyze the fuel cell technology and compare different types of fuel cell systems. 3. Calculate the various losses in fuel cells and analyze the fuel cell power plant subsystems. 4. Defend the significance of fuel cell technology in the new global energy scenario. 5. Distinguish the expectances of hydrogen as a fuel and energy vector in the context of renewable energy. References Books: 1. Andreas Zuttel; Andreas Borgschulte; Louis Schdaptach, Hydrogen as a future energy carrier, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co., KGaA, Weinheim, 2008. 2. Costamagna, P.; Srinivasan, S, J Power Sources 2001, 102, 242-269.. 3. Frano Barbir. PEM Fuel Cells: Theory and Practice. Elsevier, 2005 4. Fuel Cell Handbook,7the Edn., EG & G Technical Services, Nov 2004 5. Hordeski, M. F. Alternative Fuels: The Future of Hydrogen, The Fairmont Press: Lilburn, GA, 2007. 6. Kordesch, K.; Simader, G. Fuel Cells and Their Applications. VCH: 1996 7. Larminie, J.; Dicks, A. Fuel Cell Systems Explained. John Wiely & Sons Ltd: Chichester, 1999. 8. Ryan P. O’Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella & Fritz B. Printz, Fuel Cell Fundamentals, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New Jersey, 2006 9. Vielstich, W, Gasteiger, H. A. Lamm, A. (Eds):Handbook of Fuel Cells- Fundamentals, Technology and Applications. John Wiely & Sons Ltd: NY, 2003; Vols1-4 Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours exam marks Introduction: Fuel Cell, Brief History of fuel cells, Types of Fuel Cells, Working of a PEM fuel Cell, Fuel I Cell and conventional processes – comparison, Energy & 7 15% power relations, units, Application scenarios, Advantages and disadvantages.

General Thermodynamics: Enthalpy-Heat potential of fuel, Gibb's free energy-Work potential of fuel, Reversible voltage - NERNST Equation, Voltage and P, T and concentration dependence – examples, Faraday's Laws, Efficiency: thermodynamic, voltage and fuel. Reaction Kinetics: Electrochemical reaction fundamentals, electrode kinetics, Charge transfer and activations energy, Exchange current density - slow and fast reactions, Potential and equilibrium - galvanic II 7 15% potential, Reaction rate and potential - Butler Volmer equation & Tafel equation, Electrocatalysts and reaction kinetics – typical exchange current densities, Electrode design basics FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Charge and Mass Transport: Charge transport resistances, voltage losses, Ionic and electronic conductivites, Ionic conduction in different FC electrolytes: Aquesous, polymeric and ceramic, Diffusive III 7 20% transport & voltage loss: Limiting current density, Nerstian and kenetic effect, Convective transport: flow channels, gas diffusion / porous layer, gas velocity, pressure, Flow channel configurations Overview of Fuel Cell Types: PAFC, PEMFC, AFC, MCFC, SOFC. Major Cell Components, Material IV 7 20% Properties, Processes and Operating Conditions of PEMFC. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Stack Design: Sizing of a Fuel Cell Stack, Stack Configuration, Uniform distribution of Reactants, Heat removal, Stack Clamping V 7 15% Fuel Cell Diagnostics: Polarization Curve, Current Interrupt, AC Impedance Spectroscopy, Pressure drop as a diagnostic tool. Fuel Cell System Design: Hydrogen-Oxygen Systems, Hydrogen-Air Systems, Fuel Cell Systems with Fuel Processor, System Efficiency VI 7 15% Fuel Cells and Hydrogen Economy: Hydrogen Energy Systems, Hydrogen Energy Technologies, Transition to Hydrogen Economy END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

Question Paper Pattern

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hours

Part B: There shall be Three questions uniformly covering Modules 3 and 4, each carrying 20 marks, of which the student has to answer any Two questions. At the most 4 subdivisions can be there in one main question with a total of 20 marks for all the subdivisions put together. (2 x20= 40 Marks)

Part C: There shall be Three questions uniformly covering Modules 5 and 6, each carrying 15 marks, of which the student has to answer any Two questions. At the most 4 subdivisions can be there in one main question with a total of 15 marks for all the subdivisions put together. (2 x15= 30 Marks)

COURSE YEAR OF CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C INTRODUCTION EC482 Biomedical Engineering 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course objectives:  To introduce basics of biomedical engineering technology  To understand the anatomy & physiology of major systems of the body in designing equipment for medical treatments.  To impart knowledge about the principle and working of different types of bio-medical electronic equipment/devices. Syllabus: Human body-overview, Physiological systems of body, Measurement of physiological parameters, Assisting and therapeutic devices, Medical laboratory equipments, Telemetry in patient care, Patient safety, Medical imaging system Expected outcome: The students will be able: i. To understand diagnosis and therapy related equipments. ii. To understand the problem and identify the necessity of equipment for diagnosis and therapy. iii. To understand the importance of electronics engineering in medical field. iv. To understand the importance of telemetry in patient care Text Books: 1. K S Kandpur, “Hand book of Biomedical instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill 2nd e/d. 2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2004 References: 1. Barbara Christe, Introduction to Biomedical Instrumentation, Cambridge University Press, 2008. 2. J J Carr, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, 4ed, Pearson Education 3. John G Webster, “Medical Instrumentation application and design”, 3ed,John Wiley 4. Richard Aston, “Principle of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”, Merrill Education/Prentice Hall. Course Plan Module Course content End Sem. Hours Exam Marks Introduction to bio-medical instrumentation system, overview 1 of anatomy and physiological systems of the body. Sources of bio-electric potential: Resting and action potential, 15% I propagation of action potentials. Bioelectric potentials 2 examples (ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG, EGG, etc introduction only.)

Electrode theory: Nernst relation Bio potential electrodes: Microelectrodes, skin surface 1 electrodes, needle electrodes. Instrumentation for clinical laboratory: Bio potential amplifiers- instrumentation amplifiers, carrier amplifiers, isolation 2 amplifiers, chopper amplifiers Heart and cardiovascular system (brief discussion), electro conduction system of the heart. Electrocardiography, ECG 3 machine block diagram, ECG lead configurations, ECG recording system, Einthoven triangle, analysis of ECG signals. Measurement of blood pressure: Direct, indirect and relative II 15% methods of blood pressure measurement, auscultatory method, 2 oscillometric and ultrasonic non-invasive pressure measurements. Measurement of blood flow: Electromagnetic blood flow 2 meters and ultrasonic blood flow meters. FIRST INTERNAL EXAM The human nervous system. Neuron, action potential of brain, brain waves, types of electrodes, placement of electrodes, 2 evoked potential, EEG recording, analysis of EEG. Electromyography: Nerve conduction velocity, instrumentation 1 system for EMG. III 15% Physiology of respiratory system (brief discussion), Respiratory parameters, spirometer, body plethysmographs, gas exchange 2 and distribution. Instruments for clinical laboratory: Oxymeters, pH meter, blood 3 cell counter, flame photometer, spectrophotometer Therapeutic Equipments: Principle, block schematic diagram, 15% working and applications of: pacemakers, cardiac defibrillators, IV 6 heart–lung machine, dialyzers, surgical diathermy equipment, ventilators SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Medical Imaging systems (Basic Principle only): X-ray imaging - Properties and production of X-rays, X-ray machine, 2 applications of X-rays in medicine. Computed Tomograpy: Principle, image reconstruction, 2 V scanning system and applications. 20% Ultrasonic imaging systems: Basic pulse echo system, propagation of ultrasonic through tissues and reflections, 3 display types, A-Scan, B-Scan, M-Scan, applications, real- time ultrasonic imaging systems and probes. Magnetic Resonance Imaging Basic NMR components, VI – 3 20% Biological effects and advantages of NMR imaging

Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry system, application of telemetry in medicine, single channel 2 telemetry system for ECG and temperature Patient Safety: Electric shock hazards, leakage current, safety 1 codes for electro medical equipments END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern ( End semester exam)

Course code Course Name L-T-P -C Year of Introduction EE484 Control Systems 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : NIL Course Objectives  To give the knowledge of Mathematical model of physical systems.  To impart knowledge of different control equipment.  To provide knowhow of analysing systems with mathematical model. Syllabus- Linear Time Invariant systems: Open loop-and closed loop control systems, Transfer function: Mechanical, Electromechanical systems. block diagram representation, signal flow graph. Control system components. Time domain analysis of control systems. PID controllers, Concept of stability, Frequency domain analysis, Introduction to Statespace. Expected outcome. The students will have the i. Concept of modelling in transfer function and state space domain ii. Ability to analyse stability of linear time invariant systems. Text Books: 1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Fourth edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Nagarath I.J. and Gopal M., “Control System Engineering”, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi. 3. Richard C. Dorf, Robert. H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, New Delhi – 11th Edition, 2007. References: 1. Gibson & Tutter, “Control System Components”, Mc Graw Hill. 2. Kuo B.C., “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 6ed.,1991. 3. Norman S. Nise, “Control Systems Engineering”, 5th Edition, Wiley Eastern, 2007. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Open loop-and closed loop control systems: Transfer function -T.F of simple linear time invariant systems - Mechanical I andElectromechanical systems – Force voltage and force current 9 15% analogy - block diagram representation - blockdiagram reduction - signal flow graph - Mason's gain formula - characteristics equation. Control system components: DC and AC servo motor – synchro - II 5 15% magnetic amplifier - gyroscope - stepper motor - Tacho meter. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Time domain analysis of control systems: Transient and steady state responses - test signals - time domain specifications - first and III second order systems - impulse and step responses - steady state 7 15% error analysis - static error coefficient of type 0,1,2 systems - Dynamic error coefficients PID controllers, Concept of stability: stability of feedback system - IV Routh's stability criterion - Root locus -General rules for 7 15% constructing Root loci - effect of addition of poles and zeros. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION V Frequency domain analysis: Introduction - Bode plot-Polar plot- 6 20%

gain margin - phase margin. Introduction to state space: State concept, state equation of simple VI systems, physical and phase variables, Eigen value and 8 20% eigenvectors, conversion of state space model to transfer function. END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3Hrs.

Part A: 8 compulsory questions.

One question from each module of Module I - IV; and two each from Module V & VI.

Student has to answer all questions. (8 x5)=40 Part B: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules I & II. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Part C: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules III & IV. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Part D: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules V & VI. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code. Credits Introduction EE482 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course Objectives  To enable the students to understand the concept of energy management  To understand the different methods used to control peak demand  To understand the energy management opportunities in different systems  To understand how the use of energy audit.  To understand the different methods used for the economic analysis of energy projects

Syllabus General principles of Energy management and Energy management planning - Peak Demand controls - Energy management opportunities in electrical systems and HVAC systems – Reactive power management – Energy audit – cogeneration system – Economic analysis of energy projects

Expected outcome. The students will be able to: i. Understand the different methods used to reduce energy consumption ii. Know energy audit iii. Do economic analysis of energy projects Text Book/Refernces: 1. Albert Thumann, William J. Younger, Handbook of Energy Audits, CRC Press, 2003 2. Charles M. Gottschalk , Industrial energy conservation, John Wiley &Sons, 1996. 3. Craig B. Smith, Kelly E Parmenter Energy management principles, Elsevier, 2ed, 2015 . 4. D. Yogi Goswami, Frank Kreith, Energy Management and Conservation Handbook , CRC Press,2007. 5. G.G. Rajan , Optimizing energy efficiencies in industry, Tata McGraw Hill, Pub. Co., 2001. 6. IEEE recommended practice for energy management in industrial and commercial facilities, IEEE std 739 - 1995 (Bronze book). 7. M Jayaraju and Premlet , Introduction to Energy Conservation And Management, Phasor Books, 2008. 8. Paul W O'Callaghan, Energy management, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1993 9. Wayne C.Turner, Energy management Hand Book, The Fairmount Press, Inc., 1997.

Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks General principles of Energy management and Energy management planning. I 6 Peak Demand controls, Methodologies, Types of Industrial Loads, Optimal Load scheduling-Case studies 15% Energy management opportunities in Lighting and Motors. II Electrolytic Process and Electric heating, Case studies 8 15% FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Types of boilers, Combustion in boilers, Performances evaluation, 15% Feed water treatment, Blow down, Energy conservation opportunities in boiler. Properties of steam, Assessment of steam distribution losses, Steam III 8 leakages, Steam trapping, Condensate and flash steam recovery system, Identifying opportunities for energy savings. Classification, General fuel economy measures in furnaces, Excess air, Heat Distribution, Temperature control, Draft control, Waste heat recovery. HVAC system: Coefficient of performance, Capacity, Factors 15% affecting Refrigeration and Air conditioning system performance IV and savings opportunities. 7 Classification and Advantages of Waste Heat Recovery system, analysis of waste heat recovery for Energy saving opportunities SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Energy audit -Definition, Need, Types of energy audit, Energy audit 20% Instruments. V Cogeneration-Types and Schemes, Optimal operation of 7 cogeneration plants- Case study. Computer aided energy management. Economic analysis methods-cash flow model, time value of money, 20% evaluation of proposals, pay-back method, average rate of return VI 6 method, internal rate of return method, present value method, life cycle costing approach, Case studies. END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3Hrs.

Part A: 8 compulsory questions.

One question from each module of Module I - IV; and two each from Module V & VI.

Part C: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules III & IV. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Part D: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules V & VI. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Course Course Name L-T-P -C Year of code Introduction EE486 SOFT COMPUTING 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course Objectives  To provide the concepts of soft computing techniques such as neural networks, fuzzy systems, genetic algorithms

Syllabus Introduction To Soft Computing And Neural Networks , Fuzzy Sets And Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Sets, Neuro- Fuzzy Modelling , Machine Learning, Machine Learning Approach to Knowledge Acquisition

Expected outcome. The students will be able to get ideas on : i. Artificial Intelligence, Various types of production systems, characteristics of production systems. ii. Neural Networks, architecture, functions and various algorithms involved. iii. Fuzzy Logic, Various fuzzy systems and their functions. iv. Genetic algorithms, its applications and advances

Text Books: 1. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications, and Programming Techniques”, Pearson Edn., 1991 2. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, EijiMizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2008 3. S.Y Kung , Digital Neural Network , Prentice-Hall of India, 1993

References: 1. Amit Konar, “Artificial Intelligence and Soft Computing”, First Edition,CRC Press, 2000. 2. David E. Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Pearson Edn., 2006 3. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, “Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and Applications”, Prentice Hall, 1995 4. Mitchell Melanie, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithm”, Prentice Hall, 1998 5. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks: A Comprehensive Foundation”, Prentice Hall Course Plan End Sem Module Contents Hours .Exam Marks Introduction To Soft Computing And Neural Networks : Evolution of Computing - Soft Computing Constituents – From Conventional AI to I 7 15% Computational Intelligence - Adaptive Networks – Feed forward Networks – Supervised Learning Neural Networks – Radial Basis Function Networks - Reinforcement Learning – Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks – Adaptive II Resonance architectures. 7 15% Fuzzy Sets And Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Sets – Operations on Fuzzy Sets – Fuzzy Relations - Fuzzy Rules and Fuzzy Reasoning FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Fuzzy Inference Systems – Fuzzy Logic – Fuzzy Expert Systems – Fuzzy Decision Making III 7 15% Neuro-Fuzzy Modeling : Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems – Coactive Neuro-Fuzzy Modeling – Classification and Regression Trees Data Clustering Algorithms – Rulebase Structure Identification Neuro-Fuzzy IV 7 15% Control. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Machine Learning : Machine Learning Techniques – Machine Learning V 7 20% Using Neural Nets – Genetic Algorithms (GA) Applications of GA in Machine Learning - Machine Learning Approach to Knowledge Acquisition. Support Vector Machines for Learning – Linear VI 7 20% Learning Machines – Support Vector Classification – Support Vector Regression - Applications. END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3Hrs.

Part A: 8 compulsory questions.

One question from each module of Module I - IV; and two each from Module V & VI.

Part C: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules III & IV. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Part D: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules V & VI. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Course code Course Name L-T-P -C Year of Introduction EE488 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : NIL Course Objectives  Explain the General function of Industrial Automation  Identify Practical Programmable Logic Controller Applications  Identify Types of Industrial Sensors  Explain Robotics Syllabus Types of motion actuators, electrical and mechanical sensors, ladder diagrams, cascade method, Huffman method, Programmable Logic Controllers, Microcomputers: interfacing and programming, Principles of Robotics and applications

Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. Know about motion devices and various in automation ii. Draw ladder diagrams for applications iii. Understand assembly language programs iv. Know about Robotic components Text Book: 1. Pessen , Industrial Automation : Circuit Design and Components , Wiley References: 1. Bartelt , Industrial Automated Systems, Instrumentation and Motion Control, , Cengage 2. Mukhopadyay et al , Industrial Instrumentation, Control and Automation, Jaico Publishing House Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Motion Actuators: Types of Motion and Motion Conversion, I Electric Linear Actuators, Electric Rotary Actuators, Fluid-Power 6 15% Linear Actuators, Fluid-Power Rotating Actuators Sensors: Binary vs. analog sensors, Electric Position sensors: Limit switches, photovoltaic sensors, ultrasonic sensors, inductive II and capacitive and magnetic proximity sensors, Pneumatic 6 15% position sensors: limit valves, back-pressure sensors, coiled spring sensors. Level, pressure, temperature and flow switches FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Electric Ladder Diagrams: Ladder diagrams, sequence charts, Ladder diagram design using sequence charts, cascade method,: single and multi path sequencing systems with and without III 6 15% sustained outputs, Huffman method: sequential systems, stable and unstable states, state assignment.

Programmable Controllers: PLC construction, Programming the IV 6 15% PLC, constructing ladder diagrams for PLCs, SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Microcomputers :Microcomputers for control applications, architecture, computer interfacing, programmable interface V 8 20% adaptors, Ramping a step motor example.

Robotics and Numerical Control : Basic Robot Definitions, Basic manipulator configurations, Numerical Control Systems, Robot VI Kinematics, Robot Grippers, Robot Sensors, Robot Programming, 8 20% General Considerations for Robot Applications

END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3Hrs.

Part A: 8 compulsory questions.

One question from each module of Module I - IV; and two each from Module V & VI.

Part C: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules III & IV. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Part D: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules V & VI. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Programmable Controllers: PLC construction, Programming the IV 6 15% PLC, constructing ladder diagrams for PLCs, SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Microcomputers :Microcomputers for control applications, architecture, computer interfacing, programmable interface V 8 20% adaptors, Ramping a step motor example.

END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3Hrs.

Part A: 8 compulsory questions.

One question from each module of Module I - IV; and two each from Module V & VI.

Part C: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules III & IV. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Part D: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules V & VI. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Course code Course Name L-T-P -C Year of Introduction EE494 Instrumentation Systems 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course Objectives  To introduce the measurement techniques of force, torque, speed, pressure, flow & temperature.  To introduce different types of electronic circuits for measurements and their applications. Syllabus General Concepts ,Generalised Configurations and Functional Description of Measuring Instruments, Measuring Devices, Force and Torque Measurements, Shaft Power Measurements, Pressure and Sound Measurements, Dynamic Testing of Pressure-Measuring Systems, Flow Measurement, Temperature Measurement, Bridge Circuits ,Amplifiers ,Filters, Integration and Differentiation, Voltage-Indicating and Recording Devices,Electromechanical Servo type XT and XY Recorders. Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. Understand and analyze Instrumentation systems. ii. Select proper measurement system for various applications. Text Book: 1. Ernest O Doebelin and Dhanesh N Manik, Measurement Systems, Mc Graw Hill, 6e. References: 1. Neubert H K P, Instrument Transducers, Oxford University Press, 1975 2. Turner and Hill, Instrumentation for Engineers and Scientists, Oxford University Press, 1999 Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks General Concepts : Need for Measurement Systems, Classification of Types of Measurements Applications Generalised Configurations and Functional Description of I Measuring Instruments : Functional Elements of an Instrument , 6 15% Active and Passive Transducers , Analog and Digital Modes of Operation ,Null and Deflection Methods, Input-Output Configurations of Instruments and Measurement Systems Measuring Devices : Motion Measurements : Fundamental Standards, Relative Displacements: Translational and Rotational , Relative Velocity : Translational and Rotational, Relative - Acceleration II Measurements 8 15% Force and Torque Measurements : Standards and calibration , Basic Methods of Force Measurements , Characteristics of Elastic Force Transducers, Torque Measurement on Rotating Shafts FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Shaft Power Measurements : Shaft Power Measurements III 8 15% (Dynamometers ), Vibrating-Wire Force Transducers

Pressure and Sound Measurements: Standards and Calibration , Basic Methods of Pressure Measurements, Deadweight Gages and Manometers , Elastic Transducers, Vibrating-Cylinder and Other Resonant Transducers Dynamic Testing of Pressure-Measuring Systems, High Pressure Measurement, Low Pressure(Vacuum) Measurement, Sound IV Measurements 6 15% Flow Measurement :Local Flow Velocity , Magnitude and Direction , Gross Volume Flow Rate SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Temperature Measurement : Standards and Calibration , Thermal-Expansion Methods ,Thermoelectric Sensors V (Thermocouples ),Electric-Resistance Sensors, Junction 6 20% Semiconductor Sensors ,Digital Thermometers ,Radiation Methods Bridge Circuits ,Amplifiers ,Filters, Integration and Differentiation Voltage-Indicating and Recording Devices : Standards and Calibration , AnalogVoltmeters and Potentiometers VI 8 20% Electrical Instruments : RMS Voltmeter , Ohm Meter , Phase Meter , Q Meter Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters ,Signal GenerationSquare Wave Generation , Electromechanical Servo type XT and XY Recorders END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3Hrs.

Part A: 8 compulsory questions.

One question from each module of Module I - IV; and two each from Module V & VI.

Part C: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules III & IV. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Part D: 3 questions uniformly covering Modules V & VI. Student has to answer any 2 from the 3 questions: (2 x 10) =20. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions (a,b,c,d), if needed.

Course code Course Name L-T-P -Credits Year of Introduction FS482 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEERING 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To enable the students to create an awareness on responsibilities and Human Values, to instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others. Syllabus Human Values - Engineering Ethics – Engineering as Social Experimentations – Engineer‟s responsibility for safety – Responsibilities and Rights – Global Issues. Expected outcome.  The students will be able to apply ethics in society, discuss the ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the society Text Books: 1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003. 2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004. Data Book ( Approved for use in the examination): Nil References: 1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004. 2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009 3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003 4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundametals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001 5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi 2013. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks HUMAN VALUES Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning

– Civic virtue – Respect for others – Living peacefully – Caring – 15%

I Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –

Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality 8 – Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional excellence and stress management. ENGINEERING ETHICS Senses of „Engineering Ethics‟ – Variety of moral issues – Types of 15% inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‟s theory – II Gilligan‟s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – 6 Customs and Religion – Uses of Ethical Theories FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION III Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible 15% Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced Outlook on Law. 7 ENGINEER’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit IV 15% Analysis – Reducing Risk – The Government Regulator‟s Approach to Risk - Chernobyl Case Studies and Bhopal 7 SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS Collegiality and Loyalty – Respect for Authority - Collective 20% Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational V Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination. 6 GLOBAL ISSUES Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development – Engineers as Managers – VI Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors 20% – Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility. 6 END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 hours

Part A – 8 questions (Module 1 to 4 one question each, Module 5 & 6 two questions each) of 2 marks each. All questions are compulsory (8x2 = 16) Part B – 8 questions (Module 1 to 4 one question each, Module 5 & 6 two questions each) of 3 marks each. All questions are compulsory (8x3 = 24) Part C – 12 questions (two questions from each module) of 10 marks each. Student has to answer one question from each module. (6x10=60)

Note: Each question can have a maximum of 4 sub parts, if needed.

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Year of Credits Introduction

FT482 Food Process Engineering 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To introduce different thermal and non-thermal food processing principles.

Syllabus Raw material Preparation, Blanching, Pasteurization, Sterilization, Size reduction, Drying, Psychrometry, Refrigeration, Baking, Frying, Extrusion, Sedimentation, Centrifugation, Minimal Processing, Packaging, Cleaning

Expected outcome.  The students will gain knowledge on various food processes like pasteurization, drying, refrigeration, centrifugation etc. Text Books: 1. James G brennan , Food processing Handbook, Wiley – VCH, 2e. 2. P G Smith , Introduction to Food Process Engineering, Springer, 2e, 2011 3. Zeki Berk Food process engineering and technology, Elsevier, 2013 References: 1. Geankoplis, C.J. “Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003. 2. McCabe W.L., Smith J.C. “Unit Operations in Chemical Engineering”, 7th Edition, McGraw – Hill Int., 2001, 3. Richardson, J.E. etal., “Coulson & Richardson’s Chemical Engineering” Vol.2 (Praticle Technology & Separation Processes”) 5Th Edition, Butterworth – Heinemann / Elsevier, 2003. Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Raw material Preparation and Thermal processing: Food process, Raw material properties, physical, functional, preparation; Cleaning; wet and dry, Peeling methods, sorting and I 7 15% grading, Blanching, Pasteurization, HTST, LTLT, UHT, pasteurizers, microbial inactivation, F, D, Z values

Size Reduction: Size reduction of solids, principles, laws of size reduction, kicks. Bond, rittinger, equipment; roller mill, impact mill, attrition mill, II 7 15% tumbling mills, methods, particle size distribution, energy consumption, homogenization

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Drying and Psychrometry: water activity, moisture content, drying rate curve,EMC, isotherms, III 7 15% Driers;Tray, tunnel,puff, fluidized bed, spray. Rotary drier etc. Freeze dryingDrying time prediction. Dehydrated productsRehydration

characterestics psychrometry, basic principles, psychrometric chart, terms, numerical solving

Refrigeration: Methods, equipment , VA, VC refrigeration systems, components; compressor, condenser, evaporator, refrigerant, COP Chilling and freezing , freezing kinetics-models, effect of low IV 7 15% temperature on food spoilage, prediction of freezing time; Plank’s,Pham’s method, Thawing, Frozen food storage, freezer types. Refrigerated transportation; land, marine, air transportation Precooling methods SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Baking and Frying process Baking Process, Frying process- principle, heat and mass transfer, machinery, products, frying oils, kinetics of oil uptake Extrusion, principle, extruded products V 7 20% Sedimentation and centrifugation; principle, basic equations, settling tank, baffled. Centrifugation, tubular, disc bowl,decanter, basket centrifuge.

Minimal processing : Ohmic heating, RF heating, Pulsed Electric field heating, High VI pressure processing, Food Irradiation, Ultrasound, Hurdle Technology 7 20% Food filling and packaging systems, packaging materials, CAP, MAP, Vacuum. END SEMESTER EXAM Question paper pattern: Maximum marks:100 Exam Duration : 3 hours

The question paper shall consist of three parts. Part A : Three questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering modules 1 & 2. The students have to answer any two full questions. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions. Part B : Three questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering modules 3 & 4. The students have to answer any two full questions. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions. Part C : Three questions of 20 marks each uniformly covering modules 5 & 6. The students have to answer any two full questions. Each question can have maximum of 4 sub questions

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction FT484 Food Storage Engineering 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives  To introduce different storage mechanisms for food. Syllabus Traditional and modern storage structures, Silos, warehouses, cold storages, Storage of raw and processed foods, Supporting equipments; dryers, freezers etc. Expected outcome. Student will have knowledge on various food storage structures and mechanisms Text Books: 1. P G Smith , Introduction to Food Process Engineering, Springer, 2e, 2011 2. Zeki Berk, Food process engineering and technology, Elsevier, 2013 References: 1. Dennis R. Heldman, Richard W. Hartel , Principles of Food Processing, Aspen Publishers, Inc 1997 2. G. Boumans, Grain Handling and Storage, Volume 5 1st Edition, Elsevier Science, 1985 3. Himangshu Barman, Post Harvest Food Grain Storage, Agrobios (India), 2008 4. James G Brennan , Food processing Handbook, Wiley-VCH, 2e. 2006

Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction: Food and grain storage, introduction, scope, importance, basic requirements, I safe and scientific storage. Selection of site for storage, pre and post storage 7 15% operations; cleaning, drying, inspection etc., spoilage, control measures

Traditional and small scale storage: Traditional storage methods, mud bin, drums, gunny bags etc., small scale storage structures, brick, concrete types, Local storage, morai, bhukari, II 7 15% kothar, kuthla structures, improved storage; bunker, cover and plinth, Factors affecting storage

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Modern and large scale storage: Bulk storage, warehouses; considerations, types. Silos; types- deep, shallow, III 7 15% Airys, Janseens equations, numericals

Refrigerated storage: IV Cold storage, refrigeration load calculations, cold storage components, 7 15% vapour barriers, SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Storage of food Frozen storage, CAS, MAS, hermetic storage, Storage conditions for raw and V 7 20% processed fruits, vegetables, meat, dairy etc. Storage requirements

Supporting structure : Supporting equipment; Drying before storing, dryers, humidifier, VI dehumidifier, freezers, conveyors for solid and liquid food storage. Aeration, 7 20% ventilation Economic aspects of storage.

END SEMESTER EXAM

Question paper pattern: Maximum marks:100 Exam Duration : 3 hours

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction FT486 Food Additives and Flavourings 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To know the role and activity of chemical and natural food additives. Syllabus Food additives and their permissible limits, Additives used for colouring preservation, Antioxidants, Additives for emulsification, stabilization, Acidulants sweeteners, Flavouring agents, Sensory valuation Expected outcome.  The students will get knowledge of food additives and their permissible limits Text Books: 1. Branen, Davidson, Salmines , Food Additives, , 2nd edition Marecl Delker Publishers, 2002 2. Fennema,, Food Chemistry, 4th edition CRC Press, 1996

References: 1. Alexander, R.J.. Sweeteners: Nutritive. St. Paul, MN: Eagan Press. 1998 2. Cremer, M.L. Quality Food in Quantity. Management and science. Berkely C.A: McCutchan Publishing Company, 1998. 3. Ensminger, AH., ME. Ensminger, J.E. Konlande and J.R. Robson, Foods and Nutrition Encyclopaedia 2 Vols. Clovis, C.A: Pegus Press, 1983. 4. Francis F.J. Colorants. St. Paul,MN: Eagan Press, 1998, 5. Pruthi, J.S , Spices & Condiments, National Book Trust of India, 2014. 6. Reinecius , Flavour chemistry and technology, 2nd edition Taylor & Francis, 2006. 7. Stauffer C.E.. Emulsifiers. St. Paul, MN.: Eagan Press., 1999 8. Thomas O.J. and WA Atwell. Starches. St. Paul,MN.: Eagan Press, 1999

Course Plan Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction: Food Additives- definition, intentional and incidental additives, I evaluation of additives, maximum permissible limit, methods for 6 15% finding tolerance limits, approval of food additive, Risk assessment, levels of toxicity, acute and chronic studies, government regulations with respect to additives

Additives used in food preservation and processing II Additives used in food preservation and processing preservative, 7 15% antioxidants, colouring agents: functions, chemistry, mode of action ,uses in food formulations FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Emulsifiers, Stabilizers: III Emulsifiers, Stabilizers, Ant caking agents, Enzymes, Gases,: Function 7 15% and Applications, mode of action, chemistry, physical and chemical properties, permissible level in foods Acidulants, Sweeteners: IV Acidulants, Sequestrants, , Sweeteners ,Nutritive additives: Function 7 15% and Applications, Safety issues, mode of action, chemistry, physical and chemical properties, permissible level in foods SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Sensory instruments Food Flavour, its importance ,substances responsible for flavour, 8 V flavour isolation methods, essential oil, oleoresins, spray dried 20% products, different flavour products, extracts, essences, flavour emulsions, flavour analysis(GC, Electronic Nose), scoville unit Flavouring agents VI Flavouring agents used in food industry, natural, natural identical and 7 20% artificial flavouring agents, process flavour, flavour enhancer/modifier, commonly used flavouring agents in food END SEMESTER EXAM

Question paper pattern: Maximum marks:100 Exam Duration : 3 hours

Course code Course Name L-T-P-C Year of Introduction IC482 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course Objectives

 To study various biomedical signals and their data reduction  To learn frequency domain and time series analysis of biomedical signals  To study spectral estimation of biomedical signals  To study event detection and waveform analysis

Syllabus Introduction to biomedical signals- ECG analysis – Data reduction – Signal averaging- Frequency domain analysis-Time series analysis- Spectral analysis- Event detection and waveform analysis. Expected Outcome The students will be able to  Visualise difficulties involved in biomedical signal processing  Do time series and frequency domain analysis of biomedical signals  Conduct spectral estimation of biomedical signals  Perform event detection and waveform analysis of biomedical signals References 1. Arnon Cohen, Biomedical Signal Processing Time and Frequency Domains Analysis (Volume I), CRC press. 2. D.C.Reddy, Biomedical Signal Processing Principles and Techniques, Tata Mc Graw- Hill 3. Rangaraj M Rangayyan, Biomedical Signal Analysis A case study approach, John Wiley publications. 4. Willis J. Tompkins, Biomedical Digital Signal Processing, PHI.

Course Plan Module Contents Hours End Sem. Exam Marks Introduction: Introduction to biomedical signals, Biomedical I signal acquisition and processing, Difficulties in signal 4 15% acquisition ECG: ECG signal origin, ECG parameters-QRS detection different techniques, ST segment analysis, Arrhythmia, II 6 15% Arrhythmia analysis, Arrhythmia monitoring system.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAM ECG Data Reduction: Direct data compression Techniques: III Turning Point, AZTEC, Cortes, FAN, Transformation 8 15% Compression Techniques: Karhunen - Loeve Transform, Other

data compression Techniques: DPCM, Huffman coding, Data compression Techniques comparison. Signal averaging: Basics of signal averaging, Signal averaging as a digital filter, A typical averager, Software and limitations of signal averaging. Frequency Domain Analysis: Introduction, Spectral analysis, linear filtering, cepstral analysis and homomorphic filtering. Removal of high frequency noise (power line interference), IV 8 15% motion artifacts (low frequency) and power line interference in ECG,

SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Time Series Analysis: Introduction, AR models, Estimation of AR parameters by method of least squares and Durbin’s algorithm, ARMA models. Spectral modelling and analysis of PCG signals. V 9 20% Spectral Estimation: Introduction, Blackman- tukey method, The periodogram, Pisarenko’s Harmonic decomposition, Prony’ method, Evaluation of prosthetic heart valves using PSD techniques. Comparison of the PSD estimation methods. Event Detection and waveform analysis: Need for event detection, Detection of events & waves, Correlation analysis of VI EEG signals, The matched filter, Detection of the P wave , 7 20% Identification of heart sounds, Morphological analysis of ECG waves, analysis of activity. END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hours

Part A

Answer any two out of three questions from Module 1 and 2 together. Each question carries 15 marks and can have not more than four sub divisions. (15 x 2 = 30 marks)

Part B

Answer any two out of three questions from Module 3 and 4 together. Each question carries 15 marks and can have not more than four sub divisions. (15 x 2 = 30 marks)

Part C

Answer any two out of three questions from Module 5 and 6 together. Each question carries 20 marks and can have not more than four sub divisions. (20 x 2 = 40 marks)

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction IE482 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives:  To build an understanding of concepts, vital tools and techniques applicable for financial decision-making by a business firm.  To understand the use of basic financial management concepts.  To become familiar with the various types of financing available to a firm.

Syllabus: Nature and Scope of Financial Management; Time Value of Money, Cash Flow Statement and its Interpretation, Financial Statement Analysis, Sources of Finance, Capital Structure; Dividend Decision; Fixed and Current, Short-term financial planning, working capital–planning and management, Capital Budgeting. Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. Obtain an overview of financial system. ii. Analyze financial statements using standard financial ratios. iii. Apply techniques to project financial statements for forecasting long-term financial needs. iv. Understand the role of short-term financial needs. v. Apply time value, risk, and return concepts.

Text books 1. Khan, M. Y. and Jain P. K., Financial Management, Text, Problems & Cases, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 2007. 2. Pandey I. M., Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2009. 3. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management: Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011

References: 1. Bhalla. V. K., Financial Management and Policy: Text and Cases, 9th Edition, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2009. 2. Brigham. Eugene F. and Houston. Joel F., Fundamentals of Financial Management, 10th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2006. 3. Gitman, L. J., Principles of Managerial Finance, New York, 2006. 4. Sheeba Kapil, Financial Management, Pearson Education, 2010. 5. Van Horne and C. James, Principles of Financial Management, Pearson, 2002. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Nature and Scope of Financial Management; Financial Objectives; I 7 15% goal of financial management, FM decisions, Time Value of Money. Funds Flow Analysis; Cash Flow Statement and its Interpretation, II 7 15% Financial Statement Analysis, Ratio Analysis, Time Series. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Planning for Sources of Finance; Capital Structure; Net Income Approach; Net Operating Income Approach; Traditional Approach III 7 15% and MM Approach, Cost of Capital; EBIT – EPS Analysis, Capital Gearing/Debt-Equity Ratio Retained Earning Vs. Dividend Decision; Gordon Model; Walter IV Model; MM Approach; Fixed and Current, Short-term financial 7 15% planning. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Working capital–Gross and net working capital, planning and V 7 20% management, Operating Cycle, Determination of working capital. Capital Budgeting – Evaluation techniques for capital budgeting, VI capital budgeting decision criteria, NPV–IRR comparisons, capital 7 20% rationing. END SEMESTER EXAM

End Semester Examination Question Paper Pattern:

Examination duration: 3 hours Maximum Marks: 100

Part A (Modules I and II):

Candidates have to answer any 2 questions from a choice of 3 questions. Each full question carries a total of 15 marks and can have a maximum of 4 sub questions (a, b, c, d). No two f u l l questions shall be exclusively from a single module. All three questions shall preferably have components from both modules. Marks for each question/sub question shall be clearly specified. Total percentage of marks for the two modules put together as specified in the curriculum shall be adhered to for all combinations of any two questions.

Part B (Modules III and IV): (Same as for part A marks)

Part C (Modules V and VI):

(Same as for part A, except that each full question carries 20 marks)

Note: If use of tables and charts are permitted for the university examination for this course, proper direction of the same should be provided on the facing sheet of the question paper.

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction IE486 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTS 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives:  To introduce the concept of experimentation  To equip students to understand the necessity of experimentation  To provide basic methods of designing an experiment Syllabus: Statistical fundamentals, hypothesis testing, analysis of variance, block design, statistical analysis of models, full factorial and fractional factorial designs, introduction to Taguchi method. Expected outcome . The students will be able to:  Understand the need for a design for experimentation  Apply the basic principles to do an experiment design  Make inferences out of the outcomes of experimental design. References: 1. Montgomery, D.C., Design and Analysis of experiments, 8the Ed, John Wiley and Sons, 2013. 2. Montgomery, D.C., Statistical Quality Control, 6th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2009 3. Nicolo Belavendram, Quality by Design; Taguchi techniques for industrial experimentation, Prentice Hall, 1995. 4. Phillip J.Rose, Taguchi techniques for quality engineering, McGraw Hill, 1996. 5. Phadke, Quality Engineering Using Robust Design, Pearson Education Singapore Pte Ltd; First edition, 2008 Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Basic Statistical Concepts, sampling and sampling distributions, comparisons of populations by sample statistics – known I 7 15% populations parameters and unknown population parameters, paired comparisons Importance of experiments, experimental strategies, basic principles II of design, terminology, steps in experimentation, sample size, 7 15% normal probability plot, linear regression model. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Hypothesis testing – z-test, t-test, chi-square test and F-test, Single III 7 15% factor experiments – ANOVA, model adequacy testing Completely randomized design, Randomized block design, Latin IV square design. Statistical analysis, estimation of model parameters, 7 15% model adequacy testing and interpretation of results SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Two and three factor full factorial experiments, 2K factorial V 7 20% Experiments, confounding and Blocking designs. Fractional factorial designs, Introduction to Response Surface VI 7 20% Methodology, theory of experiments with random factors,

introduction to Taguchi design method. Use of software packages in design of experiments. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern:

Examination duration: 3 hours Maximum Marks: 100

Part A (Modules I and II):

Part B (Modules III and IV): (Same as for part A marks)

Part C (Modules V and VI):

(Same as for part A, except that each full question carries 20 marks)

Note: If use of tables and charts are permitted for the university examination for this course, proper direction of the same should be provided on the facing sheet of the question paper.

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction IE484 INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ANALYTICS 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives:  To knowhow the use of business analytics to formulate and solve business problems and to support managerial decision making.  To familiarize the practices needed to develop, report, and analyze business data. Syllabus: Descriptive Analytics - Visualizing and Exploring Data, Descriptive Statistical Measures, Probability Distributions and Data Modeling, Sampling and Estimation, Statistical Inference Predictive Analytics - Trend lines and Regression Analysis, Forecasting Techniques, Introduction to Data Mining, Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis Prescriptive Analytics - Linear Programming Problem-Formulation, Solution methods; Transportation Problem-Formulation and solution; Assignment Problem- Formulation and solution; Dynamic Programming problem; Integer Programming Problem- Formulation and solution. Expected outcome: The students will: i. gain the knowledge of fundamental concepts and tools needed to understand the emerging role of business analytics in organizations. ii. be able to apply basic business analytics tools, interpret analytic models and results for making better business decisions. References: 1. James R. Evans, Business Analytics, Pearson Education Limited, 2017 2. Amir D. Aczel and J. Sounderpandian, Complete Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006 3. Wayne L. Winston, Operations Research: Applications and Algorithms, PWS-Kent Pub. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction to Business Analytics-Evolution, Scope, Models Descriptive Analytics- Data Visualization, Statistical Methods for Summarizing Data, Measures of Central Tendency, Measures of I Dispersion, Measures of Shape, Measures of Association, Probability 7 15% Distributions and Data Modeling- Discrete and Continuous Probability Distributions, Random Sampling from Probability Distributions, Data Modeling and Distribution Fitting Sampling and Estimation - Statistical Sampling, Estimating Population Parameters, Sampling Distributions, Confidence Intervals, Prediction Intervals Statistical Inference- Hypothesis Testing, Confidence Intervals, One II 7 15% sample and Two sample tests, z-test, t-test, Chi-square test. Analysis of Variance: Theory and computations of ANOVA, ANOVA table, Two-way ANOVA, Blocking designs, Design of Experiments

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Predictive Analytics- Modeling Relationships and Trends in Data, Simple Regression and Correlation: Introduction, Estimation using III the regression line, Correlation Analysis. Multiple Regression: The 7 15% k-variable multiple regression model, The F-test of a Multiple Regression model. Forecasting Techniques- Qualitative and Judgmental Forecasting, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with IV 7 15% Seasonality Introduction to Data Mining, Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Prescriptive Analytics - Linear Programming Problem- Formulation, Graphical solutions, Simplex method, Revised Simplex V method and Sensitivity Analysis; Transportation Problem- 7 20% Formulation and solution; Assignment Problem- Formulation and solution Deterministic Dynamic Programming problem Bellman’s principle of optimality - computational procedure for Shortest Route problem, VI Reliability Problem, Equipment Replacement Problem etc; 7 20% Integer Programming Problem- Formulation, Branch and Bound algorithm, Cutting Plane Algorithm END SEMESTER EXAM

End Semester Examination Question Paper Pattern:

Examination duration: 3 hours Maximum Marks: 100

Part A (Modules I and II):

Part B (Modules III and IV): (Same as for part A marks)

Part C (Modules V and VI): (Same as for part A, except that each full question carries

20 marks)

Note: If use of tables and charts are permitted for the university examination for this course, proper direction of the same should be provided on the facing sheet of the question paper.

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction IE488 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives:  To impart knowledge on principles and practices of TQM to achieve quality.  To enable use of TQM tools for continuous quality improvement.  To provide ideas on implementation of quality standards.  To introduce the latest TQM tools and techniques. Syllabus: Introduction to quality, Contributions of quality Gurus, Q uality control tools, Cost of Quality, Taguchi loss function, Basic concepts of TQM, P rinciples of Total Quality Management, Total quality control, Quality assurance, Vendor rating, Quality improvement programmes, Quality planning, Quality function deployment, Six sigma approach, Failure mode & effect analysis, TPM, BPR , Quality standards. Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. Understand the principles and practices of TQM. ii. Use various TQM tools for continuous quality improvement. iii. Implement quality standards. iv. Become aware of the latest TQM tools and techniques. References: 1. Sharma D D, Total Quality Management, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2014 2. R.P. Mohanty & R R Lakhi, Total Quality Management, Jaico Pub, New Delhi, 1994 3. Poornima M.Charantimath , Total Quality Management, Pearson Education, 2011. 4. Lon Roberts , Process Re-Engineering , Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994 5. Mohamed Zairi , TQM for Engineers , Gulf Pub. Co., 2nd Edition, New Delhi. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction-Need for quality, Definition of quality, Major contributions of Deming, Juran and Crossby to I 7 15% Quality Management, Q uality control tools, Cost of Quality, Taguchi loss function. Basic concepts of Total Quality Management - Evolution of TQM, TQM framework, Barriers to TQM, II 7 15% P rinciples of Total Quality Management- Quality statements, Customer focus, Customer orientation,

Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention, Total quality control, total waste elimination, total employee involvement. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Quality assurance- Total quality assurance, Management principles in quality assurance, O bjectives of quality assurance system, Hierarchical III 7 15% planning for Quality Assurance, Vendor rating, Quality improvement: elements, programmes – KAIZEN, PDCA cycle,5S, Quality circles. Quality planning- SWOT analysis, Strategic planning, strategic grid, organizational culture, Total IV Quality Culture, Quality function deployment- QFD 7 15% concept, the voice of customer, developing a QFD matrix, QFD process. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Six sigma approach–Me t h o d o l o g y , T r a i n i n g , V application to various industrial situations, Failure mode 7 20% & effect analysis- Concepts, Types & Applications in TQM. TPM–Concepts, Improvement needs, Performance measures, BPR, Quality standards – Need of VI standardization, ISO 9000 series, ISO 14000 series, 7 20% Other contemporary standards. END SEMESTER EXAM Question Paper Pattern:

Examination duration: 3 hours Maximum Marks: 100

Part A (Modules I and II): Candidates have to answer any 2 questions from a choice of 3 questions. Each full question carries a total of 15 marks and can have a maximum of 4 sub questions (a, b, c, d). No two f u l l questions shall be exclusively from a single module. All three questions shall preferably have components from both modules. Marks for each question/sub question shall be clearly specified. Total percentage of marks for the two modules put together as specified in the curriculum shall be adhered to for all combinations of any two questions. Part B (Modules III and IV): (Same as for part A marks)

Part C (Modules V and VI): (Same as for part A, except that each full question carries 20 marks)

Note: If use of tables and charts are permitted for the university examination for this course, proper direction of the same should be provided on the facing sheet of the question paper.

Course Course Name L-T-P -C Year of code. Introduction IT482 Information Storage Management 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: NIL Course Objectives • To understand data creation and the amount of data being created • To impart the value of data to a business, challenges in data storage and data management, • To introduce solutions available for data storage, Core elements of a data center infrastructure, role of each element in supporting business activities Syllabus Storage system architecture, Networked storage, Information availability and monitoring a data center, remote data replication technologies, securing storage and storage virtualization, Expected outcome. The students will understand the concept of data storage in distributed environment in data center, challenges in data storage and management technologies.

Text Books: 1. Robert Spalding, “Storage Networks: The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2006. 2. Somasundaram G, Alok Shrivastava, “ISM – Storing, Managing and Protecting Digital Information”, EMC Education Services, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2012.

References: 1. Gerald J Kowalski, Mark T Maybury, “Information Storage and Retrieval Systems: Theory and Implementation”, BS Publications, New Delhi, 2009. 2. Marc Farley Osborne, “Building Storage Networks”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2001. 3. Meeta Gupta, “Storage Area Network Fundamentals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Data, Information, Evolution of storage architecture, Data center infrastructure, Information lifecycle. I Overview: Virtualization - Cloud, Data center environment: 7 15% Application - Desktop - Memory virtualization - Connectivity - Disk drive interface Storage media - Flash drives, RAID: Implementation - Methods - II 5 15% Levels, Intelligent storage system FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Introduction to DAS and SCSI, SAN: Evolution - Components - Connectivity options - Ports - FC architecture - Zoning - FC III topologies, SAN based virtualization: Block level - VSAN, IP 7 15% SAN: iSCSI - FCIP components - FCIP topology and frame structure, FCOE: Components – Benefits IV NAS: Benefits – Components - Implementations - File sharing 7 15%

protocols - I/O operations - Factors affecting NAS performance - File level virtualization, Object based storage: Operation Benefits - Fixed content and archives - Archive types, CAS: Architecture - Operations - Use cases, Unified storage SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Introduction: Information availability - BC terminology - Planning lifecycle - Business impact analysis - Technology solutions, Backup and restore: Purposes - Methods - Architecture - Operations - SCB - Topologies - Targets - V 8 20% Deduplication, Local Replication: Terminology - Data consistency - Technologies - Restore and restart considerations, Remote replication: Modes - Technologies - Advanced replication technologies Securing the storage infrastructure: Security terminology - Security framework – Risk triad - Security domains -Implementations - VI 8 20% Managing the storage infrastructure: Monitoring - Activities - Challenges - Solutions Data Warehousing with Oracle BI END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Maximum Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 hours The question paper shall consist of Part A, Part B and Part C.

Part A shall consist of three questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering Modules I and II. The student has to answer any two questions (15×2=30 marks).

Part B shall consist of three questions of 15 marks each uniformly covering Modules III and IV. The student has to answer any two questions (15×2=30 marks).

Part C shall consist of three questions of 20 marks each uniformly covering Modules V and VI. The student has to answer any two questions (20×2=40 marks).

Note : Each question can have a maximum of 4 subparts, if needed

Course L-T-P- Year of Course Name code Credits Introduction ME471 Optimization Techniques 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite - ME372 Operations Research Course Objective:  To learn the various optimization techniques for effective decision making.

Syllabus: Linear programming – integer programming– network models – goal programming – dynamic programming – nonlinear programming – nontraditional optimization.

Expected Outcome:  The students will be able to understand optimization techniques and apply them in solving practical problems

Text Books:

1. Miller, D. M. and Schmidt, J. W., Industrial Engineering and Operations Research, John Wiley & Sons, Singapore, 1990. 2. Paneerselvam, R., Operations Research, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008. 3. Pannerselvam, R., Design and Analysis of Algorithms, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007. 4. Taha, H. A., Operations Research, Pearson, 2004.

Reference Books:

1. Banks, J., Carson, J. S., Nelson, B. L., and Nicol, D. M., Discrete-Event System Simulation, Third Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2001 2. Goel, B. S. and Mittal, S. K., Operations Research, Pragati Prakashan, Meerut, 1999. 3. Ravindran, Phillips and Solberg, Operations Research Principles and Practice, Willey & Sons, 1987 5. Srinivasan, G. “Operations Research-Principles and Applications”, latest edition, PHI Pvt. Ltd. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam. Marks 1 Review of linear programming– revised simplex method I 1 15% Dual simplex method 1

1 1 Sensitivity analysis – changes affecting feasibility – changes 1 affecting optimality 1 Integer programming – importance – applications 1 1 Branch and bound technique 1 II 1 15% Gomory’s cutting plane method 1 1 Solution to travelling salesman problem 1 FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Network models – minimal spanning tree problem 1 PRIM’s algorithm 1 Kruskal’s algorithm 1 III Shortest route problem –applications 1 15% Systematic method 1 Dijkstra’s algorithm 1 Floyd’s algorithm 1 1 Goal programming – goal programming formulation-application. 1 1 Simplex method for solving goal programming 1 IV 15% Dynamic programming – terminologies – forward and backward 1 recursion –applications 1 Shortest path problems 1 SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION 1 Nonlinear programming – convex, quasi-convex, concave and 1 unimodal functions – theory of constrained optimization 1 V 1 20% Lagrangean method 1 1 Kuhn-Tucker conditions 1 Nontraditional optimization – computational complexity- 1 Introduction to metaheuristics – areas of application 1

Genetic algorithm (GA) – terminologies – steps and examples 1 VI 20% Tabu search (TS) – steps and examples 1 Simulated annealing (SA) – steps and examples 1 Ant colony optimization (ACO) – steps and examples - Particle 1 Swarm Optimization (PSO)-Steps and examples 1

Question Paper Pattern

Maximum marks: 100 Time: 3 hrs

The question paper should consist of three parts

Part A There should be 2 questions each from module I and II Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3x10 marks =30 marks)

Part B There should be 2 questions each from module III and IV Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3x10 marks =30 marks)

Part C There should be 3 questions each from module V and VI Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4x10 marks =40 marks)

Note: Each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

Course code Course Name L-T-P- Year of Credits Introduction

ME482 Energy Conservation and Management 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives: : 1. To enable analysis of the energy data of industries, energy accounting and balancing 2. To know energy audit and methodologies for energy savings 3. To understand utilization of the available resources in optimal ways Syllabus: Energy, Power, Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data, Components of EB billing, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters, Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Energy audit, Energy Economics Expected Outcomes: The students will be able to i. carryout energy accounting and balancing ii. suggest methodologies for energy savings Text books: 1. Callaghn, P.W. Design and Management for Energy Conservation, Pergamon Press, Oxford,1981. 2. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, Industrial Energy Management and Utilisation, Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.

References: 1. Dryden. I.G.C., The Efficient Use of Energy Butterworths, London, 1982 2. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at www.energymanager training.com, a website of Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), A statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004. 3. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, Energy Managemen”, Butterworths, London 1987. 4. Turner. W.C., Energy Management Hand book, Wiley, New York, 1982.

End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam. Marks Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data – Environmental aspects associated I with energy utilization –Energy Auditing: Need, Types, 7 15% Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors, Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency II 7 15% Computation, Energy Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of Encon in Illumination. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon measures. Steam: Distribution III 7 15% &Usage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam Utilization, Insulators & Refractories Energy efficiency in Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air IV Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems – Cooling 7 15%

Towers – D.G. sets

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Energy audit, need, types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy costs, Bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, V 7 20% maximizing system efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel and energy substitution, energy audit instruments and metering Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal V1 Rate of Return, Net Present Value, Life Cycle Costing –ESCO 7 20% concepts END SEMESTER EXAMINATION Question Paper Pattern Maximum marks: 100 Time: 3 hrs

The question paper should consist of three parts Part A There should be 2 questions each from module I and II Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks) Part B There should be 2 questions each from module III and IV Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks) Part C There should be 3 questions each from module V and VI Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: Each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

Course Course Name L-T-P- Year of code Credits Introduction Finite Element Analysis ME484 3-0-0-3 2016

Prerequisite : Nil Course Objectives: : 1. To introduce the concepts of Mathematical Modeling of Engineering Problems. 2. To appreciate the use of FEA to a range of Engineering Problems. Syllabus: Historical Background, Mathematical Modeling of field problems in Engineering ,Governing Equations, Basic concepts of the Finite Element Method, Solution of problems from solid mechanics and heat transfer, Fourth Order Beam Equation, Second Order 2D Equations involving Scalar Variable Functions, Equations of elasticity, Natural co-ordinate systems Expected Outcomes:  The students will be able to understand different mathematical techniques used in FEM analysis and use them in Structural and thermal problems Text books: 1. Reddy. J.N., An Introduction to the Finite Element Method, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2005 2. Seshu, P, Text Book of Finite Element Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. Reference books: 1. Bhatti Asghar M, Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications, John Wiley & Sons,2005 (Indian Reprint 2013) 2. Chandrupatla & Belagundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall College Div, 1990 3. Logan, D.L., A first course in Finite Element Method, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2002 4. Rao, S.S., The Finite Element Method in Engineering, 3rd Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2004 5. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha, Robert J. Witt, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, 4th Edition, Wiley Student Edition, 2002.

COURSE PLAN End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam. Marks Historical Background – Mathematical Modeling of field problems in Engineering – Governing Equations – Discrete and I continuous models – Boundary, Initial and Eigen Value 7 15% problems– Weighted Residual Methods – Variational Formulation of Boundary Value Problems – Ritz Technique II Basic concepts of the Finite Element Method. One Dimensional 7 15%

Second Order Equations – Discretization – Element types- Linear and Higher order Elements – Derivation of Shape functions and Stiffness matrices and force vectors- Assembly of Matrices FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Solution of problems from solid mechanics and heat transfer Longitudinal vibration frequencies and mode shapes. Fourth III 7 15% Order Beam Equation –Transverse deflections and Natural frequencies of beams. Second Order 2D Equations involving Scalar Variable Functions – Variational formulation –Finite Element formulation – IV Triangular elements – Shape functions and element matrices and 7 15% vectors. Application to Field Problems - Thermal problems – Torsion of Non circular shafts –Quadrilateral elements – Higher Order Elements. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Equations of elasticity – Plane stress, plane strain and V axisymmetric problems – Body forces and temperature effects – 7 20% Stress calculations - Plate and shell elements. Natural co-ordinate systems – Isoparametric elements – Shape functions for iso parametric elements – One and two dimensions – Serendipity elements – Numerical integration and application V1 7 20% to plane stress problems - Matrix solution techniques – Solutions Techniques to Dynamic problems – Introduction to Analysis Software. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION Question Paper Pattern Maximum marks: 100 Time: 3 hrs

Part B There should be 2 questions each from module III and IV Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part C There should be 3 questions each from module V and VI Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: Each question can have a maximum of four sub questions, if needed.

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Year of Credits Introduction MP469 Industrial Psychology and Organisational 3-0-0-3 2016 Behaviour Course Objectives  To create a knowledge about human psychology  To learn about theories of motivation and group behavior.  To understand the socio-cultural aspects in organizations Syllabus Introduction- psychology as a science- study of behaviour- stimulus- response behaviour- heredity and environment- human mind- cognition- character- thinking- attention- memory- emotion- traits- attitude- personality. Organizational behaviour- definition –development- fundamental concept- organizational behaviour system- models - understanding a social-system - managing communication- Motivation- motivation driver - goal setting- expectancy model- comparison models- interpreting motivational models- leadership- path goal model. Special topics in industrial psychology- managing group in organization- group and inter group dynamics- managing change and organizational development- nature planned change- resistance characteristics Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. know the importance of psychology ii. have insight into individual and group behavior iii. deal with people in better way iv. motivate groups and build teams. Text Book: Davis K. & Newstrom J.W., Human Behaviour at work, Mcgraw Hill International, 1985

References: 1. Blum M.L. Naylor J.C., Horper & Row, Industrial Psychology, CBS Publisher, 1968 2. Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill, International, 1997 3. Morgan C.t.,King R.A.,John Rweisz &John Schoples, Introduction to Psychology, McHraw Hill, 1966 4. Schermerhorn J.R.Jr., Hunt J.G &Osborn R.N., Managing, Organizational Behaviour, John Willy Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Introduction- psychology as a science- area of applications – study of individual- individual differences- study of behaviour- stimulus- I response behaviour- heredity and environment- human mind- 6 15% cognition- character- thinking- attention- memory- emotion- traits- attitude- personality Human mind- cognition- character- thinking- attention- memory- II 6 15% emotion- traits- attitude- personality FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Organizational behaviour- definition –development- fundamental III concept- nature of people nature of organization – an organizational 6 15% behaviour system- models- autocratic model- hybrid model-

Understanding a social-system social culture- managing communication- downward, upward and other forms of IV 6 15% communication

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Motivation- motivation driver- human needs- behaviour modification- goal setting- expectancy model- comparison models- interpreting V 9 20% motivational models- leadership- path goal model- style – contingency approach Special topics in industrial psychology- managing group in organization- group and inter group dynamics- managing change and VI 9 20% organizational development- nature planned change- resistance characteristic of OD-OD process END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern

Maximum marks: 100 Time: 3 hrs

Part B There should be 2 questions each from module III and IV Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part C There should be 3 questions each from module V and VI Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions

L-T-P- Year of Course code Course Name Credits Introduction MP482 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND DESIGN 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objective  To create confidence in developing new products.  To acquaint with methods and tools for product design and development.  To equip with practical knowledge in conceptualization, design and development of new product. Syllabus Introduction to product design, the need of a product, the product life cycle, the product design process. The application of Value Engineering principles in product design. Application of various tools such as CAD, CAE and DFM. The Ergonomics aspects in context of the product design. The fundamental concept of rapid prototyping techniques. Expected Outcome The students will be able to i. create new products suiting the requirements of society. ii. enhance value addition in products iii. coordinate multiple factors like market, design, ergonomics manufacturing in creating a new product. References: 1. Andreas Gebhardt, Rapid Prototyping, Carl Hanser – Verlag, Munich, 2003. 2. Baldwin E N & Neibel B W “Designing for Production.” Edwin Homewood Illinois. 3. Bralla J G (Ed.), “Handbook of Product Design for Manufacture, McGraw Hill, NewYork, 1986 4. D. T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing-The Technologies and Applications of Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, Springer – Verlag, London, 2001. 5. David G Ullman, “The Mechanical Design Process.” McGraw Hill Inc Singapore 1992 6. Hollins B & Pugh S “Successful Product Design.” Butter worths London, 1990 7. Jones J C “Design Methods.” Seeds of Human Futures. John Willey, 1970 8. Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger , “ Product Design & Development.” Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. 9. Kevin Otto & Kristin Wood Product Design: “Techniques in Reverse Engineering and new Product Development.”, Pearson Education New Delhi, 2000 10. N J M Roozenberg , J Ekels , N F M Roozenberg “ Product Design Fundamentals and Methods .” John Willey & Sons 1995. Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours exam marks Introduction: Classification/ Specifications of Products. Product life 7 15% cycle. Product mix. Introduction to product design. Modern product

I development process. Innovative thinking. Morphology of design. Conceptual Design: Generation, selection & embodiment of concept. II Product architecture. Industrial design: process, need. 7 15% Robust Design: Taguchi Designs & DOE. Design Optimization First Internal Exam Design for Manufacturing and Assembly: Methods of designing for Manufacturing and Assembly. Designs for Maintainability. Designs III 7 15% for Environment. Product costing. Ethics in product design, legal factors and social issues. Value Engineering / Value Analysis. : Definition. Methodology, Case IV studies. Economic analysis: Qualitative & Quantitative. 7 15%

Second Internal Exam Ergonomics in product design. Aesthetics in product design. Concepts of size and texture, colour .Psychological and V Physiological considerations. Creativity Techniques: Creative 7 20% thinking, conceptualization, brain storming, primary design, drawing, simulation, detail design. Concurrent Engineering, Rapid prototyping: concepts, processes and advantages. Tools for product design – Drafting / Modelling VI 7 20% software. Patents & IP Acts. Overview, Disclosure preparation. End Semester Exam

Question Paper Pattern

Maximum marks: 100 Time: 3 hrs

Part B There should be 2 questions each from module III and IV Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks)

Part C There should be 3 questions each from module V and VI Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions

Course code Course Name L-T-P – Year of Credits Introduction MP484 Project management 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objectives  To familiarize the major aspects of project management consisting of : Project Planning, Project Analysis, Project Selection, Project Implementation and Project Review Syllabus Planning, capital budgeting, generation of project ideas, Project analysis, Market and demand analysis, Manufacturing process and technology, Project charts, financial analysis, breakeven point, cash flow statement, time value of money, appraisal criteria, Project organisation, network techniques, PERT Model, CPM Model, Network costs Expected outcome. The students will be able to i. Understand Project planning ii. Analyse market and demand iii. Familiarise basic concepts of project costing and cash flows iv. Apply network analysis models of PERT and CPM under different situations Text Book:  Prasanna Chandra, Projects Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Review, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw –Hill, 2017 References: 1. Dennis Lock, Project Management, Gower Publishing, 9e, 2007 2. Gido & Clements, Successful Project Management, South-Western College Pub; 6 edition ..2014. 3. Harold.T..Amrine John.A.Ritchey, Colin L. Moodie, Joseph F Kmec Manufacturing Organization and Management, Pearson Education, 1992 4. Parameswar P Iyer, Engineering Project management, Vikas Publishers, 1996 5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management Theory and Practice, McGraw –Hill Education, 2017 Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Planning - Capital Expenditures – Phases of Capital Budgeting – Levels of decision Making –Facets of Project analysis- Feasibility Study – Objectives of Capital Budgeting – Resource Allocation framework- Key I Criteria- Elementary Investment strategies – Portfolio planning tools – 7 15% Generation of project Ideas – Monitoring the environment – Corporate appraisal – Scouting for project ideas – Preliminary Screening – Project rating index – Sources of Positive net present value Analysis – Market and demand analysis – Situational analysis and II 7 15% specification of objectives – Collection of secondary information -

Conduct of market survey – Characterization of Market – demand Forecasting – Market planning – Technical analysis- Material inputs and utilities FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Manufacturing process/technology – Product Mix – Plant capacity – Location and site -machineries and equipments – Structures and civil works – Project charts and layouts – Work schedule – Financial III Analysis – Cost of project – means of finance – Estimates of sales and 7 15% Production – Cost of production – Working capital requirements and its financing – Profitability projections – Breakeven point – projected cash flow statements and balance sheets Project Cash flows – Basic Principles for measuring cash flows – Components of cash flow – Cash flow illustrations – Viewing a project IV from different points of view – Time value of money – Future Value of 7 15% a single amount – Future value of an annuity – Present value of a single amount –Present Value of an annuity SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Cost of capital – Cost of debt capital – cost of preference capital – Rate of return – Cost of external equity and retained earnings - Determination V 7 20% of weights – Appraisal criteria – Net present value – Cost benefit ratio- Internal rate of return- Urgency – payback period Implementation- Forms of Project organization – Project planning – Project control – Human aspects of project management , Network Techniques – Development of Network – Time estimation – Critical VI 7 20% path determination – Scheduling under limited resources – PERT Model –CPM Model – Network Cost System – Project review- Initial; review – Performance evaluation – Abandonment analysis END SEMESTER EXAM Question Paper Pattern Maximum marks: 100 Time: 3 hrs The question paper should consist of three parts Part A There should be 2 questions each from module I and II Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks) Part B There should be 2 questions each from module III and IV Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any three questions out of 4 (3X10 marks =30 marks) Part C There should be 3 questions each from module V and VI Each question carries 10 marks Students will have to answer any four questions out of 6 (4X10 marks =40 marks)

Note: In all parts, each question can have a maximum of four sub questions

Course code Course Name L-T-P - Credits Year of Introduction MR482 Mechatronics 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite : NIL

Course Objectives  To provide basic knowledge on principles and design of Mechatronics systems.

Syllabus Introduction to Mechatronics – Sensors and transducers – Open loop and closed loop control systems - continuous and discrete processes - servo mechanism – principles - components - error detectors - potentiometers- types-Design of modern CNC machines and Mechatronic elements - Machine structure - guide ways – drives – bearings - Measuring system for NC machines - Closed loop controllers - Mechatronics in Robotics - Man-machine interface. Fundamentals of ANN – Stages in designing mechatronic systems - case studies of mechatronics.

Expected outcome .  The student will acquire basic knowledge on design, and application of Mechatronics systems

Text Book: W. Bolton, Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, Addison Wesley Longman Limited.

References: 1. R. C. Dorf, R. H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Addison Wesley 2. Krishna Kant, Computer Based Industrial Control, Prentice Hall of Indian Private Limited 3. HMT Limited, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited 4. Herbert Taub, Donald Schilling, Digital Integrated Electronics, McGraw Hill International Editions 5. Dan Necsulescu, Mechatronics, Pearson Education Asia, 2002(Indian reprint).

Course Plan Sem. Exam Module Contents Hours Marks Introduction to Mechatronics – scope - Mechatronics and Engineering Design. Sensors and transducers – classification- I thermal- electrical- optical- acoustic- pneumatic- magnetic- and 7 15% piezo electric sensors- Smart sensors.

Open loop and closed loop control systems - continuous and discrete processes - servo mechanism – principles - II 7 15% components - error detectors - potentiometers- types.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Design of modern CNC machines and Mechatronic elements - Machine structure - guide ways – drives – bearings - anti friction bearings- hydrostatic bearing- hydrodynamic bearing. III 7 15% Measuring system for NC machines - direct and indirect measuring system.

Closed loop controllers - proportional- derivative and integral controls - PID controller – digital controllers - controller tuning IV - adaptive control of machine tools. programmable logic 7 15% controllers- architecture.

SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Mechatronics in Robotics - robot position and proximity sensing - tactile sensing. Man-machine interface. Fundamentals V 7 20% of ANN – perceptions – back propagation.

Stages in designing mechatronic systems - traditional and mechatronic design -possible design solutions - case studies of VI mechatronic systems - pick and place robot - automatic car 7 20% park system – engine management system.

END SEMESTER EXAM

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Maximum Marks : 100 Exam Duration:3 hours

PART A: FIVE MARK QUESTIONS 8 compulsory questions –1 question each from first four modules and 2 questions each from last two modules (8 x 5= 40 marks)

PART B: 10 MARK QUESTIONS 5 questions uniformly covering the first four modules. Each question can have maximum of three sub questions, if needed. Student has to answer any 3 questions ( 3 x10 = 30 marks)

PART C: 15 MARK QUESTIONS 4 questions uniformly covering the last two modules. Each question can have maximum of four sub questions, if needed. Student has to answer any two questions ( 2 x15 = 30 marks)

Course Course name L-T-P- C Year of Code Introduction

MT482 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisite: Nil Course Objective  To understand the impact of safe industrial operations , its benefits and safety legalization. Syllabus Introduction to Industrial safety- responsibility of safety- safety committees- occupational health hazards – Ergonomics hazards- Musculoskeletal disorders- Safety management- PQRS theory – Work place design concepts – Need of machine maintenance- Safety controls- Legal provisions regarding safety – Accident prevention – Rules – Workmen compensation act – public liabilities insurance- Fatal accident act. Expected Outcome. The students will i. gain a general concept of safety, ii. become aware of safety responsibilities of various agencies, iii. know the occupational health hazards and human factors contributing to industrial accidents, iv. learn the concepts of safety management, v. understand the need for timely maintenance of equipments, the need and measures for industrial safety control vi. become familiar with the general legal rules for an industrial safety practitioner. TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES 1. Frank P. Lees, Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth- Heinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Grimaldi and Simonds , Safety Management, AITBS Publishers, New Delhi (2001) 3. Industrial Safety -National Safety Council of India. 4. R.K.Jain and Sunil S.Rao, Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management Systems, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi (2006) 5. Slote.L. Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York 6. The Factories Act with amendments 1987, Govt. of India Publications DGFASLI, Mumbai Course Plan Module Contents Hours End Sem. Exam Marks Introduction to industrial safety Concept of Safety, Goals of safety engineering, Need for safety engineering, definitions of Accident, injury, unsafe actions I. &Conditions. 5 15% Responsibility of Safety - Society, Govt., Management, Union & employees. Duties of safety officer. Safety Committee - Membership, Functions & Scope of Safety committee.

Safety and Health Management: Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting Safety, Safety and Health training, Stress and Safety. Ergonomics - Introduction, II Definition, Objectives, Advantages. Ergonomics Hazards - 7 15% Musculoskeletal Disorders and Cumulative Trauma Disorders.. Importance of Industrial safety, role of safety department, Safety committee and Function. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Safety Awareness & Training:Training for Safety: Assessment of needs. Design & development of training programme. Training III methods and strategies. Training of manager, supervisors & 7 15% workers. Evaluation of training programmes. Human behaviour and safety: Human factors contributing to accidents. Safety Assessment and Control Safety Management: Role of management in Industrial Safety. Safety Management- Principles & Practices. Safety Organization: Role of safety committee and its formation, Safety awareness programme: motivation, education and training, Appraisal of plant safety and measurement of safety performance, Total loss control concept, Introduction to productivity, Quality, Reliability, and IV 9 15% Safety (PQRS) theory. Concept of workplace and its design. Improving safety and productivity through work place design control measures. Technical and engineering control measures. Control measures against human error. Preventive maintenance. Role of Preventive maintenance in safety and health. Standards and code of practices for plant and equipment. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Industrial Safety and Control Control of Physical Hazards: (Purpose of lighting. Advantages of good illumination. Lighting and safety. Lighting and the work. Control of Chemical Hazards Hazardous properties of chemicals and appreciation of information provided in Material safety data sheets. Classification of dangerous materials with pictorial symbols, common hazard and common precautions for each class V 9 20% Control of Electrical Hazards Dangers from electricity. Safe limits of amperages, Voltages Safe distance from lines. Capacity and protection of conductors, Joints and connections, Means of cutting of power overload and short circuit protection. Statutory provisions regarding fire safety. Factors contributing towards fire. Chemistry of fire. Classification of fires. Common causes of industrial fires. Safety Legalisation Legal Provisions regarding safety, Accident prevention & VI 5 20% Compensation to affected employees as under Factories Act-1948, Factories Act(Amendment)1987, Maharashtra Factories Rule-

1963,The Mines Act-1952,Maharashtra Safety Officers Rule- 1982,The Workmen CompensationAct-1923,ESI Act, Public Liabilities Insurance Act-1991,Fatal Accident Act. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Maximum Marks :100 Examination Duration: 3 hrs.

PART A: 8 questions from Module 1&2 ( 4+4) – 6 questions to be answered. 6 X 5 = 30 marks PART B: 8 questions from Module 3&4 ( 4+4) – 6 questions to be answered. 6 X 5 = 30 marks PART C: 6 questions from Module 5&6 ( 3+3) – 4 questions to be answered. 4 X 10 = 40 marks

Course L-T-P- Year of Course Name: code Credits Introduction SB482 DREDGERS AND HARBOUR CRAFTS 3-0-0-3 2016 Prerequisites: -Nil- Course Objectives:  To impart various aspects of dredging  To introduce various aspects of operation of dredgers and harbor crafts Syllabus: Types of Dredging Equipment, Types of Dredgers, Trailing suction hopper dredger, The cutter suction dredgers, Plain suction dredgers, Barge unloading dredgers, Bucket dredgers, Grab or Clamshell dredgers, Backhoe or dipper dredgers, Navigation Aids Vessels, Tugsand Towboats, Firefighting tugs, Barges, pilot boats, Salvage/buoy vessels, Construction Support Vessels, Fireboats, Patrol and Rescue Vessels, Pollution Response Vessels, Floating docks Expected Outcome: The students will be able to: 1. Understand different types of dredging and dredging equipment 2. Analyse the design aspects of 7 types of dredgers 3. Know theoperational aspects of dredgers 4. Understand the design and operational philosophy of harbor craft, including floating dock Text Books: Ship Design and Construction, Volume II, SNAME 2004 Reference Books:  Lloyds Register of Shipping, Rules and Regulations for the Classification of Ships - July 2015;  R N Bray, A D Bates, J M Land, Dredging – A Handbook for Engineers, Butterworth Heinemann, 1996  D Esima, Dredging in Coastal Waters, Taylor & Francis Group, 2005  Rolt Hammond , Modern Dredging Practice, Muller, London, 1969  Denis Yell , ICE Design and Practice guide – Dredging , ASCE, 1995 Course Plan: End Sem. Module Content Hours Exam Marks Introduction, Types of Dredging Equipment, Types of Dredgers 2 I Harbour/ Port support vessels 2 15% Small Workboats 2 Dredging process 2 Introduction to dredging equipment, Types, Mechanical II Dredgers, Hydraulic dredgers 2 15% Trailing suction hopper dredger– General description, design, 3 technical construction, strength and stability, Dredging process

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION The cutter suction dredgers - General description, design, Dredging equipment, Drives, Spud systems, technical 3 construction, Dredging process 15% III Plain suction dredgers – Types, working method, design, layout, 3 Technical construction, Dredging process Barge unloading dredgers - General description, design, , layout, 3 Technical construction, Dredging process Bucket dredgers - General description, Area of application, method of working, design, Technical construction, Dredging 3 process Grab or Clamshell dredgers – Working method, Areas of IV 3 15% application, Design aspects, layout, production capacity Backhoe or dipper dredgers - General considerations, Working method, Area of application, Main Layout, Production 3 capacity SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Major features of following harbor crafts:- 2 Navigation Aids Vessels 20% V Tugsand Towboats, Firefighting tugs 2 Barges, pilot boats 2

Major features of following harbor crafts:- 1 Salvage/buoy vessels VI Construction Support Vessels 2 20% Fireboats, Patrol and Rescue Vessels 2 Pollution Response Vessels, Floating docks 1 END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Maximum Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

 Answer all 8 questions of 3 marks each.  1 question each from modules I to IV and 2 questions each from modules V & VI. PART B

 Answer any 2 complete questions out of 3 for each module.  Each question from module I to IV carries 6 marks.  Each question from module V & VI carries 7 marks.  Each complete question can have maximum of 4 subsections.

Year of Course Code Course Name L-T-P-Credits Introduction

CE484 APPLIED EARTH SYSTEMS 3-0-0-3 2016

Prerequisites: Nil Course objectives:  Appreciation of earth as a system of interrelated components  Understanding mechanisms that give rise to oceanographic and atmospheric phenomena  Comprehension of processes that result in characteristic land features in different climatic regimes Syllabus : Fundamental concepts of equilibrium - Geomorphic agents and processes -Earth systems -climate change - Weathering- Fluvial processes- Stages of stream development- Drainage patterns - Soil- Deserts- Wagner’s ideas of continental drift, Plate Tectonics- Basics of oceanography-. Basic ideas about plankton and primary productivity -Basics of atmosphere and atmospheric processes - Heat budget- Fundamental concepts of precipitation, global wind patterns. Expected Outcomes: i. The students would understand the roles of surface and sub surface phenomena in shaping surface features of earth ii. The course would appreciate the ramifications of any atmospheric, oceanographic or land process on other component subsystems including biosphere. Text Books / References: 1. Critchfield H J ,General Climatology Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1983 2. Fetter C W, Applied Hydrogeology CBS New Delhi, 1990 3. Carlson, D H, Plummer, CC and McGreary, D, Physical geology: Earth Revealed McGraw Hill, New York, 2006 4. Pinet P R, Oceanography – An Introduction to the Planet Oceanus, West Publishing Co., 1992 5. Valdiya K S, Environmental Geology: Ecology, Resource and Hazard Management McGraw-Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2013

OURSE PLAN End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks % Fundamental concepts of equilibrium. Geomorphic agents and processes. Basic concept of Earth as a system and its component sub systems. I 7 15 Climate Change vis-a-vis the interrelationships of the subsystems- Green House Effect and Global warming, basic ideas about their causes and effects. Weathering- relevance, influence of and on earth systems, types and controlling factors II Fluvial processes-hydrological cycle, fluvial erosion, transportation 7 15 and deposition, fluvial landforms. Stages of stream development; Drainage patterns. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Soil- formation and controls, soil profile, soil erosion and conservation III methods. 7 15 Deserts-distribution and controls. Wagner’s ideas of continental drift, Plate Tectonics- seafloor IV spreading. Plate boundaries and their features, mechanisms of plate 7 15 movements. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Basics of oceanography: coastal upwelling and downwelling. Outlines of ocean floor topography, Brief account of marine sediments, turbidity currents, basic outlines of origin and circulation of deep sea surface 7 20 V currents (Atlantic and Pacific Oceans), coral reefs- types and concepts about their formation. Basic ideas about plankton and primary productivity. Basics of atmosphere and atmospheric processes: Structure and VI composition of the atmosphere. Heat budget, factors affecting solar 7 20 radiation. Fundamental concepts of precipitation, global wind patterns. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN (End Semester Exam) Maximum Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs

Part A -Module I & II : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part B - Module III & IV: 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part C - Module V &VI : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 20 marks each

Note : 1.Each part should have at least one question from each module

2.Each question can have a maximum of 4 subdivisions (a,b,c,d)

Year of Course Code Course Name L-T-P-Credits Introduction ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH CE494 3-0-0-3 2016 AND SAFETY

Pre-requisites: Nil

Courseobjectives:  To introduce the different types of hazards in industries and the management of hazards.  To learn the various types of pollution. Syllabus: Occupational health and toxicology- Lead-nickel, chromium and manganese toxicity-gas poisoning- Industrial hygiene, Physical, chemical and biological hazards, Safety and Health Management, noise-effects, source, Electrical Hazards and Hazards in Construction Industry, Air pollution, Water pollution, Hazardous Waste Management, pollution control in different industries Expected Outcomes: The students will i. Be able to understand the various occupational hazards and the techniques that can be adopted for managing hazards and related problems ii. Become aware regarding air pollution and water pollution problems and pollution control in industries Text Books / References: 1. Gerard Kiely, Environmental Engineering, McGraw hill Education 2. Mackenzie L Davis, Introduction to Environmental Engineering, McGraw hill Education (India) 3. National Safety Council , Hand book of Occupational Safety and Health, Chicago, 1982 4. R.K.Jain and Sunil S.Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems, Khanna publishers , New Delhi (2006) 5. S.P.Mahajan, “Pollution control in process industries”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1993 6. Slote.L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, NewYork

COURSE PLAN End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Occupational Health And Toxicology : occupational related diseases, silicosis, asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, etc. lead, nickel, chromium and I manganese toxicity, effects and prevention –Industrial toxicology, 7 15% local, systemic and chronic effects, temporary and cumulative effects. Industrial Hygiene.

Noise, noise exposure regulation. Ionizing radiation, types, effects. Chemical hazards-dust, fumes, mist, vapour, fog, gases, Methods of II Control. Biological hazards-Classification of Biohazardous agents – 7 15% bacterial agents, viral agents, fungal, parasitic agents, infectious diseases. FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Radiation and Industrial Hazards, Types and effects of radiation on human body, disposal of radioactive waste III Air Pollution - air pollutants from industries, effecton human health, 6 15% animals, Plants and Materials - concept of clean coal combustion technology - depletion of ozone Electrical Hazards, Protection against voltage fluctuations, Effects of shock on human body. Introduction of Construction industry, IV Scaffolding and Working platform, Welding and Cutting, Excavation 6 15% Work, Concreting and Cementing work, Transportation of men and material, SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Water Pollution -water pollutants-health hazards - effluent quality standards,tannery, textile effluents

Hazardous Waste Management -waste identification, characterization 8 20% V and classification, health hazards-toxic and radioactive wastes- recycling and reuse. Pollution Control In Process Industries - Pollution control in process industries like cement, paper, petroleum products-textile, tanneries- VI 8 20% thermal power plants – dyeing and pigment industries - eco-friendly energy. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN (External Evaluation) :

Maximum Marks :100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs

Part A -Module I & II : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part B - Module III & IV: 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 15 marks each

Part C - Module V &VI : 2 questions out of 3 questions carrying 20 marks each

Note : 1.Each part should have at least one question from each module

2.Each question can have a maximum of 4 subdivisions (a,b,c,d)

Course Course Name L-T-P- Year of code Credits Introduction DATA STRUCTURES CS482 3-0-0-3 2016

Pre-requisite: A course on C or C++ in the B-Tech level with emphasis on pointers and functions. Course Objectives:  To introduce linear data structures such as stacks, queues and their applications.  To introduce non-linear data structures such as trees, graphs and their applications.  To impart various sorting, searching and hashing techniques and their performance comparison. Syllabus: Introduction to various programming methodologies, terminologies and basics of algorithms analysis, Basic Abstract and Concrete Linear Data Structures, Non-linear Data Structures, Sorting Algorithms, Searching Algorithms, Hashing. Expected Outcome: The Student will be able to:- i. compare different programming methodologies and define asymptotic notations to analyze performance of algorithms ii. choose appropriate data structures like arrays, linked list, stacks and queues to for practical scenarios iii. represent and manipulate data using nonlinear data structures like trees and graphs to design algorithms for various applications iv. illustrate and compare various techniques for searching and sorting v. illustrate various hashing techniques Text Books: 1. Richard F. Gilberg and Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C, 2/e, Cengage Learning, 2005. 2. Samanta D., Classic Data Structures, Prentice Hall India, 2/e, 2009. References: 1. Aho A. V., J. E. Hopcroft and J. D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson Publication,1983. 2. Horwitz E., S. Sahni and S. Anderson, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, University Press (India), 2008. 3. Hugges J. K. and J. I. Michtm, A Structured Approach to Programming, PHI, 1987. 4. Lipschuts S., Theory and Problems of Data Structures, Schaum’s Series, 1986. 5. Martin Barrett, Clifford Wagner, And Unix: Tools For Software Design, John Wiley, 2008 6. Peter Brass, Advanced Data Structures, Cambridge University Press, 2008 7. Tremblay J. P. and P. G. Sorenson, Introduction to Data Structures with Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995. 8. Wirth N., Algorithms + Data Structures = Programs, Prentice Hall, 2004.

COURSE PLAN

End Hours Sem. Module Contents Exam Marks

Introduction to programming methodologies – structured approach, stepwise refinement techniques, programming style, documentation I – analysis of algorithms: frequency count, definition of O notation, 06 15% asymptotic analysis of simple algorithms. Recursive and iterative algorithms. Abstract and Concrete Data Structures- Basic data structures – Arrays, Linked lists:- singly linked list, doubly linked list, Circular II linked list, operations on linked list, linked list with header nodes, 07 15% applications of linked list: polynomials,.

FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Implementation of Stacks and Queues using arrays and linked lists, Applications. Trees: - m-ary Tree, Binary Trees level and height III – 07 15% of the tree, complete-binary tree representation using array, tree traversals (Recursive only), applications. Binary search tree – creation, insertion and deletion and search operations, applications. Heaps- Min-max heaps, Graphs IV – 06 15% representation of graphs, BFS and DFS (analysis not required) applications. SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION Minimum Spanning Trees – Prim’s and Kruskal algorithms. Shortest path algorithms – Djikstra and Warshall algorithms V Sorting techniques – Bubble sort, Selection Sort, Insertion sort, 07 20% Merge sort, Quick sort, Searching algorithms (Performance comparison expected. Detailed analysis not required) Linear and Binary search. (Performance comparison expected. Detailed analysis not required) VI Hash Tables – Hashing functions – Mid square, division, folding, 07 20% digit analysis, collusion resolution and Overflow handling techniques. END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

Question Paper Pattern (End semester exam)

4. Part C a. Total marks : 18 b. THREE questions, each having 9 marks. One question is from module III; one question is from module IV; one question uniformly covers modules III & IV. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 5. Part D a. Total marks : 24 b. THREE questions, each having 12 marks. One question is from module V; one question is from module VI; one question uniformly covers modules V & VI. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 6. There will be AT LEAST 60% analytical/programming/numerical questions in all possible combinations of question choices.

Course L-T-P Year of Course Name code Credits Introduction COMPUTER GRAPHICS CS484 3-0-0-3 2016

Pre-requisite: A course on C or C++ in the B-Tech level with emphasis on pointers and functions. Course Objectives  To introduce concepts of graphics input and display devices.  To introduce and discuss line and circle drawing algorithms.  To introduce 2D and 3D transformations and projections. Syllabus Basic Concepts in Computer Graphics. Input devices. Display devices. Line/Circle Drawing Algorithms. Solid area scan-conversion. Polygon filling. Two dimensional transformations. Windowing, clipping. 3D Graphics, 3D transformations. Projections – Parallel, Perspective. Hidden Line Elimination Algorithms. Expected Outcome: The Student will be able to:- i. compare various graphics devices ii. analyze and implement algorithms for line drawing, circle drawing and polygon filling iii. apply geometrical transformation on 2D and 3D objects iv. analyze and implement algorithms for clipping v. apply various projection techniques on 3D objects vi. summarize visible surface detection methods Text Books: 1. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker, Computer Graphics, PHI, 1996 2. William M. Newman and Robert F. Sproull, Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics, McGraw Hill, 1979 3. Zhigang Xiang and Roy Plastock , Computer Graphics (Schaum’s outline Series), 1986.

References 1. David F. Rogers , Procedural Elements for Computer Graphics, McGraw Hill, 2001 2. M. Sonka, V. Hlavac, and R. Boyle, Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision, Thomson India Edition, 2007. 3. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods , Digital Image Processing, Pearson, 2017 . Course Plan End Sem. Module Contents Hours Exam Marks Basic concepts in Computer Graphics – Types of Graphic I Devices – Interactive Graphic inputs – Raster Scan and Random 6 15% Scan Displays. Line Drawing Algorithm- DDA, Bresenham’s algorithm – Circle II Generation Algorithms –Mid point circle algorithm, Bresenham’s 7 15% algorithm- FIRST INTERNAL EXAM

Scan Conversion-frame buffers – solid area scan conversion – III polygon filling algorithms Two dimensional transformations. Homogeneous coordinate systems – matrix formulation and 7 15% concatenation of transformations. Windowing concepts –Window to Viewport Transformation- Two IV dimensional clipping-Line clipping – Cohen Sutherland, Midpoint 6 15% Subdivision algorithm SECOND INTERNAL EXAM Polygon clipping- Sutherland Hodgeman algorithm, Weiler- Atherton algorithm, 7 20% V Three dimensional object representation- Polygon surfaces, Quadric surfaces – Basic 3D transformations Projections – Parallel and perspective projections – vanishing points. VI Visible surface detection methods– Back face removal- Z-Buffer 7 20% algorithm, A-buffer algorithm, Depth-sorting method, Scan line algorithm. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern (End semester exam) 1. There will be FOUR parts in the question paper – A, B, C, D 2. Part A a. Total marks : 40 b. TEN questions, each have 4 marks, covering all the SIX modules (THREE questions from modules I & II; THREE questions from modules III & IV; FOUR questions from modules V & VI). All the TEN questions have to be answered. 3. Part B a. Total marks : 18 b. THREE questions, each having 9 marks. One question is from module I; one question is from module II; one question uniformly covers modules I & II. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 4. Part C a. Total marks : 18 b. THREE questions, each having 9 marks. One question is from module III; one question is from module IV; one question uniformly covers modules III & IV. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 5. Part D a. Total marks : 24 b. THREE questions, each having 12 marks. One question is from module V; one question is from module VI; one question uniformly covers modules V & VI. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 6. There will be AT LEAST 50% analytical/numerical questions in all possible combinations of question choices.

Course Course Name L-T-P - Year of code Credits Introduction CS488 C# AND .NET PROGRAMMING 3-0-0-3 2016

Pre-requisite: A course on C or C++ in the B-Tech level with emphasis on pointers and functions. Course Objectives:  To introduce C# and learn how object oriented programs can be developed using C#.  To introduce the .NET framework and learn how web based applications can be designed and developed on it. Syllabus: Introduction To C#, Object Oriented Aspects of C#, Application Development On .NET, The CLR and The .NET Framework Expected Outcome: The Student will be able to: i. apply principles of C# in object oriented programming ii. develop programs in C# for implementing solutions iii. develop web applications using the .NET framework Text Books: 1. Andrew Troelsen , C# and the .NET Platform, 2/e, A! Press, Wiky India, 2003. 2. J Liberty, O’Reilly, Programming C#, 2/e, Media publisher, 2002.

References: 1. E Balagurusamy, Programming in C#, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. 2. Herbert Schildt , The Complete Reference: C# , Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. 3. Robinson et al, Professional C#, 2/e, Wrox Press, 2002. 4. S Thamarai Selvi, R Murugesan, A Textbook on C# , Pearson Education, 2003.

Course Plan End Hours Sem. Module Contents Exam Marks Introducing C#, Understanding .NET, Overview of C#, I Literals, Variables, Data Types, Operators, Expressions, 06 15%

Branching, Looping, Methods, Arrays, Strings, Structures, II Enumerations. 07 15% Classes, Objects, Inheritance, Polymorphism, Interfaces FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION Operator Overloading, Delegates, Events, Errors and III Exceptions. Building Windows Applications 06 15% Accessing Data with ADO.NET. Programming Web Applications with Web Forms, IV Programming Web Services.` Assemblies, Versioning, 06 15% Attributes, Reflection, Viewing MetaData SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION

Course Plan End Hours Sem. Module Contents Exam Marks Type Discovery, Reflecting on a Type, Marshaling, V 07 20% Remoting, Understanding Server Object Types, Specifying a Server with an Interface, Building a Server, VI 08 20% Building the Client, Using Single Call, Threads. END SEMESTER EXAM

Question Paper Pattern End semester exam)

1. There will be FOUR parts in the question paper – A, B, C, D 2. Part A a. Total marks : 40 b. TEN questions, each have 4 marks, covering all the SIX modules (THREE questions from modules I & II; THREE questions from modules III & IV; FOUR questions from modules V & VI). All the TEN questions have to be answered. 3. Part B a. Total marks : 18 b. THREE questions, each having 9 marks. One question is from module I; one question is from module II; one question uniformly covers modules I & II. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 4. Part C a. Total marks : 18 b. THREE questions, each having 9 marks. One question is from module III; one question is from module IV; one question uniformly covers modules III & IV. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 5. Part D a. Total marks : 24 b. THREE questions, each having 12 marks. One question is from module V; one question is from module VI; one question uniformly covers modules V & VI. c. Any TWO questions have to be answered. d. Each question can have maximum THREE subparts. 6. There will be AT LEAST 60% analytical/programming/numerical questions in all possible combinations of question choices.